The URL can be used to link to this page

SC-Coppell MSW-SP 840723-- COPPELL MIDDLE SCHOOL COPPELL INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT "- COPPELL, TEXAS (214;) 471-1111 COPPELL MIDDLE SCHOOL Cnppel]l, Texas f or COPPELL INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT 12C, I Wrangler Dr'ive Coppe!.l, Texas " 75019 BOARD OF TRUSTEES Barbara Austin President Vel ton N~isbett Vi k-e-Presi dent Fo:~' Layton ,]ohnn,/ Weger Lannie Jackson Roy Br'ock Dr. Ro,/ce Lively SUPERINTENDENT Dr'. Davlid Stanf~ield BAAI Project number 8305 ~.. _ %,~ ~, l' ~ :, ~. ,., ..:::' ~, '. ......... ~ ':': H.G. RICE & COMPANY, FOOD SERVICE S. TOUB & ASSOCIATES, INC. MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL RMI STRUCTURES, INC. STRUCTURAL CHISHOLM ASSOCIATES LANDSCAF'E Contract Doc:uments Date: July 23, 1984. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS: BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Advertisement for Bids Instructions to Bidders - AIA A701 Article 9 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders Construction Bid Forms GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT: General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Supplemental Conditions SPECIFICATIONS: DIVISION SECTION TITLE PAGE NO~S I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1-6 01010 SCOPE OF THE WORK 0-1 01050 ALTERNATES & ALLOWANCES & UNIT PRICES 1-2 01400 TESTING LAB SERVICES 1-5 2 SITE WORK 02010 SUBSURFACE SOIL DATA 0-1 02100 CLEARING OF SITE 1-5 02210 SITE GRADING 1-4 02220 STRUCTURE EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 1-3 02250 DRILLED PIERS 1-3 02614 CONCRETE PAVING, CURBS & WALKS 1-3 02721 PRE-CAST CURBS 0-1 5 CONCRETE 05100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 1-3 ,05200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 1-2 03510 HEAVYWEIGHT AGGREGATE, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1--6 03558 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER 0-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 DIVISION SECTION TITLE PAGE NO'S - 4 MASONRY 04100 MORTAR 1-4 04201 BRICK VENEER 1-5 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1-5 5 METALS 05200 STEEL JOISTS 1-4 05500 STRUCTURAL STEEL & MISCELLANEOUS METALS 1-5 6 WOODS & PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1-4 06220 MILLWORK 1-5 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07110 WATERPROOFING 1-3 07220 BUILDING INSULATION 1-2 --. 07411 PORCELAIN ENAMEL FASCIA PANELS 0-i 07510 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 1-3 07600 SHEET METAL 1-4 07700 WALL FLASHING !-4 07800 ROOF ACCESSORIES 1-2 - 07900 CAULKING & SEALANTS 1-2 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES 1-6 08205 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, SOLID CORE 1-3 '- 08300 SPECIAL DOORS 0-1 08520 ALUMINUN WINDOWS 1-3 08701 FINISH HARDWARE 1-3 08765 THRESHOLDS, WEATHER- STRIPPING & SEALS 1-2 08850 GLASS & GLAZING 1-3 08950 STOREFRONT SYSTEM 1-3 ~ TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 DIVISION SECTION TITLE PAGE NO~S 9 FINISHES 09170 STUCCO 1-5 09260 GYPSUM DRYWALL 1-5 09310 CERAMIC TILE 1-5 09530 WOOD FLOORING 1-2 09540 TERRAZZO 1-4 09530 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 1-5 09600 SPORTS SURFACING 1-4 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 1-4 09680 CARPET 1-2 09900 PAINTING 1-2 10 SPECIALTIES 10000 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 1-3 10100 CHALKBOARDS & TACKBOARDS 1-2 10182 TOILET PARTITIONS 1-2 10800 TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES 1-2 11 EQUIPMENT 11400 FOOD SERVICES EQUIPMENT (}-1 11600 LABORATORY FURNITURE 1-3 11931 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT 1-3 12 FURNISHINGS 12200 WINDOW BLINDS 0-1 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS NO¥ USED 15 MECHANICAL 15000 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING 16 ELECTRICAL 16000 ELECTRICAL * * * BIDDING REQUIREMENTS ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 9-SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONSTRUCTION BID FORM ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 1 Notice to Contractors of the following construction for: COPPELL INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT Coppell, Texas RECEIPT OF BIDS: Sealed proposals for the construction of: COPPELL MIDDLE SCHOOL Coppell, Texas Will be received by: The Office of the Superintendent Coppell 1SD Administration Building, Coppell, Texas Until: 7:50 PM, Thursday, August 50, 1984. And then publicly opened and read aloud. PROJECT DESCRIPTION: The work consists of the construction of one building, a 11(:),0C)0 sf Middle School. ~iDDERS: There will be one (1) Prime Bidder. All work, excluding items listed as N.I.C., will be included in a single prime contract. BID DOCUMENTS: Prime bidders may obtain Lip to 4 complete sets of documents from the Architect's Office upon deposit of one check for $100.00 per set of plans made out to the Architect. SubBidders for Mechanical and Electrical work may obtain 1 complete set of documents from the Architect's Office upon deposit of one check for $100.00 made out to the Architect. No partial sets will be issued. Checks will be returned upon receipt of documents in good condition within 10 days of bid date. Documents will be furnished to extablished Plan Rooms at no charge. BID SECURITY: Provide a Bid Bond, A.I.A. Document A510, made payable to the Owner in an amount equal to 5% of the Bid required. BIDDER QUALIFICATION: Prior to issuance of Bid Documents, potential Bidders shall submit to the Architect a Contractors Qualification Statement, AIA Document A505, 1979 edition, indicating project experience of a similar size and type within the immediate preceeding three years. After review of qualifications, plans may/may not be issued. ARTICLE ~ SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 PART 1 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1.1 The following supplements modify~ changer delete or add to the instructions to bidders~ AIA Document A701. Where any part of the Instructions to Bidders is modified or voided by the Articles~ the unaltered provisions of that part shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1~ No change ARTICLE 2~ No change ARTICLE 5~ No change ARTICLE 4~ BIDDING PROCEDURE 1.2 Paragraph 4.1.1 add~ "Bidders shall submit one complete Bid." 1.5 Paragraph 4.~. ~ 5 add,. "Bids may not be withdrawn until 50 days after Bid Opening." ARTICLE 5~ No Change ARTICLE 6~ No Change ARTICLE 7~ PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND. 1.4 Add new paragraph as follows: "7.1.1.1-PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND in the amount of 100% of the total contract price for the project made payable to the Owner, will be required. They shall be in force for one year from and after the date of substantial completion and final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. 1.5 Add new paragraph as follows: "7.1.1.2-Surety Companies executing BONDS must appear on the Treasury Department's most current list (Cir- cular 570 as ammended) and be authorized to transact business in the State of Texas." 1.6 Add new paragraph as follows: "7.1.4 Performance Bond: The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor and his sureties as a guarantee of good faith on the part of the Contractor to execute work in strict accordance with the plans, specifications, and terms of the contract." 1.7 Add new paragraph as follows: "7.1.5 Payment Bond: McGregor Act Statutory Payment Bond for Public Work; solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and material in the prosecution of the contract in accordance with Texas Statutes as amended by the acts of the 56th Legislature, 1~5~, termed the McGregor Act of 1~59, Amended." ARTICLE 9 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2 1.8 Add new paragraph as follows: "7.1.7 No sureties will be accepted by Owner who are now in default on any bonds or who are interested in any litigation against the Owner." ARTICLE 8-FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER & CONTRACTOR 1.9 Add new paragraph as follows: "8.2 The accepted Bidder shall execute Owner/Contractor Agreement within five days following its pre- sentation.'' PART 2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 2.1 The accepted Bidder shall be prepared to commence work within ten days following receipt of "Work Order to Proceed" ~hich will generally be issued at the time of Contract execution. 2.2 The Bidder must be prepared to comply with all applicable state and federal laws, including but not limited to laws concerned with labor, equal employment opportunity, safety and minimim wages. 2.5 "The Contractor or Subcontractors and their respective surities shall be subject to a penalty, payable to the owner, resulting from th~. Contractor or Subcontractor~s refusal or failure 'to complete the Work within the Contract time. Such penalty shall be limited to a maximum of $200.00 per day. 2.4 The Owner will take "consecutive calendar days to complete the work" into account when considering the Bids. The penalty will not be taken into account when considering calendar days for the purpose of awarding a contract. 2.5 If any legal action be filed concerning this project, venue shall lie in the Owner's county, State of Texas. CONSTRUCTION BID 1 PROJECT: COPPELL MIDDLE SCHOOL TO : COPPELL 1SD CONSTRUCTION BID I have received the following documents: Specifications, and drawings as listed in "Schedule of Drawings" of the Specifications. I have also received Addendum(s) and have included their provisions in my bid. I have examined both the documents and the site, found no discrepancies, and submit the following bid. In submitting this Bid, I agree: To accept the provisions of the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders regarding disposition of bid security. To enter into and execute a Contract, if awarded on the basis of this bid, and to furnish Bonds in accordance with Article 7 of the Instructions to Bidders and the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders of this Contract. To accomplish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. To complete the work within consecutive calendar days. I will construct this Project for a lump-sum Base Bid Price as follows: dollars ($ ) CONSTRUCTION BID 2 ALTERNATES: I will include the following Alternates as a specified substitute for the Cost listed. See specification Section 01050 for Schedule of Alternatives. A1 MARBLE STALLS add/deduct $ A2 LOCKERS add/deduct $ A5 WOOD FLOOR add/deduct $ A4 AC ATHLETIC GYM add/deduct $ A5 AC PE GYM add/deduct $ A6 ROOF add/deduct $ A7 CORRIDOR WALLS add/deduct $ A8 PAINT ROOF-TOP AC UNITS add/deduct $ EXTRA WORK The undersigned contractor agrees to furnish all labor and materials for additional work ordered by the Owner and for which no pre-agreed price has been fixed for the net cost of such extra labor and materials plus _percent for overhead and profit. UNIT PRICES Should additional work of the following categories be required, adjust- ment will be made to the Contract sum at the following unit prices, which shall include ail expenses, including overhead and profit. UPi PIERS $ UP2 CASINGS $ UP5 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT $ CONSTRUCTION BID 5 I have attached to this Bid the required Bid security. BID OF hereinafter called BIDDER a Corporation/Partnership/an Individual state doing business as Date By: signature Address: SEALy i~ a Corporation GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION i GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION The General Conditions governing the entire contract and its operations shall be the standard form of the "GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION" AIA Document A-201 Thirteenth Edition August, 1976 Refer to the SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS following herein this Section of the Specifications for certain modifications to the standard form of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS: The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA Document a-201, Thirteenth Edition, dated 1976) hereinafter refered to as the "General Conditions" are hereby made part of this Project Manual to the same extent as if reproduced herein in full, except as modified, amended, revised, rescinded or supplemented by these Supplemental Conditions, which shall take precedence in all cases of conflicting requirements. Those portions of the A.I.A. General Conditions which are not altered, modified, amended or rescin- ded by these Supplementary General Conditions shall remain in full force and effect as published. STANDARDS: Reference in this Project Manual to known standards, such as specifications, codes, etc., are intended to mean the latest editions of such standards adopted and published as of the date of the invitation to submit proposals pertaining to this Project. Throughout the Project Manual, references are made to codes, tests, specifications, standards, recommendations and procedures established by certain professional and/or technical organizations and societies, together with the abbreviations by which they are in certain instances identifies: AASHO American Association of State Highway Officials AIA American Institute of Architects AIA American Insurance Association ACI American Concrete Institute AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 2 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction ANSI American National Standards Institute API American Petroleum Institute ASA American Standards Association ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Work Association NBS National Bureau of Standards NBFU National Bureau of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code UL Underwriters Laboratories FIA Factory Insurance Association ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1.1 Add the following paragraph, "1.1.5 PROJECT MANUAL-The Project Manual is the volume which includes the bidding requirements, sample forms and certain of the Contract Documents such as the Conditions of the Contract and the Specifications." ARTICLE 2 - ARCHITECT: 2.1 The following is hereby added to paragraph 2.1.1 of the General Conditions "The ARCHITECT for this project is the Corporation, BURLESON ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS, INC. ,705 Stemmons Towers South, Dallas Texas 75207. ARTICLE 5 - owner: 5.1 The following is hereby added to paragraph 5.1.1 "The OWNER of this project is COPPELL ISD, Coppell, Texas. 5.2 Delete subparagraph 5.2.5 in its entirety and add the following subparagraph, "5.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished free of charge twenty (20) copies of Drawings and Project Manuals. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of reproduction." ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACTOR: 4.1 Add the following paragraph, "4.6.2 The Owner is exempt from State Sales Tax." 4.2 Add paragraph 4.19 as follows, "4.19 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with such schedules as may be required by section GENERAL REQUIREMENTS." ~RAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 5 ARTICLE~5,- SUB-CONTRACTORS: No Change ARTICLE 6 - WORK BY OWNER: No Change ARTICLE ? - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS: No Change ARTICLE 8 - TIME: No Change ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS & COMPLETION: 9.1 Add the following paragraph, "9.5.1.1 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay 95% of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments." ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS % PROPERTY: No Change ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE: 11.1 Insert the following in sub paragraph 11.1.1 after the word maintain-" in a company or companies licensed to do business in the state in which the Project is located." 11.2 Add the following, "11.1.1.7 Liability Insurance shall include all mador divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: 1. Premises Operations (including X-C/U as applicable) 2. Independent Contractors~ Protective 5. Products and Completed Operations 4. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted. 5. Contractual-including specified provision for Contractors' obligation under paragraph 4.18 6. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles 7. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations 11.3 Add the following sub-paragraph, "11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Sub-paragraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following or greater if required by law: 1. Workers~ Compensation: (a~ State: Statutory GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 4 11.5 (Continued) (b) Applicable federal (e.g., Longshoremen's): Statutory (c) Employer's Liability 2. Comprehensive General Liability (including Premises- Operations; Independent Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad From Property Damage): (a) Bodily Injury: $500~000.00 Each Occurrence $500~000.00 Annual Aggregate (b) Property Damage: $100 ~ 000.00 E a c h Occ u r r a n c e $500 ~ 000 . 00 Annual Aggregate (c) Products and Completed Liability Insurance to be maintained for i year after final payment. (d) Property Damage Liability Insurance shall not provide X, C or U coverage. 5. Contractual Liability: (a) Bodily Injury: $500~000.00 Each Occurence $500~000.00 Annual Aggragate (b) Property Damage: $100,000.00 Each Occurence $500~000.00 Annual Aggregate 4. Personal Injury, ~ith Employment Exclusion deleted: SNONE Annual Aggragate 5. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: (a) Bodily Injury: ~!~¢)00.00 Each Person $500~000.00 Each Occurence (b) Property Damage: $100,000.00 Each Occurence 6. Umbrella Excess Liability-None required 7. Aircraft Liability (owned and non-owned)-None required GENERAL AND SUPPu-MENTAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 5 11.5 (Continued) 8. Watercraft Liability (owned and non-owned)- None required 11.4 Delete Subparagraph 11.5.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: "11.5.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. Such insurance shall be in a company or companies against which the Owner has no reasonable objection. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and shall include "all risk" insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. If not covered under all risk insurance or otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall effect and maintain similar property insurance on portions of the Work stored off the site or in transit when such portions of the Work are to be included in an Application for Payment under Subparagraph 9.5.2 11.5 Add the following Clause 11.5.1.1 to 11.5.1: "11.5.1.1 The form of policy for this coverage shall be Co~eted Value." 11.6 Add the following Clause 11.5.1.2 to 11.5.1: "If by the terms of this insurance any mandatory deductibles are required, or if the Contractor should elect, with the concurrence of the Owner, to increase the mandatory deductible amounts or purchase this insurance with voluntary deductible amounts, the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of the amount of all deductibles in the event of a paid claim. If separate contractors are added as insoreds to be covered by this policy, the separate contractors shall be responsible for payment of appropriate part of any deductibles in the event claims are paid on their part of the Project." ll.7 Delete Subparagraph 11.5.4 in its entirety and substitute the following: "11.5.4 The Contractor shall file two certified copies of all policies with the Owner before exposure to loss can occur. If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance and to so notify the Owner~ then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto." 11.8 11.5.5 Delete this Subparagraph in its entirety. 11.9 In the first sentence, after the words "... (2)the Architect"~ insert the words: "the Architect's consultants," After the words "...separate contractors if any. and",insert the words: "any of". DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01000 GENERAL REQUIREMTENTS O1010 SCOPE OF THE WORK O1050 ALTERNATES, ALLOWANCES & UNIT PRICES 01400 TESTING LAB SERVICES 01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 1. CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 1.1 The Conditions of the Contract including the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and other Conditions are part of each Contract and Subcontract. 1.2 Division 1, General Requirements, contains requirements for the entire Prodect including General, Mechanical and Electrical and is part of the Conditions of the Contract. 2. SUMMARY OF THE WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary and proper to complete all the Work described by the Contract Documents in their entirety in one Lump Sum Contract. 2.2 This Contract, as described by the Contract Documents, includes ail Work, specific or implied by necessary association by said Documents, to complete the Project in its entirety as foiiows: 2.2.1 This Project consists of Buildings, [list description of buildings, note parking lots, drives and sidewalks. Where is project located?] .2.2 The Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, all applicable Drawings and Specifications and all addenda thereto, and are identified as Documents of the General Contract. 5. REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT 5.1 It is understood that all Contractors, Subcontractors, Sub- subcontractors and all others furnishing material, labor or equipment, have thoroughly examined the Site, the Contract Documents, and all other conditions affecting their Work or area of responsibility~ and no claims for extra cost or compensation shall be made or accepted on account of anything arising from said conditions. 5.2 Design Drawings or Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner for approval before any Work of fabrication shall commence, on the following items of Work, and on any other items considered necessary and proper by the Owner's authorized representative. 5.2.1 Metals 5.2.2 Wood & Plastics 5.2.5 Thermal & Moisture Protection 5.2.4 Doors and Windows 5.2.5 Finishes 5.2.& Speciaities 5.2.7 Equipment 5.2.8 Furnishings 01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2 5.2 Approval of changes in the Documents shall be in accordance with the General Conditions and necessary changes in the field shall be marked on a reproducible sepia and submitted to Owner as "as built" Drawings. 5.4 The Architect or Owner will not in any way engage to superintend so as to relieve the Contractor of the resPonsibility for complete and proper execution of the Work nor any consequences of neglect or carelessness by him or his subordinates. 5.5 Temporary office and sanitary facilities shall be maintained by the General Contractor. The temporary office shall be weatherproofed and contain lights, heat and phone and be capable of locking. 5.6 Water, Power, Light and Heat shall be maintained by the General Contractor during the construction period. This is to include electrical service to test the Air Conditioning and all other equipment. 5.7 No Subcontractor or material supplier shall use any portion of the project under construction for warehousing materials during construction. Subcontractors may place on lob site, temporary buildings, trailer, etc., for materials storage at the consent and direction of the General Contractor. 5.8 In all cases where submissions of samples, schedules, shop drawings, etc. are required for the Owner, the Architect will act as the Owner's authorized representative. 5.9 At the Completion of the ]ob, a list of all materials used shall be submitted to the Owner. The intent of this list is to provide the Owner with the necessary information for replacement of materials for future maintenance. Each material shall be called out by manufacturer, local distributor, size, weight, color, gage, number and/or other pertinent information. 5.10 All items drawn or specified outside the property lines are to be included in this Project. 5.11 Cutting and patching of walls, plenums, ceilings and other construction shall be made only with permission of the General Contractor, and Work shall be repaired to its condition prior to cutting. 5.12 Not Used 5.15 Each Subcontractor shall examine the Work in place by other Subcontractors upon which.his Work is contingent and upon acceptance of this Work, each Subcontractor shall be responsible for the final finished quality of his own Work. 01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 5 5.14 Verify all measurements at the building and assume responsibility for the correctness of same. Extra charges or compensation will not be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the Drawings; any differences which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the Work. 5.15 Employ an experienced and competent Civil Engineer, and cause him to establish two (2) separate bench marks to which easy access may be had during the progress of the Work, to determine all lines and grades, and verify same from time to time during the progress of the Work. 5.16 Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish, at his own expense and risk, all tools, apparatus, hoists, derricks, including power for same and all temporary Work and materials required for the proper execution of the Work. 5.16.1 Install temporary equipment in such a manner that the finished Work will not be damaged by smoke, falling mortar, concrete or other causes. Locations and arrangements of temporary equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. 3.16.2 Supply and erect necessary scaffolding for the erection of the Work. The scaffolding shall be constructed as to afford safety and protection to both craftsmen and their Work and the Work of other trades. 5.17 Provide a straight line telephone in the office, where directed, for the use of all employed about the building. Pay for the installation, maintenance, removal and all charges for the use of this telephone, except long distance charges for same. The telephone shall remain until the final completion of the Work and shall be removed when directed by the Owner. 5.18 The Contractor, at his own expense and option, may employ a watchman, at such time as he deems necessary to protect or attend the Work. ~.18.1 Provide a person or persons for janitor Work, who shall keep all offices clean, attend to the temporary toilet rooms and keep them clean and supplied, attend to drinking water and supplies. This person shall also help keep the construction areas broomed and relatively clean· 5.19 Prior to final payment, provide the following maintenance information and operating instruction for equipment and systems provided under the Contract· 01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4 5.19.1 Procure and/or prepare operating and maintenance instructions '-- for all equipment, particularly mechanical and electrical, that will require any adjustment, servicing, or attention for its proper operation. These instructions shall set forth all of the information ..... necessary for the Owner to operate and make full and efficient use of equipment, and perform such maintenance and servicing as would be done by the Owner or his personnel. They shall be written in simple, non- technical language when possible with sufficient diagrams and explanation where necessary to be readily understandable to average layment. Possible hazards shall be particularly pointed out with instructions cautioning against mistakes in operation that might result in damage or danger to equipment~ building or personnel. 5.19.2 After submission of the above mentioned written instructions, furnish conpetent Engineer(s) at such time or times as directed by Architect to meet with Owner or his representative, fully explain instructions and to demonstrate and fully familiarize the Owner or his representative with all of the equipment and all phases of its '- operation and maintenance. The amount of time to be devoted to instructions shall be reasonable and consistent with the size of the installation and the conplexity thereof. Instructions shall be adequate to the extent that the Owner's personnel may proceed with normal operations in a safe and efficient manner. ~.19.3 In addition to the above mentioned instructions, furnish to Owner one (1) copy of manufacturer's literature for each item of mechanical and electrical equipment installed on the job. Notations shall be written on literature indicating how particular items were used and its location. 4. SHOP DRAWINGS 4.1 The Contractor shall, upon establishing a construction scheduie~ submit a schedule of Shop Drawing requirements indicating the approximate dates Shop Drawings will be submitted and data approval is required. Allow a minimum o~ three (5) weeks for review of structural~ mechanical and electrical items and 14 days of architectural items. All Shop Drawings shall be submitted within ~0 days of date o~ Contract. 4.2 The Shop Drawings~ including both drawings and brochures, shall be categorized to conform to the Divisions of the Specification format and each category shall be numbered consecutively. Each submittal of drawings shall conform to the following: 01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 5 4.2.1 Identify with: .1 Name of Project .2 Date of Submittal .5 Division Category .4 Submittal Number .5 Description .6 Location that material or equipment is to be installed 4.2.2 Drawings shall be prepared by skilled draftsmen and shall show all necessary plans, elevations, sections, dimensions and details including information required for connecting to other work and types of material and finishes. 4.2.5 A transmittal letter shall accompany each submittal, giving a complete description of each item within the submittal. 4.2.4 The Shop Drawings submitted shall have been examined by the Contractor and shall bear a notation over his signature stating that to the best of his knowledge, they conform to the requirements of the Contract. 4.2.5 Drawings shall be submitted in the form of one blueline direct print and one reproducible print of each sheet. Drawings will be checked, using the direct print for a rough draft of corrections and for notations. These will then be transferred to the reproducible print which will bear the notation of the type of approval or resubmitted requirements. The reproducible print will be used to make the record copy and will then be returned to the Contractor for proper distribution. The Contractor shall bear the costs of printing. 4.5 Brochures and other submittal data that cannot be reproduced economically shall be submitted in such quantities as to allow the Owner to retain two copies after review. 5. SAMPLES 5.1 Submit samples in triplicate of adequate size, showing quality, type, color, range, finish, texture, within sixty (60) days of date of Contract. 5.2 Where Specifications require manufacturer's printed installation directions, submit duplicate copies of such directions with samples and transmittal letter requesting approval. 5.5 Prepay transportation charges to Architect's office on samples forwarded· 5.4 Lable each sample with material name, quality, Contractor's name, data, project name and number, other pertinent data as noted in Shop Drawl n~ requirements. 01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 6 5.5 Subcontractors shall submit samples to the Contractor and the Contractor shall determine that such meet the requirements of the specifications and then forward in one <1) transmittal to the Owner the samples of all materials selected. Coordinate submission with the Construction Schedule. 6. SCHEDULES 6.1 Submit to the Owner, immediately after award of the Contract and prior to signing the Contract~ the following schedules. 6.1.1 Schedule of Construction Completion: Bar graph showing Trades Subcontractors versus wee;~ly Beginning & Ending times. Show time of Substantial Completion. 6.1.2 Schedule of Values: Listing all subcontract amounts. 6.1.5 Schedule of Draws: Estimated monthly draws over the time of Construction. 6.1.4 Schedule of Subcontractors 01010 SCOPE OF THE WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 The Project described by the Contract Documents consists of ali Work required by said documents to complete the Project in its entirety, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: .1 All site work including grading, drainage, paving, and excavation. .2 The complete construction of ali buildings. The complete construction of all other improvements including Plazas, Landscaping, signs and parking areas. .4 All mechanical electrical work conjuctive therewith including air conditioning, plumbing, lighting and power distribution. 1.1.2 Work described by the Contract Documents consists of the Basic Construction, and Work described as N.I.C. (Not in Contract) to be commissioned by the Owner in separate contracts. 1.1.3 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT: The food service equipment will be bid separately by the Owner and be made a part of this contract. 01050 ALTERNATES, ALLOWANCES & UNIT PRICES I PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.1.2 In the event the Owner elects to accept any/or all of the Alternate Bids, the lump-sum base bid shall be adjusted respectively. 1.1.5 Co-ordinate pertinent related work and modify surrounding work as required to complete the project under each accepted Alternate & Allowance. 1.1.4 Ail Allowance items shall be included in the Contract without General Contractor subtracting overhead, profit, insurance, etc. Sub-Contractor~s actual price on allowance items shall be the price used to adjust the contract. 1.1.5 All Unit Prices shall include labor, materials, overhead, profit, insurance, etc. PART 2 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A1 MARBLE STALLS: Base bid includes metal toilet partitions throughout and metal shower stalls in the girl's dressing rooms. This alternate is to change to Marble toilet stalls with metal doors and Marble shower stalls in the girl's dressing rooms. A2 LOCKERS: Base bid includes metal lockers in the corridors as specified. This alternate is to change the corridor lockers to "QUIET" lockers with built-in combination locks. A5 WOOD FLOOR: Base bid includes a wood floor in the gymnasiums. This alternate changes the wood floor to "THRUST-A-PAD SLEEPER SYSTEM" by Homer, 25/52 inch maple flooring, second or better grade. A4 AC ATHLETIC GYM: Base bid includes air-conditioning the Athletic Gym. This alternate deletes the HVAC units and provides 6 gas-fired unit heaters, each w/ 6"flue through the roof; BTU in 100,000; BTU out 80,000; CFM 1500; HP 1/20; 120/single phase; Trane GPAD 01000 B; fan guard; electronic ignition; thermostats and neccessary gas piping. This alternate also provides 4-60"x40" louvers w/ 2-position motorized dampers interlocked with exhaust fans and 4-5500 CFM, 800 RPM 120/ single phase exhaust fans, Cook 24S5B, with motorized backdraft dampers. 01050 ALTERNATES~ ALLOWANCES & UNIT PRICES 2 A5 AC PE GYM: Base bid includes air-conditioning the PE Gym. This alternate deletes the HVAC units and provides 6 gas-fired unit heaters, each w/ 6"flue through the roof; BTU in 100~000; BTU out 80,000; CFM 1300; HP 1/20; 120/single phase; Trane GPAD 01000 B; fan guard; electronic ignition; thermostats and neccessary gas piping. This alternate also provides 4-60"x40" louvers w/ 2-position motorized dampers interlocked with exhaust fans and 4-3500 CFM, 800 RPM 120/ single phase exhaust fans, Cook 24S5B, with motorized backdraft dampers. A6 ROOF: Base bid includes OCF roof spec 425 IED. This alternate changes the specified roof to OCF Durbigum with 10 year manufacturers guarantee. Equal roofs approved prior to bid will be accepted. A7 CORRIDOR WALLS: Under the base bid, the CMU corridor partitions will be painted. This alternate provides full height ceramic tile veneer and ceramic tile base over the CMU partitions at the door pockets and ceramic tile veneer on the CMU partitions behind the lockers from the top of the lockers to the ceiling. A8 PAINT ROOF-TOP AC UNITS: Base bid includes manufactures standard finish on the roof-top units. This alternate includes painting the HVAC units under the provisions of 09900, Painting. PART 5 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES Provide Allowance of $55~000.00 to furnish Finish Hardware at the lob site. PART 4 UNIT PRICES UP1 PIERS: Should additional/less depth be required to properly ground piers in the appropriate soil type~ furnish a cost per linear foot to add/delete depth of piers. UP2 CASINGS: Casing piers due to seepage/caving may be required during the installation of drilled piers. Provide an average cost per pier to case. For bidding purposes, casings will not be required. UP5 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT: The food service equipment will be bid .separately b~ the owner. The bid is expected to be approximately $185,000.00. Provide a percentage mark-up to make the equipment a part of the General Contract for Construction. 01400 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 An independent Testing Laboratory, employed and paid by the Owner, will perform the professional Laboratory services specified herein. .1 Testing Laboratory will make ali inspections and perform all tests in accordance with the rules and regulations of the building code and all jurisdictional authorities of the Local and State Authorities, the specifications of the ASTM and other respective technical societies, organizations or bodies having relation to the Work of materials inspected or tested, and in accordance with this and other respective Sections of the Specifications. .~ Where the terms "Inspector" and "Testing Laboratory: are used throughout this and all other Sections of the Specifications, they mean and refer respectively to an officially designated and accredited "Inspector" of the related Testing Laboratory and the "Testing Laboratory" selected to perform the functions specified in this Section of the Specification. 1.1.2 Professional laboratory services will include, butt not necessarily be limited to the following: .1 Inspecting and testing concrete Work, as specified herein. .2 Checking air content control in concrete. .5 Making slump tests of concrete. .4 Preparing test cylinders for all concrete and supplying cardboard cylinders therefor. .5 Compression testing of all specimen cylinders taken from all concrete actually placed throughout the Work. .6 Making preliminary tests of soil fill and backfill material shall be done by Soils Engineer. .7 Making fill and backfill density tests at the site shall be done by Soils Engineer. .8 Keeping inspecting and testing logs of all inspection and tests of concrete. .9 Testing Lime Stabilization of sub-grade, if required. .10 Submitting certificates, records and reports of all inspection's and tests to Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer~ & Contractor. 014(}0 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 2 1.5 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR: 1.3.1 Deliver to the Laboratory, without cost, adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested. 1.3.2 Advise Laboratory sufficiently in advance of construction operations to allow Laboratory to complete any required check-tests and assign personnel for field inspection and testing as specified. 1.5.5 Furnish such nominal labor as is required to assist Laboratory personnel in obtaining and handling samples at the site, and provide access thereto. 1.4 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF LABORATORY PERSONNEL: 1.4.1 Laboratory personnel shall inspect and/or test materials, assemblies, specimens, and Work performed including design mixes, and methods and techniques as specified and report to the Owner the progress thereof. 1.4.2 Should it appear that the material furnished and/or Work performed by the Contractor fails to meet requirements of Contract Documents, inspector shall direct the attention of the Contractor and the Owner to such failure or infringement. In perticular the inspecto~ shall reject prior to placement any concrete delivered to the site that. does not meet specifications. 1.4.5 The inspector is not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of the Drawings and Specifications, or to approve or accept any portion of the Work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS (CERTIFICATIONS) 1.5.1 Submit, as directed by Owner, five (5) copies of certification of each and every inspection and test required to be made as part of the Work of the Section, or ordered by the Owner or the General Contractor to be made either in addition to or supplementary to inspecting and testing specified herein or in other Sections of the Specifications. 1.5.2 State in certificate all details of each inspection and test to indicated satisfactory compliance with requirements of the Drewings and Specifications. Also state in certificate any and all unsatisfactory conditions or failure to comply with requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. This requirement is in addition to reporting immediately to the Owner all items of unsatisfactory conditions and failures to comply with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. 1.5.5 Make above specified certification regul~arl~, not less frequently than bi-weekly and more often, if progress of the Work warrants more frequent inspecting and testi~,g. 01400 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.5.4 At completion of each trade or branch of Work requiring inspecting and testing, submit a final certificate attesting to satisfactory completion of Work inspected and loll compliances with requirements for all Work and materials tested. State in certificate all details of exceptions allowed in writing by General Contractor or Owner or jurisdictional authorities. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 5 EXECUTION 3. I INSPECTING CONCRETE: 5.1.1 Perform inspection of concrete in accordance with 'the A.C.I. Manual of Concrete Inspection (SP-2) and "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection" (A.C.I. 511-64). 5.1.2 As part of duties and responsibilities under this Section of the Specifications, make certain that all materials used are in accordance with requirements of Specifications. 3.2 DESIGN, CONTROL AND TESTING OF CONCRETE: 5.2.1 The Testing Laboratory shall perform any or all of the following services: .1 During the progress of mixing and placing concrete on job, take specimens, and provide molds as specified. Transport, cure and store cylinders in accordance with the Standard Method for Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Field, ASTM Specifications C-51-66. Perform compression tests of one (1) specimen after seven (7) days and two (2) after twenty-eight days. Seven (7) day strength will be for infor- mation, twenty-eight (28) day strength will be for acceptance. Seven (7) day strength shall test out at 80% of 28 day strength in order to proceed with work. Hold extra cylinder for testing if 28 day breaks are low. .2' Conduct compression tests of concrete in accordance with ASTM Specifications, Designation C-29-66. .5 See Structural Drawings for locations for various strengths of concrete. .4 Design of concrete mixes: The Testing Lab will prepare a mix design from available materials for each class of concrete on the job for review by the Architect. Review and acceptance by the Architect in no way relieves the supplier of the responsibility for the perfo?~nce of the'concrete. 01400 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 4 .5 During progress of Work, test cylinders shall be made and tested for each different mix placed in any one day. For every concrete placement of fifty (50) cubic yards or part thereof over ten (10) cubic yards, four compression test cylinders will be made by Testing Laboratory of samples taken during pour. .6 Slump tests: .1 Make slump test for each set of cylinders in accordance with ASTM Designation C-145-66. .2 Slumps to be as scheduled in Section 05510, Heavyweight aggregate, Structural Concrete. .7 Laboratory technicians shall not act as foremen, or perform other duties for Contractor. Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective Work or materials will not, in any way, prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered. Laboratory technicians are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of Specifications, or to approve or accept any portion of Work. .8 Test reports will show time test was made, truck ticket number, slump and time of batching, and location of each placement. .9 When strength of test cylinders falls below design strength and Owner has required drilling of concrete core specimens, test core specimens in accordance with ASTM Specifications, Designation C-42-64.Cost ut coring and testing will be bourne by the contractor. .10 Report promptly to Owner all details of reasons for rejection of any and all quantities of concrete. Give all information concerning locations of the concrete pours, quantities, date of pours, and other pertinent facts concerning concrete represented by the specimens. 5.5 TESTIN8 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL 5.5.1 Soils Engineer shall conduct preliminary tests of all fill and backfill material for suitability gradation, density, optimum moisture content and plasticity Index. 5.5.2 Soils Engineer shall conduct standart Proctor tests for compaction of fill and bmckfill in all areas. Make at least one (1) test per two thousand (2000) square feet of area for each lift. 5.5.5 Soils Engineer shall submit to Owner a log of all preliminary tests of soil fill materials and Proctor density tests of all fill, and give reasons for any and all rejections of'material and fill. * * * DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 02010 SUBSURFACE SOIL DATA 02100 CLEARING OF SITE (-~°°10 SITE GRADING 02220 STRUCTURE EXCAVATING & BACKFILLING 02230 DRILLED PIERS 02614 CONCRETE PAVING, CURBS & WALKS 02721 PRECAST CURBS 02010 SUBSURFACE SOIL DATA 1 - PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 The Owner commissioned an investigation of subsurface soil __ conditions at the building site. The information was obtained for use in preparing the foundation design for the building, and is indicative only of the soil conditions where borings were taken. 1.2 The Report was prepared by MAXIM ENGINEERS DALLAS, TEXAS PART 2 TEST BORINGS AND REPORTS 2.1 Test borings have been made at various locations within the construction area and the results of such borings are available for inspection at the following locations. They are not part of the Contract Documents. .-. Office of the Architect Office of the Structural Engineer Office of the Superintendent of Schools 2.2 Boring logs and reports are made available for information only, and the continuity of conditions represented therein are not guaranteed. Ail conclusions drawn by the Contractor as to existing - conditions shall be the result of his own investigations and studies. PART 5 INVESTIGATIQN AND RESPQNSIBILITY 5.1 Bidders are expected to examine the site and the record of investigation and may make their own investigations to determine character of materials to be encountered. 5.2 The Architect and the Qwner do not assume any responsibility for variations of subsoil quality or conditions at locations other than places shown at the time the investigation was made. 02100 CLEARING OF SITE 1 - PART I GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not ali inclusive but listed as a guide~ is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1~ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Clearing and Grubbing. .5 Not used. .4 Demolition of designated Structures and Paving. .5 Pretection. .6 Disposal of surplus materials, waste and debris. .7 Clean-up 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: 1.5.1 Notify utility companies and appropriate Departments of local municipalities when working in areas where utility lines might be encountered. Assume responsibility for repairs to damaged utility lines as a result of Work performed under provisions of this Section the Specifications. 1.5.2 Notify local Public Works Department and/or State Highway Department before commencing any work on Highway Right-of-Way and/or public streets~ walks~ or plublic streets, walks, or public property. Comply with requirements of authorized public officials, having jurisdiction in matters pertaining to this Work. 1.5.5 Work performed under provisions in this Section of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with related Codes and Ordinances and in compliance with standards, regulations and/or specifications established by the appropriate authority. 1.4 PROTECTION: 1.4.1 Protect streets, roads, adjacent property and other Works to remain for the duration of the Work of this Project. 1.4.2 Methods of protection will be optional; however, damage to property or Work shall be repaired or replaced to the Owner's satisfaction. 02100 CLEARING OF SITE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Materials shall be optional as required for the Work. PART 5 EXECUTION 3.1 LIMITS OF CLEARING: 3.1.1 Limits of clearing shall be areas within contract limit lines. 3.1.2 Extend contract limit lines to include Work areas on Public property and elsewhere as required to complete the Work included in the Contract. 3.2 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND DEMOLITION: 3.2.1 Remove and dispose of all obstructions within the contract limit lines such as above ground structures, on grade structures, below grade structures, trees, stumps, roots, vegetation of all kinds, and all rubbish and debris whether above or below ground except for any of the above where specifically designated to remain either on the Drawings or by the Owner. 3.~.~° o Remove obstructions to a depth of two feet (2~) below natural ground or two feet (2~) below the elevation of the excavation, whichever is lower, unless otherwise described herein. ~.~~.~ ~ Backfill holes remaining after removal of obstructions in accordance with provisions specified in SECTION 02210. 5.5 DISPOSAL 3.3.1 Waste materials accumulated as a result of the clearing operations specified in this Section of the Specifications shall be removed from the site and disposed of in a manner and at a location satisfactory to the local authorities as specified in Paragraph 1.3.3. 3.5.2 Salvageable materials accumulated as a result of the clearing operations specified in this Section of the specifications shall become the property of the Owner, but shall be removed from the site to a place designated by the Owner or shall be disposed of as directed by the Owner. 3.3.5 Removal: .1 Material to be removed shall be removed from the site daily as it accumulates. 02100 CLEARING OF SITE .2 Should the Contractor elect to continue Work beyond normal working hours~ material to be removed shall not be allowed to ... accumulate for more than 24 hours. 5.5.4 Burning of material on the site will not be permitted except with written authorization by the Owner and in strict accordance with provisions of Paragraph 1.1.5. 5.4 CLEAN UP: 5.4.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section~ keeping premises, streets~ sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 5.4.2 Remove and dispose of trash and debris as specified herein in Article 5.5. 02210 SITE GRADING 1 · - PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but lis- ted as a guide, is as follows: .... .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Laying out of the Work and setting grade stakes. .5 Strip and stockpile topsoil. .4 Rough grading the entire site, including streets. .5 Removing any surplus materials,.cut from the site, to - designated off-site location, unless otherwise directed. .6 Providing any required borrow material from approved off-site locations. .7 Protection of adjacent property, utility lines, sewers, and on-site structures to remain in place. .8 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specified elsewhere -- 1.5 PROTECTION: Protect workmen and streets, buildings, utilities, etc., that are to remain adjacent to and on project site. 1.5.1 Provide shoring, bracing, piling, planking and cribbing as required to prevent caving or erosion of sides of excavations. Remove, in a manner to prevent caving, as excavations are backfilled. 1.5.2 Provide for surface drainage and keep excavations free of water during construction period by approved means, regardless of the nature, cause or source of the water. 1.3.5 Protect newly graded areas from the actions of the elements, any settlement of washing that accrues shall be repaired, and grades re- established to the required elevations and slopes. 1.4 SAMPLES: Submit samples of proposed fill materials to Owner for approval prior to use of the material. 1.5 LAYOUT: Layout of all Work must be approved by Owner before commencement of Work included in this Section of t.he Specifications. 02210 SITE GRADING 1.6 BENCH MARKS: Maintain bench marks, monuments and other reference points; if disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed. 1.7 UTILITIES: Observe all rules and regulations governing the respective utilities in executing Work included in this Section of the Specifications. 1.7.1 Protect active utilities on the project site as specified; ._ remove or relocate only when required by the Contract Documents. 1.7.2 Report inactive and abondoned utilities encountered in excavating and grading operations to the Owner, remove, plug or cap as "- directed by the Owner. 1.8 QUALITY CONTROL: 1.8.1 The Owner, at his discretion, may employ an Independent Testing Laboratory to supervising to supervise grading, and filling operations and/or perform compaction tests as required. 1.8.2 Perform Site Grading operations in co-operation with duly authorized Testing Laboratory personnel. -- PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TOPSOIL: 2.1.1 Topsoil for use in preparation of beds, lawns, and shrub and tree pits shall be as specified in the LANDSCAPING DRAWINGS, or if '- LANSCAPING is not included in this contract, shall be as follows: .1 Rich, friable, sandy loam capable of supporting plant life, ._. free of lumps, debris, and as far as possible, free of weeds, or any other undesireable matter. .2 Topsoil shall be approved by Owner's representative prior to placement, whether available at site or supplied from approved off-sitm sources. 2.2 FILL MATERIAL: Excavated or Borrow ~ I Free of trash, debris, frozen materials, roots, sod tufts, wood or other deleterious concentrations of organic matter. 2.~.-~ Free of large rocks. .1 Top one (1) foot of fill may contain well dispersed stones up to one (1) inch in size. .2 Fill below one (1) foot may contain rocks up to three inches in size but rocks sha~l be separated by approved fill material and totally compacted to m~tch existing soil conditions or 'as otherwise noted on Drawings. 02210 SITE GRADING 5 2.5 OFF-SITE BORROW MATERIAL: ..... 2.5.1 Provide approved borrow materials from approved source if satisfactory on-site fill materials are not available in sufficient quantities. PART 5 EXECUTION ._ 5.1 STRIPPING TOPSOIL: 5.1.1 Areas to be stripped shall first be scraped clean of ali brush~ weeds~ grass~ roots and other material that will interfere with lawn '- maintenance as specified in SECTION 02100. 5.1.2 Remove topsoil to full depth of organic matter from the areas within three (5) feet outside of foundation wails of buildings and from other areas on construction. .1F'ile topsoil in designated or approved locations where it will not interfere with building or utility operations. .2 Topsoil shall be reasonably free from subsoil, debris, and stones larger than 1-inch in diameter. 5.2 SITE GRADING: 5.2.1 Grades: Cut or fill~ compact fills, and rough grade the entire prodect area to subgrades as follows: .1 Surfaced areas: grade to the underside of the respective surfacing or base coarse as fixed by the grades therefor. _ .2 Lawns and planting areas: grade to within four (4) inches of finished grades. .5 Grade beneath structures: .1 Beneath suspended floors: grade to elevations indicated on drawings. .2 Beneath concrete slabs: grade to the underside of porous fill. 02210 SITE GRADING 4 - 5.2.2 Fills: Where fill is required to raise the existing grade to the new subgrade indicated, such fill shall be as specified in PART 2 of this Section; placed and compacted as follows: .1 Remove all debris subdect to termite attack, rot or corrosion, -- and all other deleterious materials from areas to be filled. .2 Prior to placing, scarify ground to depth of 6 inches, and the moisture content of loosened material shall be such that it will readily bond with the first layer of fill material. .5 Deposit fill in 8 inch lifts under surfaced areas and 12 inch -- lifts under lawn and planting areas. · ~.) .... ~.~ structure excavating & __ 4 Compact fill per requirements of backfilling. .5 Compaction shall be obtained by the use of sheepsfoot rollers, rubber-tired rollers, or other approved equipment capable of - obtaining the required density· In the event the fill material is too wet or too dry for adequate compaction, the Contractor shall add moisture or dry the material as required to the extent necessary to obtain the required density. 5.2.5 Rough Grading: Rough grading of all areas within the pro.~ect, including excavated and filled sections and adjacent transition areas shall be reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. The degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable from either blade-grader or scraper operations, except as otherwise specified. .1 Finished subgrade surface generally shall not be more than 0.1 feet above or below the established subgrade. .2 Ditches, swales and glitters shall be finished to drain readily. .5 Provide roundings at top and bottom of banks and other breaks in grade. .4 Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, the subgrade shall be evenly sloped to provide drainage away from building wall in all directions at a grade not less than 1/4 inch per foot. 5.2.4 Topsoil: Spread topsoil one inch deep, ten feet wide, around building perimeter, minimum. 02210 SITE GRADING 5 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 5.5.1 Clean up ail trash and debris from the project site caused by .... the Work of this Section including excess excavated materials not required or approved for fill. 5.5.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site - at approved location. 02220 STRUCTURE EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING I PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not ali inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1~ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Excavate as required for construction of each structure. .5 Dispose of surplus excavated materials not required or approved for fill or backfill. .4 Keep excavations free of water. .5 Shoring, bracing, piling, planking and cribbing as required and removal of same. .6 Select fill under concrete slabs on grade. .7 Not used. - .8 Backfill around building wails. .9 Protection of the work of other trades. .10 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1.5 PROTECTION: Protect workmen and streets, buildings, utilities, etc., that are to remain adjacent to and on project site. 1.5.1 Provide shoring, bracing, piling, planking and cribbing as required to prevent caving or erosion of sides of excavations. Remove, in a manner to prevent caving, as excavations are backfilled. 1.5.2 Provide for surface drainage and keep excavations free of water during construction period by approved means, regardless of the nature, cause or source of the water. 1.4 SAMPLES: Submit samples of proposed fill materials to Owner for approval prior to use of the material. 1.5 LAYOUT: Layout of all Work must be approved by Owner before commencement of Work included in this Section of the Specifications. 02220 STRUCTURE EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 2 -- 1.6 BENCH MARKS: Maintain bench marks, monuments and other reference points; if disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed. 1.7 UTILITIES: Observe all rules and regulations governing the respective utilities in executing Work included in this Section of the - Specifications. 1.7.1 Protect active utilities on the project as specified; remove or .. relocate only when required by the Contract Documents. 1.7.~ Report inactive or abandoned utilities encountered in excavating and grading operations to the Owner; remove, plug or cap as directed by '' the Owner. 1.8 CERTIFICATES: Submit to Owner, ten (10) days prior to placement of ~ill, certified copies of test performed by Testing Lab-indicating compliance of materials with specifications and drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL SAND: Clean, free-draining, granular material with maximum Plasticity Index of 10; no more than 10% passing ~200 sieve. 2.2 GRAVEL OR CRUSHED STONE: Clean; uniformly graded from 1/2 inch to I 1/2 inch. 2.5 SELECT FILL: Liquid limit of 40 or less with a F'lasticity Index of 4 to 15. 2.4 OFF-SITE BORROW: 2.4.1 Provide approved borrow materials from approved source if ..... satisfactory on-site fill materials are not available in sufficient quantities. PART 5 EXECUTION - 5.1 EXCAVATION FOR BUILDING STRUCTURES: 5.1.1 Explosives ~ill not be permitted except ~ith written authori- zation by the Owner. 5.1.2 Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated. Allow addi- tional space as required for construction operations and inspecting foundations. 5.1.5 Footing Trenches, where soil conditions will permit, may be excavated to the exact dimensions of the concrete, and side forms omitted. ' · 5.1.4 Do not excavate to ~inal grades until j~st before concrete is to be ~laced; obtain approval of excavati'ons before placing concrete and protect bottoms o~ excavations until concrete is place~. 02220 STRUCTURE EXCAMATING AND BACKFILLING 5.1.5 Do not excavate to the ~uli depth indicated i~ ~reezing temperatures are expected and the ~ootings or slabs cannot be placed immediatel~ a~ter the excavation has been completed and approved. 5.1.6 Slabs and ~ootings will not be placed on ~rozen earth or on previously ~rozen earth that has been thawed~ there~ore~ remove ~rozen or thawed material and proceed as specified ~or excess cuts under ~ootings and/or slabs. 5.2 FILLING AND BACKFILLING: 5.2.1 Fill excess cuts under ~ootings with concrete same as specified ~or the ~ooting~ and ~ill any excess cut under slabs with gravel~ crushed rock or ~ill sand as specified. 5.2.2 The type and quality o~ other ~ill materials and methods o~ compaction shall be approved by the Owner. 5.2.5 Do not back~ill excavations until the ~ollowing work has been completed: .1 Underground construction shall be inspected and approved including ~orm removal~ waterproo~ing~ subdrainage systems~ etc. .2 Underground utilities shall be tested and approved. .5 Excavations shall be cleaned o~ trash and debris and all other materials not approved as ~ill material. 5.2.4. Place and compact back~ill so as to avoid damage to the walls and to waterproofing and other Work in place. .1 Scarify exposed surfaces o~ existing sub-grade and water as required.~ recompact to ~5% std. proctor density at a moisture content between optimum and 5% above optimum. Select ~ill shall then be placed in 6 to 8 inch li~ts at moisture contents ranging ~orm -2% to +5% o~ optimum value and each li~t compacted to between ~5% & ~8% o~ the maximum dry density as obtained in the std. proctor compaction test. .2 Lime Stabilize per structural drawings. .5 Do not use heavy equipment ~or spreading and compacting back, ill near new underground construction~ use approved power driven hand tampers. 5.5 TESTING 5.3.1 In place o~ ~ield density tests will be conducted according to the standards o~ Section 01400. 02220 STRUCTURE EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 4 -- 5.4 CLEAN UP 5.4.1 Clean up all trash and debris from the prqject site caused by the Work of this Section including excess excavated materials not required or approved for fill. 5.4.2 Dispose of such materials outside the imits of the project site at approved locations. -- 02230 DRILLED PIERS 1 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section while not ali inclusive bltt listed as a guide~ is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDTITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1~ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish labor~ materials and related items to complete the Drilled Pier Work indicated on Drawings and as specified herein including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Drilled pier holes. .2 Case pier holes where required. .5 Keep pier holes free of water; pump water when required. .4 Place reinforcing steel; place concrete. .5 Clean-up. -- 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specified elsewhere, WHEN REQUIRED. .1 Concrete Reinforcement: Section 05200. .2 Heavyweight Aggregate Structural Concrete: Section 05510. 1.5 INSPECTION: .._ 1.5.1 Every drilled hole shall be thoroughly inspected by the Owner, or his authorized representative~ before the steel reinforcing cage and concrete is placed. Excessive water, where encountered, shall be pumped out until concreting. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Reinforcing Steel shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 05200. 2.1.2 Concrete shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 05510. 2.1.5 Steel Casings shall be in accordance with requirements; as ap-proved by the Owner. '. 02250 DRILLED PIERS 2 -- Part~ o (Continued) 2.2 PROPORTIONS, MIXING, AND PLACING: ~.° ~.° 1 Proportions,. mixing and placing shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 05510. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 DRILLING: 5.1.1 Drill piers in true alignment at locations and spacings as shown on the Drawings. Maximum lateral variation shall not exceed one and one-half (1 1/2) inches. Should greater variation occur, the Contractor shall notify the Owner for corrective measures. 5.1.2 Drill piers plumb. Maximum deviation shall be 1/8 inch per foot of length, from the vertical. 5.1.5 Drill piers to elevations indicated on Drawings; as directed by Owner. 5.1.4 If free ground water is encountered, temporary steel casings will be required during the installation of the foundation shafts. 5.1.5 After shafts are drilled, and temporary steel casings seated at the proper penetrations, where required, the holes shall be cleaned of loose dirt, mud, rock and water. Particlular emphasis must be placed on securing a dry shaft excavation. 5.2 CQNCRETING: 5.2.1 Provide and install reinforcing steel as scheduled and required by the Drawings. The provisions of Section 05510 apply to all materials and placement required hereunder. 5.2.2 Provide and install concrete to fill holes drilled, as scheduled and required by the Drawings. The provisions of Section 05510 apply to all materials and placement hereunder. 5.2.5 Place concrete within the shaft execavation as soon as practical after drilling, seating and cleaning out has been completed. In no case shall lapse excedd four (4) hours before placement of the concrete. 5.2.4 A TREMIE will be required when pier depth is greater than 10 feet and when minor seepage is present. 3.2.5 During the removal of the temporary steel shaft from the hole during the concrete operation, exercise extreme care in its removal in order to insure that the head of pl. astic concrete is, at all times, greater than th~ head of surrounding ground water, and that no rotation of the casing be permitted during the withdrawal. -~' 02250 x" DRILLED PIERS Part 3 (Continued) 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 3.3.1' Clean up all trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premised, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 3.3.2 Dispose of such materials outtside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 02614 CONCRETE PAVINGs' CURBS & WALKS 1 PART 1 GENERAL .... ~ 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included 'in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GERERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Layout all paving slabs, curbs and walks; confirm lines and grades to insure proper drainage. .5 Check and certify acceptability of subgrade for paved areas. .4 Form, place, finish and cure concrete complete as indicated on Drawings including that indicated on public property. .5 Layout all curbs and gutters conforming to lines and grades as shown in the Drawings to assure proper drainage. .6 Radii at corners are to meet City Public Works Department minimum standards and/or those illustrated by the Drawings. .7 Protection of the Work of other trades. .8 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: 1.5.1 Comply with requirements of local codes and ordinances where applicable to on site Work except where provisions in the Contract Documents are more restrictive, in which case, the provisions in the Contract Documents will prevail. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Certify to Owner and Architect, in writing, the acceptability of the subgrade for paving Work required .herein. 1.4.2 Material certificates and samples as required in referenced Specification Sections for Work included in this Section. 02614 CONCRETE PAVING~ CURBS & WALKS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Granular fill or cushions: As specified for concrete slabs on grade, Section 03510. ~.° 1.~° Forms: Refer to Section 05100,. and to conform to profile as shown on drawings. 2.1.5 Concrete Reinforcement: Refer to Section 05200. 2.1.4 Concrete materials including admixtures~ curing compounds, expansion joints, etc.: Refer to Section 05510. 2.2 PROPORTIONS, MIXING AND TESTING: 2.2.1 Strength: Walks: 2500 psi in 28 days. paving: 5000 psi in 28 days. 2.2.2 Concrete materials, design and control shall comply with applicable requirements of Section covering Work. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 PREPARATION: 5.1.1 The subgrade compaction and grading shall be performed under provisions included in Section ~o~r~ but before commencement of the - paving Work, the Subcontractor for Work included in this Section shall examine the previously prepared subgrade, and test to ascertain solidarity, and when assured that the subgrade is properly graded and in satisfactory condition to receive and support the concrete included herein, certify to the Owner and Architect, in writing, that the subgrade is satisfactory for his Work. 5.1.2 Certification of the subgrade shall constitute full acceptance of the subgrade and the Subcontractor for the work included in this Section shall be solely and fully responsible for the final grades, condition, and appearance of the Work included in this Section of the Specifications. 5.2 INSTALLATION: 5.2.1 Layout, sizes and shapes, reinforcement, finishes, grades, etc. shall be indicated on the Drawings, and as approved by the Owner. ~.2.2 Paving curbs & walks shall be evenly graded to drain and standing water shall constitute cause for rejection. 02614 CONCRETE 5.2.5 Granular fill or cushions, mixing, transportin~-testing, placing, finishing and curing shall be in accordance with provisions for related work in Section 05510. 3.2.4 Formwork shall be in accordance with provisions for related Work in Section 03100. 3.2.5 Concrete reinforcement shall be in accordance with provisions for related Work in Section 03200. 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 5.5.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 3.3.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 02721 PRE-CAST CURBS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Fabricate and install pre-cast concrete curbs complete, including anchors as required. .5 Protection of the Work of other trades. .4 Clean-up. -- 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS & FABRICATIONS: 2.1.1 Concrete curbs: & feet long x 6 inches high x 8 inches wide, 5000 P.S.I. concrete with two - No. 5 bars. 2.1.~° Anchors: .1 Asphalt: cast two galvanized pipe sleeves integrally with curbs. .2 Concrete: cast two #5 bars~ 8" long~ in each curb. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1INSTALLATION: 5.1.1 Locate curbs as shown on drawings. 5.1.2 Anchorage: · -- .1 Asphalt: Drive two #5 bars~ 8" long, through sleeves into pavement. Seal bars at pavement penetration to prevent water damage to pavement. .2 Concrete: Drill two holes in paving to receive curb bars. 02721 PRE-CAST CURBS 2 -- Part 3 (Continued) 3.2 CLEAN-UP: 3.2.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, --' keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 5.2.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved l~cations. * * * DIVISION 3 CONCRETE (}310© CONCRETE FORMWORK 032~'~0 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03310 HEAVYWEIGHT AGGREGATE, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE '- 03358 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not ail inclusive butt listed as a guides is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION ir GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish materials for, construct, complete and remove form work for all cast-in-place concrete for the entire prodect including sealers, fillers, ties, braces, hardware, and all other related items necessary for a completed job. .5 Protection of the Work of other trades. .4 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 REGULATORY AGENCIES: 1.5.1 Commercial Standards of U.S. Department of Commerce. 1.5.2 American Concrete Institute 1.5.5 Western Wood Products Association. 1.5.4 Local codes and ordinances. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Forms: lumber, plywood, metal, fiberglass, or other to produce required shapes and finishes. .1 Lumber: Yellow Pine equal to WWPA No. 2 common. .2 Plywood: Minimum 5/8" thick in compliance with Commercial Standard CS-45, exterior grade. .5 Plyform: Minimum 5/8" thick in compliance with Commercial Standard DFP-A Class 2, exterior grade, PS-166000. .4 Fiberglass: FRP (Fiberglass Reinforce Plastic) as required. 0~100 CONCRETE FORMWORK ~.~ 1.-? Form ties: Bolts,. rods,, or patented devices having a minimum tensile strength of4,~ 000 pounds when fully assembled. Ties shall be adjustable in length and free of lugs, cones and washers, or other features which would leave a hole or depression larger than 7/8" in diameter back of the exposed surface of the concrete surface. After form removal, there shall be no metal within 1 inch of finished concrete. 2.2 DESIGN AND FABRICATION: 2.2.1 Design and engineering of the form work, as well as it's construction, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. ~.~ 2.2 Design and construct formwork for the loads and lateral pressures outlined in Part ~, Section 102, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork" (ACI ~47). ~.~ ~.° 3 Form accessories partially or wholly embedded in the concrete, such as ties, and hangers, shall be a commercially manufactured type. '-' Wire is not acceptable. PART ~ o EXECUTION 5.1 FORM CONSTRUCTION AND PREPARATION: 5.1.1 Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout or ~' cement paste. Board forms having joints opened by shrinkage of the wood shall be swelled until closed by wetting before concrete is placed. 5.1.2 Form joints on surfaces which are to have an exposed aggregate finish shall be sealed with a special pressure-sensitive tape made for that specific purpose. 3.1.~ Plywood and other form surfaces not subject to shrinkage shall be sealed against absorbtion of moisture from the concrete by either a field applied commercial sealer, or a factory applied nonabsorptive liner. Do not use form oil on architectural concrete. 3.1.4 When forms are coated to prevent bond with concrete, it shall be done ~Eior to placing reinforcing steel. Excess material shall not be allowed to stand in puddles in forms nor allowed to come in contact with concrete against which fresh concrete will be placed. 3.1.5 Where as-cast finishes are required, materials which will impart a stain to the concrete shall not be applied to the form surfaces. Where the finished surface is required to be painted, the material applied to form surfaces shall be compatible with the type of paint to be used. ~.2 FORM REMOVAL: 3.2.1 ~emove forms in accordance wi.th the ACI Building Code Require- ments for Reinforced Concrete No. 318, Chapter 5, without damage to -- concrete and in a manner to insure complete safety of the structure. 05100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 5 5.5 CLEAN UP 5.5.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks~ and adjacent property clean and neat at ali times. 3.3.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 05200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install concrete reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete and reinforced masonry indicated on the Drawings including related accessories required for a complete instal- lation. .5 Protection of the Work of other trades. .4 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: " 1.5.1 Detail concrete reinforcement, not otherwise indicated, in accordance with "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (ACI 518) and "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" (ACI 515) all by the American Concrete Institute. 1.3.2 Deformation of reinforcement in accordance with definitions in Section 301 of the American Concrete Instituters "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (ACI 318) 1.5.5 Comply with referenced portions of the latest edition of Concrete Reinforcing Steel Instituters "Manual of Standard Practice" 1.5.4 Comply with referenced ASTM STANDARDS published by the American Society for Testing and Materials. 1.5.5 Comply with requirements of applicable codes and ordinances. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Before commencing any concrete work, the contractor shall submit Shop and Installation Drawings detailing all metal reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete. No material shall be fabricated for which Shop Drawings have not been reviewed, which .For reinforcing shall cover general location, spacing and details of design. 05200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 2 --- PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: .1.1 Bars: Domestic~ ASTM A615 Grade 60 for #4 rebars or greater. 2.1.2 Bars: Domestic~ ASTM A~15 Grade 40 for #5 rebars. 2.1.5 Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185. 2.1.4 Accessories: As required by CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice", latest edition. 2.2 FABRICATION: 2.2.1 Fabricate reinforcement in accordance with "Code of Standard Practice for Fabrication of Reinforcing Materials and Service" from CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" except where indicated otherwise in compliance with applicable codes and/or ordinances. 5.1.2 Where the concrete surface will be exposed to the weather in the finished structure or where rust would impair finishes, the portion of accessories in contact with the framework shall be galvanized or made of plastic. 5.2 CLEAN-UP: 5.2.1 Clean tip trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets sidewalks and addacent property clean and neat at ali times. 5.2.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the prodect site at approved location. 05510 HEAVYWEIGHT AGGREGATE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE I PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide~ is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and.related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish materialss place finishs and cure cast-in-place heavyweight aggregate structural concrete complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified hereins including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Concrete fills for masonry Works when required. .2 Concrete for foundations. .5 Concrete fills for steel pan stairs. .4 Protection of Work of other trades. .5 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: 1.5.1 Cold Weather Concreting: In accordance with "Recommended Prac- tice for Winter Concreting" (ACI 605), American Concrete Institute. 1.5.5 Concrete Designs: Prepared by Testing Lab 1.5.4 Tests: in accordance with related and referenced Standards by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1.5.5 Materials, Mixing~ Placing~ Finishings and Curing: in accordance with related portions of "Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures" by the Portland Cement Association and as specified herein. 1.5.6 Comply with related requirements of applicable codes and ordinances. 1.5.7 Included in this Specification by reference is the Report of the American Concrete Institute Committee SOls titled "Suggestion Specifi- cations for Structural Concrete for Buil. dingss" (called herein ACI 501). 03510 HEAVYWEIGHT AGGREGATE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Submit mix designs for each type of concrete required to Owner for approval. Include test reports for confirmation when required by Owner before commencement of concrete work. 1.4.2 Submit reports of tests specified herein to Owner for information and/or approval. 1.4.5 Submit required product data and samples on proposed materials such as admixtures and curing compounds to Owner for approval in accordance with provisions for submittals included in Section 01020~ SPECIAL CONDITIONS. 1.5 TESTS: 1.5.1 Contractor shall cooperate in every way with the independent testing laboratory employed by the Owner, to make tests per Section 014 0 0. .1 Should average strength of any one test group of cylinders fall below strength specified, the Owner may request that any or all of the following corrective measures be performed at the Contractor's expense. .1 Require changes in concrete mix .2 Require core texting as per ASTM C-42 .5 Require load texts to be performed on portion or portions of structure where test cylinders indicate improper strength. Test loading shall comform to requirements of Section 202 of ACI Building Code Requirements. .4 Removal and replacement of all substandard concrete. Testing--' for frozen concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1.1 Portland Cement: .1 ASTM C-150, Type 1. 2.1.2 Admixture .1 As requested by Contractor for conditions encountered; i.e. -- accelerators, retarders, etc. only with prior approval of owners representative. .2 Admixtures which would preclude bonding of terrazzo may not be used. .3 Air entraining agent will be required in all grade beams, slabs, paving, and walks. 05510 HEAVYWEIGHT AGGREGATE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5 2.1.5 Accessories Water stop - SONNEBORN - CONNTECH, 6" vinyl, continuous, at locations shown on drawings. 2.1.4 Aggregates - ASTM C-55 - Grading for aggregate shall be within the following by weight. Size numbers 467 and 57. 2.1.5 Water - City tap water. 2.1.6 Vapor Barrier - .006 inch (6 mil) natural polyethylene film. 2.2 QUALITY OF CONCRETE: 2.2.1 All concrete shall be ultimate stress type. 2.2.2 The mix design will be prepared by the testing lab, paid for by the contractor, and submitted for review by the architect. 2.2.5 CONCRETE: 5000 psi at 28 days. Aggregate size shall be 1-1/2" ma>: for piers and 5/4" max for grade beams and slabs. Sand fines and stone aggregate. Five sacks of cement per cubic yard. Slump shall be no more than 6". ; One sack of Cement shall be considered as weighing 94 lbs,. Seven day strength shall test out at 80% of design strength in order to proceed with the work. 2.2.4 Maximum water to cemtent ratio shall be 6-1/2 gallons per sack for non-air-entrained concrete and 5-1/4 gallons for air-entrained concrete. (Surface water in aggragates must be included.) 2.2.5 Proportions and Consistency; The methods of measuring concrete materials shall be such that the proportions can be accurately controlled and easily checked at any time during the Work. Measurement of materials for ready-mixed concrete shall conform to Tentative Specificaions for Ready-Mixed Concrete(ASTM C-94). 2.2.6 Admixtures shall not be a substitute for cement. 2.5 MIXING: 2.5.1 Mix concrete until there is a uniform distribution of materials. Mi>: at least two minutes after all materials are in the mixer. Discharge concrete completqly before mixer is recharged., 2.5.2 Speed of rotation and load capacity of d.rum shall be in strict accordance with maunfacturer's recommendations. 03310 HEAVYWEIGHT AGOREOATE STRUCTURAL CONCRET~ 4 - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION: 5.1.1 Prior to mixing and placing concrete, clean ali mixing and transportation equipment, remove debris within forms, and wet forms thoroughly. 3.1.~° Remove ice or other coatings from reinforcement that might hinder good bond, remove water from place of deposit, and check __ reinforcement. 3.2 PLACIN8 CONCRETE: 5.2.1 Use method which will prevent the separation or loss of the material. 5.2.2. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. 5.2.5 Minimum height of free fall of concrete shall be 10 ft. Tremie shall be used to control this height. 3.2.4 Retempering is prohibited. ._ 5.2.5 When concreting is once started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation, until placing of panel and section is completed. 3.°~.6 Take ample precaution to prevent honeycombing. Use mechanical vibrator sparingly and do not flow concrete by mechanical vibrator. 5.2.7 Keep reinforcement in place while concreting. 3.2.8 Concrete shall be well puddled around floor drains, plumbing .... risers, sleeves and inserts. 5.2.9 Where ail piping, ductwork, and conduit, etc., penetrates slabs and grade beams, all void areas around them are to be packed tight - with non-combustible insulation to form a sound barrier around openings. On masonry walls, sea~ openings with grout. 5.2.10 Take care not to penetrate slab membrane waterproofing. If penetrated, reseal prior to placing concrete. 5.2.11 Anchor bolts for structural steel, mechanical equipment and all other miscellaneous items as shown on Drawings or as specified to be embedded in concrete will be furnished ~ others and set ~ this Contractor 05510 HEAVYWEIGHT AGGREGATE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5 5.5 FINISHES: 5.5.1 General: .1 Finish edges of ail concrete slabs with edging tool to 1/8". radius· .2 Surfaces to receive resilient flooring shall be protected from damage and kept clean until surfaces are accepted by the resilient floor applicator for installation of resilient floor. .5 Tolerances: Ail floor finishes unless noted otherwise· .1 Level to within 1/4" in 10 feet, no more than 1/16" per foot. -- 5.5.2 Interior concrete surfaces which are to be sight exposed or which are to receive resilient floor covering· Provide smooth properly graded and leveled, hard steel troweled finish. .'~-.~.1 Interior concrete subfloor at terrazzo to have a finely textured surface. · 5.5.5 Interior and exterior sight exposed surfaces: Immediately after forms are removed, grout pits and recesses and rub with carborundum stone to a smooth finish free from marks and honeycombs. 5.5.4 Exterior Slabs: · I Provide trowel and medium broom finish. .2 Broom after concrete is hard enouth to retain scoring using a stiff fiber or wire broom. .3 Broom perpendicular to direction of traffic. .4 All exterior concrete steps shall be sloped down 1/8". 5.5.5 Curing: Maintain concrete in a moist condition for at least 5 days after placement. · 1 Approved Methods: · I Ponding. .2 As approved by Owner. NOTE: Curing compounds are NOT to be used in areas to receive Terrazzo· 05510 HEAVYWEIGHT AGGREGATE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 6 - 5.4 CLEAN-UP: _. 5.4.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section~ keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 5.4.2 Dispose of such materials ootside the limits of the project site at approved locations 05559 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section~ while not ail inclusive but listed as a guide~ is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1~ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and apply concrete floor sealer to concrete floor surfaces noted as exposed concrete on Drawings. .5 Protection of the Work of other trades. .4 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specified elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. .1 Heavyweight Aggragate~ Structural Concrete: Section 05510. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Sealer: Acrylic based sealer as follows: .1 DRESS AND SEAL as manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals~ Inc.~ Omaha~ Nebraska. .2 ACRI-SEAL "S" as manufactured by Tack Brothers Division~ Carboline Company, St. Louis, Missouri. .5 THOROGLAZE "H" as manufactured by Standard Drywall Products~ inc.~ Miami,. Florida. 2.1.2 Acrylic based sealers shall comply with applicable requirements of the following standards published by American Society for Testing and Materials. .1 ASTM: C50~ (Clear) .2 ASTM C156 .5 ASTM C148 2.2 PROPORTIONS AND MIXING: 2.2.1 As packaged~ (u~diluted). 05559 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER 2 " PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 APPLICATION: 5.1.1 Two (2) applications in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .1 First application: apply as curing compound immediately after troweling operation is completed. .2 Second application: after other trades complete their Work, clean floor and apply finish coat. 5.1.2 Protect finish coat until final, inspection acceptance by the - Owner. 5.2 CLEAN-UP: 5.2.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the work of this Section~ keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 5.2.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04100 MORTAR 04201 BRICK VENEER 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04100 MORTAR 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT' and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Provide mortar as required for masonry Work included in the project as specified herein including but not limited to the following: .1 Mixing and quality control. .2 Distribution of mortar and stocking of mortar boards at the proper time and at each place requiring masonry Work as indi- cated on the Drawings and am required by related Work. .5 Protection of the Work of other trades. .4 Clean-up. 1.2RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5HANDLING AND STORAGE: 1.5.1 Handle and store mortar materials in an approved manner that will protect them from contact with the soil and from exposure to the elements. 1 ~ ~ Deliver packaged materials and store in original containers clearly marked as to type and use. Damaged materials will be rejected. 1.4 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS: 1.4.1 When cold weather operations are authorized and temperatures fall below 40 degrees f., heat sand or mixing water to minimum of 70 degrees f. and maximum of 160 degrees f. 1.5 TESTING: NOT APPLICABLE 1.6 CERTIFICATES: NOT APPLICABLE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Cement: ASTM: C150, Type 1 or Type 111. 2.1.2 Hydrated Lime: A~TM: C207, Type S. 2.1.5 Sand: ASTM: C144. 04100 MORTAR 2 2. 1.4 Additives: . I Col ors: None .-.' Plasticizer: Not allowed. 2. 1.5 Water: Clean., fresh, potable water. 2.2 STRENGTH: ° I Mortar for all masonry work, unless noted otherwise~ shall conform to ASTM: C270., Type "S"., Portland cement lime mortar· 1800 P.S.I. __ 2.2.2 Masonry Cement: Not allowed. 2.2.3 Grout for reinforced masonry including pilaster, beams or '- lintels shall be 3000 P.S.I. concrete per provisions included in Section 05310. .5 MIX DESIGNS: 2.5.1 Mix designs in accordance with provision established in Part of this Section and as specified herein. °~.?-.~ 2 Not Used. 2.5..5 Lime putty shall be made from hydrated lime prepared by mixin.q dry hydrated lime with water to form a stiff plastic putty. When putty must be stored for more than 24 hours before use in mortar mixing, ._. protect it from exposure to sun to prevent excessive evaporation. · 4 PROPORTIONS: 2.4.1 Mi>,' mortar in with as much water as may be necessary to produce the work'ability desired regardless of initial flow. No change in the proportions shall be made nor shall materials with different physical or chemical characteristics be utilized in mortar used in the Work- unless the masonry Subcontractor furnishes additional evidence that such mortar meets the requirements of the property specifications specified herein and the substitution is approved by the Owner. -"- 2.4.2 Exceptions: Mortar for masonry walls below grade shall be mixed by volume as follows: .-- · 1 Two (2) parts Portland cement. · 2 One (1) part lime putty. .5 Si:-.' (6) parts sand. .4 Waterproofing and mixture as directed· 04100 MORTAR 2.4.3 Add approved color as recommended by the manufacturer; to match approved sample panel when color is required. 2.4.4 Parging exterior walls: SONNEBORN HYDROCIDE 700B PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 MIXING: 5.1.1 Proportion mortar ingredients by methods that wiii insure accurate measure. Mix mortar in a power-driven drum-type batch mixer as ~ollows: .1 First, add approximately 3/4 of the required water, 1/2 the sand, and all the cement, mix and add remainder of the sand. Mix briefly, then add remainder of water in small quantities until the workability of the batch is satisfactory to the masons. .2 After ail materials have added, mix for a minimum of 5 to 5 minutes. Completely empty drum before recharging for next batch. 5.2 HANDLING AND DISTRIBUTION: 3.2.1 Provide fresh weii mixed mortar for masons at place or places designated by the masons as required by their Work. .1 Mortar shall be maintained on an approved, clean mortar board. .2 Mortar that has stiffened because of chemical reaction due to hydration shall not be used. Board life, 2 1/2 hours max. .5 Mortars that have stiffened because of evaporation of moisture from the mortar, shall be retempered by adding water as frequently as needed to restore the specified consistency. 5.2.2 Remove mortar from boards and clean boards regularly to prevent contamination of fresh mortar by mortar that has set or that has been allowed to take a partial set. 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 5.5.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent protperty clean and neat at all times. 5.3.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 0420i BRICK VENEER 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not ail inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Fabricate and install materials required to perform brick veneer Work complete including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Face brickwork (except mortar provided in Section 04100). .2 Scaffolding. .5 Anchors and ties. .4 F'remolded joint fillers in conjunction with brick veneer Work. .5 Build into brick veneer Work door and window frames, flashing, anchors, etc.~ furnished by other trades; as required to complete the Work. .6 Samples. .7 Protection of the Work of other trades. .8Cleaning and pointing. Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK 1.2.1 Related work specified elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. 1.~ SAMPLE PANEL: 1.5.1 After face brick is selected by the Owner, build one sample masonry panel on the project site where directed by the Owner for each type of face brick required. .1 Panel size shall be 6~-0'' long x 4'-0" high x two wythe thick. .2 Panel shall show full color range, texture, bond and detailing including method and quality o~ mortar jpints. .3 Clean masoncy p'anel as specified for brick veneer Work. 04201 BRICK VENEER 2 - 1.5.1 (Continued) .4 Protect masonry panel during construction period. Approved panel shall serve as standard for brick veneer Work on entire project. - 1.5.2 Do not commence brick veneer Work until Owner approves a sample for materials and workmanship and panel has been allowed to cure out to its final appearance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 FACE BRICK: · I TYPE ONE: Field Brick: OEP Brandywine by Acme Brick .2 TYPE TWO: Detail Brick: DTP Blend 150 by Acme Brick .5 Equal brick may be used, providing that such brick are approved prior to bidding. .4 Brick shall be delivered F.O.B. job site and placed on wood pallets provided by the Subcontractor for Work included in this Section. 2.1.2 ANCHORS AND TIES: .1 Corrugated or crimped metal ties: Not less than 7/8 inches wide and of sheet steel not lighter than 22 gage thickness. .2 Dovetail type anchors for use with embedded slots or inserts in concrete members: Flat sheet steel not lighter than 16 gage thickness by one inch wide· 2.1·5 MORTAR: Refer to Section 04100. 2·1.4 CLEANING SOLUTIONS: National Chemsearch "Deox", Berman Chemical Company "Safe-T-Klenz", DuPont Sulfanic Cleaner or other approved chemical comparable with face brick selected by Owner. 2.2 SCAFFOLDING: 2.2.1 Provide scaffolding necessary for masonry and make some available to other trades required to execute Work in conjunction with masonry. Scaffolding shall conform to the requirements of all governing ordinances and regulations· 04201 BRICK VENEER 5 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 LAYING BRICK: 5.1.1 GENERAL: .1 Masonry shail not be laid when the temperature of outside air is below 40 degrees F. .2 Not Used. .5 Masonry Work shall be laid true to dimensions and to lines, shall be plumb, level, in correct bond, and properly anchored. .4 Joints shall be level, of uniform width, and shall not exceed the size specified herein. .5 Vertical hoints on exposed faces shall be spaced to line up plumb and true and joints shall be as uniform as the type of material will allow. .6 Cut masonry units with a motor-driven masonry saw. Cuts shall be made completely throuth units rather than to score and break. .7 Construct all necessary openings and chases for pipes, wiring cabinets, etc. 5.1.2 LAYING BRICK: .1 Laying brick in a one/half running bond unless indicated otherwise. .2 Lay each brick in a full flat bed of mortar with all joints completely filled. Do not furrow mortar bed with point of trowel. Shove brick into place with full head joints. .3 Do not furrow mortar bed with point of trowel. .4 Anchor brick to concrete members with dove-tail type anchors. .5 Anchor brick to back-up with horizontal masonry wall rein- forcement in bed joints spaces at 16 inches on center vertically. .6 Anchor brick to framing with corrugated metal ties. Space anchors at 16 inches o.c. vertically and at 24 inches o.c. horizontally. .7 Form weepholes at 32 inches o.c. in head joints of f. ace brick in the first course over grade beams, shelf angles and lintels. 04201 BRICK VENEER 4 3.1.2 (Continued) .8 Keep brick clean as Work progresses and protect the Work below from mortar droppings. 5.1.5 MORTAR JOINTS: .1 Exposed mortar head and bed joints shall not be less than 1/4" or more than 1/2" wide. .2 When the joints in the masonry work have become thumb print hard, all exposed joints shall be tooled concave with a round jointing tool. Jointing tools shall be of sufficient length to eliminate wavy lines in the horizontal ]oints. .5 Joints which are burned or discolored as a result of tooling will not be acceptable. 5.1.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING: .1 Cutting and patching of masonry required to accomodate the Work of other trades shall be performed by masonry mechanics. .2 Where possible, full units of proper size shall be used in lieu of cut units. 5.1.5 INSERTS: .1 Build-in inserts for Work of other trades as required. .2 Where weight of item to be attached to wall is heavy, cells shall be filled with grout to produce a wall sufficiently rigid to support the attached item. 5.1.6 CONTROL JOINTS: .1 Control joints shall be continuous vertically from top to bottom of masonry. .2 Joints shall be completely separated with premolded filler and filled with sealant to match adjacent wall surface, interior and exterior. .5 Vertical control joints not to exceed 55 feet on center. Joints to be located at points of natural weakness in masonry, unless shown otherwise. 5.2 CEMENT WASHES: Construct cement.washes composed of one part Portland Cement to three parts screened sand. After mortar sets, trowel ~o a hard smooth finish, free from defects. 04201 BRICK VENEER 5 5.5 PROTECTION OF OTHER MATERIALS: Take proper precautions to protect ail surfaces over which or against which masonry Work occurs. The repair or replacement of any damaged surfaces caused by the delivery and installation of Work included in this Section shall be paid for by the masonry Subcontractor. 5.4 POINTING AND CLEANING: 5.4.1 Before completion of the Work, all defects in joints of exposed masonry surfaces shall be raked out as necessary, filled with mortar, and retooled. 5.4.2 After mortar has set and hardened, all exposed face brick masonry surfaces shall be wetted and then .cleaned with a solution of water and soap detergent applied with stiff-fiber brushes, followed immediately by thoroughly rinsing with clean water. 5.4.5 Surfaces still showing stain or discoloration other than green efflorescence shall be cleaned with an approved cleaning solution specified in Part 2; in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Acid shall not be used without written authorization by the Owner. 5.4.4 Green Efflorescence shall be removed in accordance with the brick manufacturer's recommendation. 5.4.5 Ail masonry surfaces shall be left clean, free of mortar daubs, dirt, stain, and discoloration, including scum from cleaning operations, and with tight mortar joints throughout. 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 5.5.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 5.5.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install materials required to perform concrete masonry unit Work complete including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Lightweight concrete masonry unit Work for back-up of exterior walls, furrings, partitions, lintels,bond beams, etc. including glazed units where indicated on the Drawings. .2 Horizontal masonry wall reinforcement in exterior walls, masonry partitions, masonry furrings, and elsewhere where re- quired and/or as indicated on the Drawings. .5 Scaffolding. .4 Anchors and ties for concrete masonry unit Work. .5 Premolded joint fillers in conjunction with Masonry Work. .6 Build in doors and windows, structural and miscellaneous metals, anchors, flashings, etc. furnished by other trades; as required to complete the Work. .7 Samples. .8 Protection of the Work of other trades. .9 Cleaning and Painting. .10 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 SAMPLE PANELS: Not Applicable. 1.4 COOPERATIQN: 1.4.1 Provisions for masonry Work related to the Work included in this Section is included in other Sections of this Specification, but it is mandatory that all masonry Work be executed with complete cooperation between the masons performing each of the various tasks included in Division 4. 04220 ~ CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 2 1.4.2 ProviZ' material and cooperate as required to execute all related Work including sample panels, handling and storage of material, scaffolding, etc. complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C90, Grade N-1. .1 Aggregate: ASTM C551 - .2 Curing: Autoclave: air dried not acceptable. .5 Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C426. .4 Special Shapes: Provide special fillers, closures, lintels, trough tile, etc. of a size as may be required to form all corners, returns, openings, jambs, offsets, etc. in order to maintain a proper bond throughout. .5 Excessively rough product will not be accepted. 2.1.2 Horizontal Wall Reinforcement: BLOCK-LOK by AA Wire Products o~ approved equal. .1 Exterior walls: AA 605 .2 Interior walls: AA 600 .5 Special Shapes: Provide special members at corners and intersections. 2.1.5 Reinforcement Bars: Refer to Section 05200. 2.1.4 Premolded Fillers and Control ~oints: ASTM: C1752, Type 1. 2.1.5 Anchors and Ties: .1 Corrugated or crimped metal ties: Not less than 7/8 inches wide and of sheet steel not lighter than 22 gage thickness. .2 Dovetail type anchors for use with embedded slots or inserts in concrete members: Flat sheet steel not lighter than 16 gage in thickness by one inch wide. Anchors for brickwork abutting .-- concrete columns shall be 16" losg. 2.1.6 Mortar and Grout: Refer to Section 04100. ~.1.7 Cleaning Solution: National Che~search "Deux", Berman Chemical Company Safe-T-Klenz, "DuPont" Sulfanic Cleaner" or other approved chemical compatible'with f.ace brick selected by Owner. 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 2.2 SCAFFOLDING 2.2.1 Provide scaffolding necessary for masonry and make same available to other trades required to execute Work in conjunction with masonry. Scaffolding shall conform to the requirements of ail governing ordinances and regulations. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 LAYING CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: 5.1.1 General: .1 Masonry shall not be laid when the temperature of outside air is below 40 degrees F. Bond for regular C.M.U.~s shall be as indicated on the Drawings. .2 Masonry Work shall be laid true to dimensions and to lines, shall be plumb, level, in correct bond, and properly anchored. .5 Joints shall be level~ of uniform width, and shall not exceed the size specified herein. .4 Verticle joints on exposed faces shall be spaced to line up plumb and true and joints shall be as uniform as the type of material will allow. .5 Cut masonry units with a motor-driven masonry saw. Cuts shall! be made completely throuth units rather than to score and break. .6 Construct all necessary openings and chases for pipes, wiring, cabinets, etc. .7 Broken or chipped product shall not be placed in walls. 5.1.2 Laying Units: .1 Each course shall be solidly bedded in mortar with verticie joints breaking halfway over the course below; shall be bonded at corners and intersections and shall be bonded into or anchored to the adjacent construction with metal anchors spaced not over 16 inches on center. .2 Jamb units shall be of shapes and sized required to bond with all units. .5 No cells shall be left open in face surfaces. .4 Masonry partitions shall be continuous from floor to Gnderside of~construction above except thoxe partitions supported by structural steel wSere masonry shall be terminated in accordance with details on the Drawings. 04220 CON.LTL UNIT MASONRY 4 .5 Units terminating a~inst soffits of beams or slab construction shall be wedged tight with tile wedges and the joint shall be slushed solidly with mortar. .6 In~tall masonry wall reinforcement in all masonry partitions spaces at 16" n.c. in bed joints. 3.1.3 Reinforced Masonry Lintels: .1 Provide reinforced concrete masonry unit lintels cover openings occurring in C.M.U. walls except where other types of lintels are indicated on the Drawings. -'- .1 Lintels shall be of thickness indicated on Drawings or as required by wall widths: shall be troffer type units reinforced with round deformed reinforcing steel bars. .2 Lintels shall be reinforced and filled in place with grout specified in Section 04100. "- 3.1.4 Mortar Joints: .1 Exposed mortar head and bed joints shall not be less than 1/4" or more than 1/2" wide except mortar joints in glazed units shall be 1/4" wide. .2 When the joints in the masonry Work have become thumb print hard, all exposed joints shall be tooled concave with a round jointing tool. Jointing tools shall be of sufficient length to eliminate wavy lines in the horizontal joints. .5 Joints in C.M.U. Work which are burned or discolored as a result of tooling will not be acceptable. 3.1.5 Cutting and Patching: .1 Cutting and patching of masonry required to accommodate the Work of other trades shall be performed by masonry mechanics. .2 Where possible, full units of proper size shall be used in lieu of cut units. 3.1.6 Inserts: .1 Build-in inserts for Work of other trades as required. .2 Where weight of items to be attached to wall is heavy, cells shall be filled with grout to produce a wall sufficiently rigid to suppoAt the attached item. 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 5 5.1.7 Control Joints: .1 Control joints shall be continuous vertically from top to bottom of masonry. .2 Joints shall be completely separated with premolded filler. 5.2 CEMENT WASHES: Construct cement washes composed of one part Portland Cement to three parts screened sand. After mortar sets, trower to a hard-smooth finish, free from defects. 5.5 PROTECTION OF OTHER MATERIALS: Take proper precautions to protect all surfaces over which or against which masonry Work occurs. The repair or replacement of any damaged surfaces caused by the delivery and installation of Work included in this Section shall be paid for by the masonry Subcontractor. 5.4 POINTING AND CLEANING: 3.4.1 Before completion of the Work, ail defects in joints of exposed masonry surfaces shall be raked out as necessary, filled with mortar, and retooled. 5.4 o Not Used 3.4.5 Not Used. 3.4.4 Exposed regular concrete masonry unit surfaces shall be rubbed with a concrete brick, wire brushed and washed with clean water. 5.4.5 All surfaces shall bel left clean, free of mortar daubs, dirt, stain and discoloration, including scum from cleaning operations, and with tight mortar joints throughout. 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 3.5.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 3.5.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. DIVISION 5 METALS 0520r~ STEEL JOISTS 05500 STRUCTURAL STEEL & MISCELLANEOUS METALS 05200 ~'-. STEEL JOISTS 1 PART 1 GENERAL ~ 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 'Work included in this Section, while not ail inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish labor, materials, equipment and services in connection with the furnishings, manufacture and erection of all steel joists, complete including, but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Joists "- .2 Bridging .5 Side wall anchors .4 Extended ends .5 Clean-up 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: .1 Steel Joist Institute, Latest Edition. .2 American Welding Society .1 Code of Welding in Building Construction, Latest Edition. .5 Steel Structure Painting Council: .1 Painting Manual, Vol. 1, Good Painting Practice, Latest Edition .2 Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems and Specifications, Latest Edition. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS: 1.4.1 Welds of steel joists shall be made only by operators who have qualified by tests as prescribed in the "Standard Qualifications Procedure of the American Welding Society" to perform the type of'work requi~ed. 05200 STEEL JOISTS 2 -~ 1.5 SUBMITTALS: 1.5.1 Before commencing any steel joist Work~ submit detailed shop and installation Drawings of all steel joists for the review of the Owner. Joists for shich such Drawings have not yet been reviewed shall not be fabricated. Such review will cover the general locations~ spacing~ anchorages~ bridging~ and details of design. 1.5.2 Certified mill test reports evidencing conformity with the requirements of the ASTM and AISC Specifications shall be submitted to the Owner in quadruplicate. 1.5.3 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with provisions of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Section 01000. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Materials shall be of domestic maunfacture and shall conform to the following.requirements: ~.~ I.~ Steel Bearing Plates,. bridging~ wail anchors,, etc.,, shall be domestic steel conforming to the current edition of ASTM Designation A- 2.1.5 Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A-5~)7. 2.1.4 Welding Electrodes shall conform to the requirements latest edition of ASTM Designation A255 fop series #E70 of SAW 5.5 electrodes or submerged A~c Grade SAW-2. 2.1.5 Steel Joist as required by the SJI Institute with sizes and types as shown on the D~awings with recommended bridging. Connection of bridging to wail shall be required and shall conform to standards. 2.1.~ Joist and accessories not exposed shall receive one (1) shop coat of protective paint of a type standard with the manufacturer~ asphalt not permitted. Exposed joist shall receive one (1) coat "RUST BAN" AK ~288. 2.2 FABRICATION: 2.2.1 Join members by welding in a manner that will produce finished connection of strength required. Principal tension members o~ joist shall extend full length of joist without splicing of jointing. ~.~ ~.~ 2 Holes shall not be made or enlarged by burning~ nor shall un~ir holes in shop or field be burned to fit. 2.2.5 Scaler rust or other deleterious materials shall be removed 'from fabricated joist before shop coat of paint is applied. 05200 STEEL JOISTS 5 2.2.4 Provide all necessary bridging, extended bottom chords and top chords, side wall anchors, and wall connectors. 2.2.5 After fabrication, clean joists, bridging, anchors, etc. of rust, all mill scale, dirt or other foreign material by approved methods. Remove grease or oil with Benzine or similar volatile cleaner. After cleaning joists, bridging, etc., give one (1) dip or airless pressure spray coat of specified paint. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 JOIST TYPE AND APPLICATION: 3.1.1 Steel H & CH Series joist shall be fabricated and erected in accordance with the current specifications for Steel Joists, as adopted by the Steel Joists Institute, and with modifications as indicated on Drawings and specified herein. 3.1.2 Extended Ends: .1 Provide extended ends for top chords of joist where indicated. Extensions members shall be designed as cantilever beams with their reactions carried back at least to the first panel point of the joist. 5.2 ERECTION: 5.2.1 Bridging shall conform to S~I specifications and/or information contained on the Drawings. 5.2.2 Minimum bearings and anchorage shall conform to SJI specifications and/or the Drawings as related to particular type of support. 5.2.5 Set joist to lines, levels and spacing as indicated. Provide bearing plates as indicated and/or required to carry out structural requirements. 5.2.4 Joist shall be permanently fastened to supports and ail bridging and anchorage completely installed before any construction loads, other than workmen, are placed on joists. 3.2.5 Execute welding in accordance with "Code for Arch and Gas Welding in Building Construction" of American Welding Society as amended to date, and only by welding operators who have been previously qualified to perform type of Work required. 3.2.6 After erection, field connections and all abraded places of shop paint'shall be touched up with same kind of paint as shop coat. 05200 STEEL JOISTS 5.2.7 Do not use joists with cracked or improper welds of joints - otherwise damaged so as to affect their structural properties in Work. Field repair of such damaged joists will be allowed by special permission and subdect to approval of the Owner. 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 5.5.1 Clean up all trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section -- keeping premises~ streets~ sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at ail times. 5.5.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 05500 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section~ while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install structural and miscellaneous metal Work complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. .5 Protection of the Work of other trades. .4 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGUALTORY AGENCIES: 1.5.1 The following Specifications and Codes shall govern, with modifications as specified herein. - .1 American Institute of Steel Construction. .2 American Welding Society. .5 Steel Structure Painting Council. .4 National Association of Ornamental Metal Manufacturers. .5 American Society for Testing and Materials. .6 American Standards Association. 1.5.2 Comply with applicable requiren=ments of Local Codes and Ordinances. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Shop-Drawings and Samples in accordance with provisions included in GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Section 01000. 1.4.2 Submit mill text reports evidencing conformity with relative portions of ASTM and AISC Specifications upon request by Owner. 1.4.5 Contractor shall certify to the Architect that welders have passed qualifications~ test procedures as prescribed by the American Welding Society and are experienced in welding of steel for building construction. 05500 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS 2 -- PART~ ~ PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Materials shall be new~ free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance and of good domestic, commercial quality as follows: .1 Structural steel: ASTM: A56 or otherwise as noted on the Drawings. .2 Welding Electrodes: AWS-E70. .5 Unfinished Bolts and Nuts: ASTM: A525 (Hexagon Type). .4 Washers: .1 Circular: ASA Standard B 27.2, Type A, flat and smooth. .2 Beveled Washers (for American Standart Beams and Channels): square or rectangular, tapered in thickness, and smooth. .5 Washers for high-strength steel: Hardened. .5 Zinc Coating (for all but threaded products): ASTM: A125 A145. .6 Zinc Coating (for threaded products): ASTM: A155. .7 Paint: .1 Typical: FS-TT-P-656C, Type III .2 Exposed: TNEMEC 10-~ Primer, Gray. One coat, 2 mils, 55% min. solids by volume. Surface preparation & application per manufacturer's recommendations. ?o guage Type "F" steel deck Roof Deck shall be 1-1/2 inch, meeting the requirements of the Steel Deck Institute. 2.2 ~ABRICATION: 2.2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Verify ali measurements and take field measurements necessary before fabrication. Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials, shall generally match in color and finish, and harmonize with the material to which fastenings are applied. .1 Materials and parts necessary to complete each item, even though such Work is not definitely shown or specified, shall be included. 05500 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS 5 .2 Miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces and connections necessary for competion of the structural and miscellaneous metal Work shall be provided. The necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets shall be provided so that the Work can be assembled in a neat and substantial manner. .5 Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled or punched. Poor matching of holes shall be cause for rejection. Fastenings shall be concealed where practible. .4 Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. .5 Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water. .6 Fabrication of Sturctural Steel shall comply with applicable standards of the National Association of Ornamental Metal Manufacturers. .8 Execute welding in shop and field by operators who have been quialified previously by tests in accordance with the American Welding Society "Standard Qualification Procedure" to perform type of Work required under this Contract. .9 Welding and equipment shall be in accordance with the Standard Code for Arc Gas Welding in Building Construction of the American Welding Society. Welding not otherwise covered herein shall conform to best modern practice and be of adequate strength and durability, with jointing made tight, flush in true planes with base metals, clean and smooth. 2.2.2 Shop Work: .1 Fabricate and assemble materials in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Take assembled pieces apart, if necessary, for the removal of burrs and shavings produced by the reaming operation. Parts not completely assembled in the shop shall be secured by bolts, insofar as gractible, to prevent damage in shipment and handling. .2 Finish Work shall reproduce Drawing details. .5 Joints shall be flush welded; shall be watertight where exposed to the weather and kept to the minimum possible in commercial lengths. .4 Castings shall have fine, even texture and shall be unwarped and sound. Lines and miters shail be sharp, arrises unbroken, and profiles accurate. ..5 Plane surfaces shall be smooth. Fills or cut areas shall have texture restored. 05500 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS .6 Shop paint steel and cast iron surfaces with one (1) coat of approved rust inhibitive paint. Galvanized surfaces need not be shop painted. PART 5 EXECUTION -' 5.1 GENERAL: 5.1.1 Erect structural steel in accordance with applicable standards and specifications in the AISC Manual to Steel Construction. 5.1.2 Erect miscellaneous steel in accordance with applicable standards of the National Association of Ornamental Metal Manufac- turers. 5.1.5 Roof Deck shall be continuous over three or more spans and shall be welded to the supporting steel with 1/4 inch x I inch puddle welds. Welds to be 6 inches o.c. at end laps and 12 inches o.c. at intermediate supports. 5.2 FIELD CONNECTIONS 5.2.1 Make splices and field connections with bolts, unless otherwise indicated. .1 Errors in shop fabrication or deformation resulting from handling and transportation that prevent the proper assembly and fittings of parts shall be freported immediately to the Owner and approval of the method of correction shall be obtained. .2 Approved corrections shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. .5 Properly locate and coordinate the building in of anchor bolts and anchors by related trades. Bolts and anchors shall be preset by the use of templates or such other methods as may be required to locate the anchors and anchor bolts accurately. 5.5 FIELD ASSEMBLY: 5.5.1 After assembly, the various members forming parts of a completed frame of structure shall be aligned and addusted accurately before being fastened. 5.4 PIELD PAINTING: 5.4.1 After erection, field connections, including welds, bolts, and all abraded placed on the shop paint, shall be painted with same materials specified for shop coats. 5.4.2 Finish painting required ~or steel exposed io the finished Work shall be as specified in Section 09900, PAINTING. 5.4.5 Structural steel members or surfaces of members in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned~ but shop paint shall be ommited. 05500 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS 5 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 5.5.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 5.5.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. DIVISION & ~OODS ~ ~L~STICS (i)6100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 0622£) MILLWORK O&lO0 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not ali inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish materials and perform Work required to complete framing Work indicated on the Drawings and specified herein including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Miscellaneous framing, bracing, blocking, furring, buck, plates, lintels, joists, rafters, etc. .2 Treated lumber: moisture resistant. .5 Rough hardware including nails, spikes, bolts, nuts, washers, csrews, etc. for a complete dob. .4 Protection of the Work of other trades. .5 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: 1.5.1 GRADING AND MARKING: .1 Lumber and plywood shall bear the grade-mark, stamp or other identifying marks indicating grades of meterial and rules or standards under which they are produced. .2 Identifying marks on a material shall be in accordance with the rule or standard under which the material is pro- duced, including requirements for qualifications and author- ity of the inspection organization, usage of authorized i- dentification, and information included in the identifica- tion. 1.5.2 SIZES: .1 Lumber sizes shall conform to American Standard PS 20-70, and, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or speci- fied, shall be surfaced on four sides (S4S). .2 Sizes for materials other th~n lumber shall confgrm to the requirements of the rules or standards under which they are produced. 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2 "' .5 Size references, unless otherwise specified, are the nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within the manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standard under which the product is produced. 1.5.5 STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES: .1 Framing, Sizes, spacing~ connection, etc.~, shall be as indicated on the Drawings; shall be in accordance with applicable codes and ordinances. .2 Conditions not indicated on the Drawings and not otherwise specified herein shall be designed and executed in accordance with applicable portions of the current edition of the "National Design Specifications for Stress-Grade Lumber and its Fastenings by the National Forest Products Association. .5 Rough carpentry Work shall conform to these specifications and to applicable requirements of National Lumber Manufacturers Association's "Manual for House Framing" shall be considered as minimum acceptable. In case of conflict between pro.ject specifications and NCMA~s "Manual for House Framing", project specifications shall govern. 1.5.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT .1 Lumber and plywood that require preservative treatment for moisture resistance shall be pressure treated in accordance with the American Wood Preservers Institute Standards as follows: .1 Wood in contact with soil or water: AWPI Standard LP55. .2 Wood to be painted or to make contact with painted parts and wood to which finishing materials will be fastened: AWPI Standards of LP2 or LP4. .5 Other wood not listed above: AWPI Standards LP2, LPS, or LP4 at the manufacturer's option. .4 Each and every piece of treated lumber and plywood that meets the standards specified above shall be so marked in accordance with the American Wood Preservers Institute Standards. .2 Treated wood which is cut shall be brush-coated with the preservative used in the original treatment. .5 Wood treated with oil-borne preservatives shall be clean, free from surface oil and properly seasoned for use in building construction. .4. Wood treated with water-borne preservatives shall be air-dried or kiln-dried to the moisture content specified for lumber and marked with the word "Dry." 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.4 HANDLING: 1.4.1 Materials shall be delivered to the site in undamaged condition, stored in fully covered~ well ventilated areas~ and protected from extreme changes in temperature and humidity. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Accessories and Nails: Metal items exposed to the exterior: Galvanized or other corrosion resistant type. .1 Anchor bolts: Steely size as indicated~ complete with nuts. .2 Bolts; lag, toggle~ and miscellaneous bolts, and screws: Type~ size, and finish best suited for the intended use. .5 Expansion shields: Type and size best suited for the purpose, in accordance with Federal Specification FF-N-105 when applicable to the type to be used. For furring, lengths of nails shall be sufficient to extend 1 inch into supports. In general, 8-penny or larger nails shall be used for nailing through 1-inch thick lumber and for toe nailing 2-inch thick lumber; 16-penny or larger nails - shall be used for nailing through 2-inch thick lumber. 2.1.2 Framing and Miscellaneous Wood Members. .1 S.Y.P. No. 2~ fb = 1550 P.S.I. unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. .2 Members not identified on the Drawings shall be provided in accordance with provisions included in Article 1.5 of this Section. 2.1.5 Plywood: U.S. PRODUCT STANDARD PS-i, Structural 11, C-D for exterior applications and Standard Grade with exterior glue for interior applications except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Thickness as indicated on the Drawings. 2.2 MOISTURE CONTENT: 2.2.1 Treated and untreated lumber 2 inches or less in thickness, except roof planking: 19 percent maximum. 2.2.2 Treated and untreated lumber over 2 inches in thickness: 25 percent. 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 4 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 GENERAL: 5.1.1 Provide wood blocking as required for support of various items of work. Blocking shall conform to nominal size requirements as indicated on drawings and as otherwise specified herein. Cut and sp.ace to indicated dimensions. 5.1.2 Cut wood members square on bearing points, closely fitted, accurately set to required lines, levels, plumb, and secure rigidly in place at bearings and connections. 5.1.5 Do not use shims for leveling on wood or metal bearings. Use slate or tile shims with full bearing for leveling on masonry or concrete. 5.1.4 Install anchors where indicated and/or required to anchor Work to concrete. Anchors for plates or nailers not otherwise indicated shall be 1/2" diameter bolts spaced approximately six (6) feet on centers. 3.1.5 Install wood blocking as necessary for the application of siding, sheathing, and other materials or building items. Blocking shall be cut to fit between framing members and rigidly nailed thereto. 5.2 TEMPORARY CENTERING, BRACING AND SHORING: 5.2.1 Temporary centering, bracing and shoring for the support and protection of the structure during construction shall be strongly made, properly installed and securely in place to serve the intended purpose. 5.2.2 Protect exposed corners, sills, jambs, etc., of finished Work subject to damage. 5.5 CLEAN-UP 5.5.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 5.5.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 06220 MILLWORK 1 PART i GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section~ while not all inclusive but listed as a guider is as follows: .! Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1~ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Fabricate and install millwork complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein, including but not necessari- ly the following: .! Casework .2 Interior cut to length and lineal wood trim including running trim and standing trim as defined by Architectural Woodworking Institute. .5 Application of laminated plastic. .4 Installation of finish hardware. .5 Hanging wood doors WHEN REQUIRED. .5 Protection of the Work of other trades. .4 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specified elsewhere. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS: 1.5.1 The Owner reserves the right to approve the millwork manufactu- rer selected to furnish all of the millwork. The approved millwork manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have completed comparable work. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING: 1.4.1 Material delivered to the site shall be carefully stored off the ground in such a manner to insure drainage, ventilation and protection from the weather 1.4.2 Cooperate with the Subcontractor for related Work included in Section 09900. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATOR~ AGENCIES: 1.5.1 SIZES: American Softwood Lu~ber Standards PS-20-70. 06220 MILLWORK 2 - 1.5.2 GRADING AND MARKING: .1 Softwood Lumber: Federal Specification MM-L-O©751f. .2 Hardwood Lumber: Feredal Specification MM-L-OO756a and grading rules of the National Hardwood Lumber Association. .5 Softwood Plywood: U.S. Product Standard PS-1 for Softwood Plywood-Construction and Industrial and grading rules of the American Plywood Association. .4 Each piece of plywood or lumber shall bear the official grade mark of an approved Inspection Bureau or Association. 1.5.5 LAMINATED PLASTIC: National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA LD-1) for Class I high pressure decorative laminates. .6 STANDARDS: 1.6.1 "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Casework .1 Case work for transparent finish; includes cabinetry in ali classroom, offices and workrooms. AW1 Premium Grade, details as indicated on drawings. Birch veneer & Birch stock. .2 Casework for opaque finish: Includes storage shelving in closets, ~anitor~ and storage. AW1 Custom Grade, details as indicated on drawing. Shelving - fir. Nosings - fir or white pine. .5 Particle board not acceptable in lieu of plywood. 2.1.2 Laminated plastic shall be 1/16" thick~ general purpose~ high pressuredecorative laminate as indicated on Drawings; shall be equal to one of the following: (colors, textures, and/or patterns as selected by the Owner. .1 FORMICA as manufactured by the Formica Corporation. .2 PARKWOOD as manufactured by Parkwood Laminates, Inc. TEXTOLITE as manufactured by General Electric. 2. 1 (Continued) 06220 MILLWORK 5 2.1.5 Steel Shapes: Shall conform to ASTM A56. 2.1.4 Adhesives (for laminated plastic>: As recommended by the .._ laminated plastic manufacturer. 2.1.5 Glue: Waterproof type of best quality as approved by the Owner. 2.1.6 Accessories and Connectors: .1 Lag Screws and Bolts: Comply with Federal Specification FF-B- 0561, type and grade best suited for the purpose. .2 Toggle Bolts: Comply with Federal Specification FF-B-558. .5 Nails: Comply with Federal Specifications FF-N-105, except nails for embedding in concrete shall be galvanized. .4 Wood Screws: Slotted head type comploying with Federal Specifications FF-S-Illa. .5 Misc. Bolts, etc.: Bolts, nuts, studs, and rivets shall conform to Federal Specifications FF-B-571 and FFOB-575 as applicable. 2.1.7 Casework Hardware: .1 Drawer slides - K & V ~1500 .2 Hinges - Stanley ~552 .5 Catches - Stanley #552 .4 Pulls - EPCO # MC - 4024, BRONZE .5 Adjustable shelf brackets: K~V #255 standard with 256 supports, surface mount. 2.2 FABRICATION: 2.2.1 Lumber shall be surfaced four sides; dressed sizes shall conform to the requirements of the Department of Commerce Simplified Practice Recommendation R-16. 2.2.2 Lumber shall be kiln dried and the moisture content shall not exceed 19%. 2.2.5 Lumber shall be worked to such patterns as indicated on the Drawings. 2.2.4 Wood trim shall have kerfed or hollow bac?s and shall be by heat press method in a shop fully equipped to ~abricate such work. 0&220 MILLWORK 4 - 2.2 (Continued) 2.2.6 Contractor to take field measurements for all counter tops and other surfaces receiving laminates. PART EXECUTION 5.1 GENERAL: 3.1.1 Delivery of millwork and commencement of installation at the job site shall be at the times established by the Contractor; however, millwork shall not be installed in the building before it is completely enclosed. 5.1.2 Plaster, gypsum wallboard, ceramic tile work, and all overhead painting and ceiling Work of other trades shall be completed and scaffolding removed brfore commencing millwork installation. 3.1.5 All items of finish carpentry shall be primed on all surfaces before erection with a coat of paint (where a paint finish is to be applied) or primed with other materials (where a natural finish is specified). Refer to Section 09900. 5.1.4 Trim or other finished wood materials which have been hammer marked, dented, scratched or otherwise damaged will not be acceptable. 5.2 WORKMANSHIP: 3.2.1 Work to be performed in accordance with the details shown on the. Drawings. Face materials matched smoothly. Scribe, miter, and join accurately. Work shall be erected plumb, true and square in accordance with Drawing requirements. Drill holes in hardware for nails and screws. Finish work shall be blindnailed wherever possible and with surface nails set. Ail molds, cornices, bases, etc., shall be coped or housed on inside corners and not mitered. 5.2.2 After installation, finish work shall be properly handsanded and steel-wooled to produce fine, smooth, uniform clean surfaces, complete- ly free of all defects and entirely satisfactory in every respect. 3.2.5 Install cabinet and other finish hardware to provide easy, quiet, and proper operation. ~'. ~ INSTALLATION: 5..5.1 Work shall be erected plumb, true and square; face materials matched smoothly. 06220 MILLWORK 5 5.5 (Continued) 5.5.2 Drill holes in hardwood for nails or screws. Conceal nails in finish Work. 5.5.5 Molds, cornices, bases, etc. shall be coped or housed on in- side corners and not mitered. 5.5.4 Bui;t-in items shall be constructed in accord with details. 5.5.5 Interior wood trim shall be the shapes and sizes indicated on the Drawings. .1 Easing shall be set 1/4" back from face edge of iambs and head, nail to finish and to rough jambs. .2 Carefully joint and rigidly secure joints between frames. 5.4 HANG DOORS: 5.4.1 Drill and fit doors tO leave equal width stiles on each side; width of headrail to match stiles. ~._~.4.2 nstall hardware and hang doors for snug fit but without binding; make allowances for finish floor materials. .1 Finish hardware shall be received from the supplier as selected by Owner. .2 Hardware shall be accurately fitted in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and to the satisfaction of the Owner so d~ors will close without forcing and to prevent any rattling with all hardware cuts true and neat. .5 Wherever necessary, hardware shall be removed before adjacent surfaces are finished and shall be replaced and adjusted after completion of finishings. Immediatel~ after fitting doors~ remove same and seal to~ and bottom edqes with all coats oft material ~pecified in Section .4 Door knobs shall be protected against damage until completion and acceptance of the project by the Owner. 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 5.5.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work'of this Section keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at ali times. 5.5.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved location. DIVISION 7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 07110 WATERPROOFING 07220 BUILDING INSULATION 07411 PORCELAIN ENAMEL FASCIA PANELS 07510 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07600 SHEET METAL 07700 WALL FLASHING 07800 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07900 CAULKING & SEALANTS 07110 WATERPROOFING 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section~ while not ail inclusive but listed as a guider is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION I~ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish material and install membrane waterproofing complete where indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Membrane waterproofing on vertical walls below grade. .5 Protect the Work of other trades. .4 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related work specified elsewhere: .1 Cast-in-place concrete: Section 05500. .2 Wall Flashing: Section 07700. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS OF APPLICATOR: NOT USED 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Guarantees: .1 Membrane waterproofing System: Finish written guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship for two (2) years from the date of final acceptance. 07110 WATERPROOFING 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Membrane waterproofing: .2 Asphalt: F.S. SS-S-666D, type Vm ASTM D-250, 1516. Insulation board: F S. LLL I 5J5 class C, 1/2" thick .4 Membrane: Equal to Johns-Manville No. 15 Asbestos Waterproofing Felt. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES: 3.1.1 Before commencing Work, examine surfaces to receive materials of - this Section. Make necessary adjustments or corrections to secure a satisfactory job. Application of waterproofing material to surface constitutes acceptance of that surface and nullifies claims for unsatisfactory performance due to real or alledged faulty surfaces. 5.1.2 Do not apply waterproofing to frost-covered surfaces. 5.1.4 Do not apply waterproofing materials when temperature is below 40 degrees F. 5.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES 3.2.1 Remove foreign and loose material from the surfaces before waterproofing is applied. 3.2.2 Surfaces must be dry, free of dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other foreign matter, and free of pits, cracks, projections, and other defects that may result in an unsound or uneven base for coating before waterproofing is applied. 5.5 APPLICATION 5.5.1 Follow manufacturer's printed instructions exactly in the application of materials. 5.5.2 Membrane Waterproofing: .1 Surfaces to receive waterproofing shall be clean and dry. Holes, joints, and cracks shall be pointed flush with mortar. Before waterproofing.is applied, the surfaces to be covered shall be carefully swept to remove curing agents, dust and foreign - · matter, and shall be inspected and approved. Surfaces to which asphalt-type waterproofing is to be applied shell be given a 07110 WATERPROOFING 5.5.2.1 (Continued) coat of asphalt primer and allowed to dry prior to application of the asphaltic bitumen. 2. The membrane shall be applied in solid coats of bitumen, using not less than 50 pounds of bitumen for each 100 square feet of surface. The bitumen shall be heated to flow freely, not to be heated above 400 degrees F. The membranes shall be applied in the hot bitumen free from wrinkles or buckles. The entire top surface shall then be given a final mopping, using not less than 6£) pounds of asphalt for each 100 square feet of surface. Three-ply membraneshall be applied by the shingle method with each strip lopped over the preceding strip 22 inches or 24 1/2 inches for 52 inches wide material, respectively. .5 Fabric membranes shall be used for reinforcing at angles, and at other places where the waterproof membrane may be subjected to unusual strain such as penetrations through the wall. Reinforcing shall consist of two additional plies of saturated fabric and alternate moppings of bitumen. Reinforcing strips at angles shall be of sufficient width to extend at least 6 inches on each side of the corner. .4 Waterproofing shall be protected by insulation board. Insulation board shall be pressed into the final mopping while the mopping is still hot, with edges of boards brought into moderate contract and joints staggered. Boards shall be carefully and neatly fitted around pipes and projections and shall cover the entire surface of the waterproofing. .5 Protect the Work of other trades, but should adjacent Work become soiled as a result of the Work of this Section, the soiled surfaces shall be cleaned in strict accordance with written directives of the Architect. .6 Cleaning of Work of other trades shall be performed by workman of the related trade and shall be paid for by the subcontractor for the Work included in this Section. 5.4 CLEAN-UP: 5.4.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 5.4.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 07220 BUILDING INSULATION 1 PART I GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guider is as 'Follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION lr GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install thermal type insulation and related items to complete Work indicated on Drawings, as specified herein, or both. .5 Building insulation shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following: .1 Bart insulation above ceilings. .2 Other thermal or sound isolating type insulation indicated on Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elswhere. 1.5 DESIGN CONDITIONS: 1.5.1 Thermal resistance (Mass Resistance): .1 Ceilings: R-lq .2 Walls: R-15 1.5.2 Vapor Barriers (Vapor permeance no greater than on (1) perm>: .1 Fire Rated Walls, Ceilings and Partitions: Flame resistant, reflective membrane covering on one principal face. .2 Other walls, Ceilings and Partitions: Non-reflective membrane covering on one principal face. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Thermal Insulation: .1Batts (or Blankets): Federal Specification HH-1-521D. ~07220 BUILDING INSULATION 2 P~T 5 INSTALLATION 5.1 INSTALLATION: 5.1.1 Installation of ail insulation shall be in strict accordance with approved manufacturer's published specifications and recommendations and as specified herein: .1 Press tightly in framing spaces, vapor barrier to inside with flanges overlapping sides of framing members and stapled. .2 Bart insulation over ceiling, where called for on Drawing, shall have joints closely butted placed tightly over framing members. .5 Stagger joints in each layer in insulation where multiple layers are required. .4 Press small pieces into ail spaces of insulated walls, forming a continuous insulated surface, free of voids. .5 Not used. .6 Cut and fit snugly around pipes, conduits and outlet boxes maintaining a continuous barrier over surface to be insulated. 7. Insulation shall be integral and unbroken around electrical boxes conduits and plumbing pipes. .8 Insulation at plumbing in exterior walls shall be between pipes and exterior. 5.2 CLEAN-UP: 5.2.1 Clean Lip trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidealks and adjacent property clean and neat at ail times. 5.2.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 07411 PORCELAIN ENAMEL PANELS 1 PART I GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish material and install pre-finished, pre-formed fascia panels, complete, including fasteners as required. .5 Protection of the Work of other trades. .4 Clean-up. 1.2RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5SUBMITTALS: 1.5.1 Furnish Owner, in name of Owner, a written guarantee against peeling, blistering, chalking or fading. 1.3.~° Shop Drawings, furnish in accord with SECTION 01000,. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 PORCELAIN PANEL SYSTEM: PorcelainEnamel work indication on drawings shall be porcelain enamel on steel as manufactured by AMERICAN PORCELAIN ENAMEL, INC. 2.1.2 All work shall conform to "Porcelain Enamel Institute Specification." PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION: 5.1.1 Install system complete per Manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on drawings. Exposed fasteners and panel splices are prohibited. 5.2 CLEAN-UP 5.2.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section keeping premises, streets, sidewalks, and adjacen~ property clean and neat at all times. 07411 ~' PORCELAIN ENAMEL PANELS 2 5.2 (continued) ~ .__ 5.2.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site .at approved locations. 07510 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section~ while not all inclusive but listed as a guide~ is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1~ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish material and install an approved built-up bituminous roofing system complete with base flashing including but not necessarily limited to the folowing: .1 Smooth surfacer built-up roofing and base flashing in accordance with roofing and flashing specifications approved by the Owner. .2 Parapet wail flashing in accordance with specifications approved by the Owner. .5 Mineral surface walkways~ if required. .4 Sampling of roofing when required. .5 Install sheet metal Work provided in Section 07600. .~ Install flashing material provided in Divisions 15 & 1~. .7 Protection of the Work of other trades. .8 Clean-up. .9 Ten (10) year manufacturers guarantee. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS 1.5.1 Roofer shall be certified~ IN WRITING~ by the manufacturer of the proposed roofing materials. 1.5.2 Roofing materials shall be furnished by one (1) manufacturer. 1.5.5 Proposed roofing and flashing specifications and materials shall be specifications and materials provided by Owens-Corning FIBERGLAS Corp. Equal systems will be approved. Roofing systems desiring equal status must be approved in writing by the owners representative prior to bidding. 07510 BUILT-UP BI~MINOUS ROOFING 2 1.5.4 Roofing and flashing sp~ifications shall be approved, IN WRITING, by the Owner before commencement on the Work of this Section. 1.4 GUARANTEE: 1.4.1 Manufacturer shall guarantee roofing and related flashings against defective materials and/or faulty workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from the date of acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1.4.2 The guarantee shall be in writing on a form suitable to the Owner: form of guarantee shall be determined before commencement of Work. 1.5 TEST SAMPLES: 1.5.1 After completion of application of roofing and flashing but before application of flood coat, cut outs of the roof may be taken from roofing of each building as and when directed by the Owner. Cut- outs shall be made in accordance with the roofing materials manufacturer's recommended procedure. 1.5.2 Cut-outs shall be tested by the Owner's Testing Laboratory at the Contractor's expense, except if the samples do not meet the specifications, the roofing will be reworked as directed by the Owner and retested to prove compliance. All tests in this instance shall be at the roofer's expense. 1.5.5 Patch cut-out areas in strict accordance with the roofing materials manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Roofing: Owens-Corning specification 423 I.E.D. for a Class A roof on rigid insulation, emulsion surfacing. 2.1.2 Flashings & Accessories: Owens-Corning specifications #~s as applicable to the various situations as indicating on the Drawings. 2.1.5 Insulation: Owens-Corning Fiberglas, R=2.78, all building except Gymnasiums , Gymnasiums to be R=18.02, mechanically fasten throughout with Glasfast fasteners. 2.1.4 Alternate Roofing: Owens-Corning DURBIGUM on rigid insulation with emulsion surfacing. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 GENERAL: 5.1.1 The en£ire roof-deck construction of any bay or section shall be completed and the ambient temperature'shall.be not lower than 40 degrees F., before roofing Work .is-begun. 07510 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 5 5.1 (continued) .1 Surface on which roofing or flashings are to be applied shall be free from ice, frost, moisture, dirt, projections, and foreign materials, and shall be smooth and firm. .2 Vents and other items penetrating roofs shall be secured in position and properly prepared for flashing. 5.1.2 Surfaces to which roofing, flashings, and sheet metal Work are to be applied shall be enev, smooth~ thoroughly clean, dry and free from all defects. Report to the Owner, in writing, any unsatisfactory surfaces before commencement of the Work. 5.2 APPLICATION: 5.2.1 Apply built-up roofing and flashings in strict accordance with approved specifications listed in Part. I of this Section. 3.2.2 Install sheet metal and lead flashings, vents, curbs, pitch pans~ etc. provided in other Sections of these Specifications for installation under provisions included in this Section of the Specifications; installation shall be in strict accordance with published requirements by the approved roofing manufacturer. 5.2.5 Accessories essential, though not shown or specified, shall be provided. Ail such items, unless otherwise called for, shall be of similar material as item to which it is applied. Fasteners, screws, nails, etc. shall be of types best suited for the purpose intended and shall be of composition comparable to the metal which it will contact. 5.2.4 Causes for rejection shall be leaking, failure to stay in place, splitting, pulling loose from deck, alligatoring, buckling, tearing, water in standing pools over 1/2 inch deep, water bypassing flashing, water going behind fascias and water going between fascias and gutters. 5.5 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP: 5.5.1 Protect the Work of other trades~ but should adjacent Work become soiled as a result of the Work included in this Section, the soiled surfaces shall be cleaned in strict accordance with written directives by the Owner. 5.5.2 Cleaning of Work of other trades shall be performed by workmen of the related trade and shall be paid for by the Sub-contractop for the Work included in this Section. '- 5.5.5 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks, and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 5.5.4 Dispose of such materials outside th~ limits of the project site at approved locations. 07600 SHEET METAL I PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install sheet metal Work and related items to complete Work indicated on Drawings, specified herein, or both including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Flashing. .2 Gravel Stops. .5 Drips. .4 Cap Flashing. .5 Gutters and Downspouts. .6 Other flashing and sheet metal Work indicated on the Drawings such as pitch pans, expansion ]oints, etc. .7 Two (2) year guarantee. .8 Protect the Work of other trades. .9 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF DESIGN: 1.5.1 Connections, sizes, details shall be in accordance with recommendations in the latest edition of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual as published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association~ Inc., unless indicated in case of variances in details indicated against the recommended details above, the detail as approved by the Owner shall be used. 1.5.2 Sheet Metal Work in connection with built-up roofing shall conform to Bonding Company requirements for built-up roofing specified in Section 07510 and/or 07511. 1.5.5 Contractor shall furnish samples of glitter & downspout, flashings, reglets, etc. for approval.. 07600 SHEET METAL 2 %-- 1.4 GUARANTEE: .~' 1.4.1 Furnish a written guarantee or form approved by the Owner that sheet metal Work included in this Section shall be free from defects of material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years. 1.4.2 The sheet metal Sub-contractor shall satisfactorily repair all leaks or defects in sheet metal material and workmanship appearing within two (2) years of date of acceptance at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: 2.1.1 The type and locations of several various kinds, gages, thickness and finish of sheet metal required in specified hereinafter under the individual items; however, where sheet metal is indicated on Drawings and kind or type of metal is not definitely specified or noted, 26 gage zinc coated steel shall be provided. 2.1.2 The type and location of several various kinds, gages, thickness and finish of sheet metal required is referenced and/or identified under several related Sections listed herein in Article 1.2. .1 Sheet metal shall be provided under provisions of this Sectio~· _ and furnished to certain related trades for installation as specified in related Sections listed herein in Article 1.2. .2 Flashing for Mechanical and Electrical equipment shall be furnished as part of the Work of Divisions 15 and 16 for installation as part of the Work of this Section. 2.2 MATERIALS: 2.2.1 GALVANIZED IRON AND STEEL: Galvanized iron and steel shall be copper-bearing, conforming to Federal Specification QQ-S-775c. (All items, unless indicated or specified otherwise~ shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet steel). 2.2.2 SOLDER: .Solder not otherwise specified shall conform to Federal Specification QQ-S-571, composition Sn50. 2.2.5 SOLDERING FLUX: Flux not otherwise specified shall be rosin, except where conditions of application prohibit use of rosin, flux conforming to Federal Specification 0-F-506 shall be used. 2.2.4 NAILS: Conform to Feredal Specification FF-N-105, 11 gage, zinc-coated, length as required. 2 o 5 Rivets, Screws Bolts Nails and other Miscellanaous Items: Complete.with Rawl plugs where required: Galvanized S~eel, cadmium plated, or otherwise protected as approved by'the Owner. 07600 SHEET METAL 5 2.2 (continued) 2.2.6 Accessories: Same material as item to which applied~ gages to comply with standards of industry. 2.5 FABRICATION: 2.5.1 Fabrication of sheet metal items shall be in accordance with specofocations and standards published in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 2.5.2 Comply with REQUIREMENTS OF DESIGN specified herein this Section in Article 1.5. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 GENERAL: 5.1.1 Surfaces to which sheet metal is to be applied shall be even,smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry and free from all defects that might affet the application. Report any unsatisfactory surfaces to the Owner. 5.1.2 Materials furnished under this Section which are to be built-in by other trades shall be delivered to the site in time to avoid any delay to construction progress. 5.1.5 Accessories or other items essential to completing the sheet metal installation, though not specifically shown or specified, shall be provided. Ail such items shall be of the same kind of materials as the item to which applied. Fasterners shall be of the types best suited for the purpose intended, and be of composition compatible to metal it will contact. 5.1.4 Dissimilar materials ]uncture shall be executed in a manner that will prevent electrolysis between the two materials. 5.2 INSTALLATION: 5.2.1 Install sheet metal on dry surfaces over one (1) layer of fifteen (15) pounds of felt. Lap ]oints three (5) inches with clip soldered to back of one side of length. 5.2.5 Provide expansion joints approximately twenty (20) feet on center. Keep exposed soldered joints to a minumum. 5.2.4 Make soldered joints neat and smooth. Remove burrs and sharp edges and flux deposits on exposed surfaces. 07600 SHEET METAL 4 5.2 (continued) 5.2.5 Provide pitch pans for penetrations by solid object and conduit through the roof, except as otherwise shown on Drawings. · 5.2.6 Insert Metal cap on counterflashings in receiver reglets or otherwise as detailed as soon as practical after base flashings are installed, but not until danger of damage by surrounding construction i s past. 5.2.7 Extend cap or counterflashings down over base flashings at least four (4) inches or more as detailed and hem lower edge. Build counter. "-' flashing receivers into walls as indicated and lap joints three (5) inches., rivet and solder. .-.-.8 Form and install sheet metal to provide for expansion and contraction without leaking. 5.2.9 Construct sheet metal roof-connected materials as required by bonding authority and as detailed. Space joints in exposed fascias, copings and gravel guards at regular intervals coordinated with the building module, or as directed by the Owner. 5.2.10 Form reglets and receivers, flashings and counterfiashings as detailed on the Drawings and/or as indicated on approved Shop Drawings _. when required. 5.2.11 Provide back-up plates where required at joints. 5.2.12 Close ends of standing seams on gravel guards; bend ends over on back side and lay flat on top of cant, lap, fold., and solder on front edge. 5.2.13 Prime sheet metal indicated to be built into masonry or roofing with an approved bituminous paint. 5.5 PROTECTION: 5.5.1 Protect the Work of other trades from damage or contamination - caused by the sheet metal Work. 5.4 CLEAN-UP: 3.4.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section keeping all premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at ali times. -.- 5.4.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits the project site at approved locations. 07700 WALL FLASHING I PART I GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install wall flashings related items to complete Work indicated on Drawings; as specified herein, or both including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Wall flashing. .2 Protection of the Work of other trades. ~ C1 p . ~ ean-u . 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specified elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. .1 Masonry Work: Division 4. .2 Carpentry Work: Division 6. .5 Moisture Protection: Division 7. .4 Doors and Windows: Division 8. 5. Finishes: Division 9. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS: 1.5.1 Work included in this Section shall be applied only by an appli- cator who can provide positive proof of having successfully dampproofed other projects under comparable conditions over a period of at least five (5) years, using similar materials and methods to those specified .- herein. 1.5.2 Materials specified herein, unless otherwise noted, shall be as manufactured by Rubber and Plastics Compound Company, Inc., 25-20 43rd Avenue, Long Island City, New York, 11101. Products of equal substance and function as manufactured by Wasco Products, Inc., P.O. Box 351, Sabford, Maine, 04075 or Lexsuco, Inc., P.O. Bo>: 9530, Solon, Ohio. 07700 WALL FLASHING 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Guarantees: Furnish a written guarantee stating that ail material and workmanship are guaranteed against defects for a period of two (2) years after completion and final acceptance of Work. DeYects due to faulty material or workmanship developed during this guarantee period will be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: 1.5.1 Do not apply materials at temperatures less than 40 degrees F. -- PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Membrane; Non-reinforced, homogeneous, waterproof, impermeable sheeting compound of elastromeric substances which have been reduced to a thermoplastic state and extruded into a continuous sheet approximate- ly .020" thick such as NERVASTRAL SEAL-PRUF H-D, as manufactured by Rubber and Plastics Compound Co., Inc. or equal pre-formed sheeting manufactured by approved manufacturers listed in Paragraph 1.3.2 of this Section. 2.1.2 Adhesives, Cement and/or Tape: As recommended by the manufactu- rer of the approved elastromeric sheet flashing. PART ~ EXECUTION J. 1 SURFACE PREPARATION: ~.1.1 Surfaces to be treated shall be ~ree of oil, grease, laitence, and loose material. 5.2 APPLICATION: 5.2.1 Horizontal Masonry Surfaces; The flashing for horizontal masonry joints shall be laid in a slurry of fresh mortor and topped with a fresh full bed of mortar. The ~lashing shall start 1/2 inch from the outside face of the wall, carried through the wall turning up where possible to facilitate flow through weep holes to outside, turned up on back of wail not less than 2 inches or carried upward across cavity to - a minimum of 6 inches and secured in back wall mortar joint or to face of sheathing as required. Where interior face o~ masonry walls or exposed to view~ flashing shall terminate 5/4 inch back from the face and turned 1/2 inch on itself. 5.2.2 Vertical Masonry Surfaces: Vertical surfaces to be flashed shall be thoroughly dry, free from loose materials, reasonably smooth, and shall be sufficiently spotted with mastic to hold it in place until the masonry is set. 07700 WALL FLASHING 5.2 (continued) 5.2.5 Foundation Sill Dampproofing: The flashing for foundation sills shall be laid in a slurry of fresh mortar and topped with a fresh full bed of mortar. Flashing shall start within 1/2 inch of the exterior face and turn up on the inside not less than 2 inches or carried upward across cavity a minimum of 6 inches and secured in back wall mortar joint or to face of sheathing as required. Weep holes shall be installed approximately 2 feet on centers on top of flashing. Where sill and column meet, flashing shall be brought up a minimum of 10 inches up the column and secured with plastic cement. 5.2.4 Through Wall: Flashing shall start 1/2 inch from the outside face of the wall., carried through the wall, turning up where possible to facilitate flow through weep holes to outside and turn up on back of wall not less than 2 inches or carried upward across cavity a minimum of 6 inches and secured in back wall mortar joint to face of sheathing as required. 5.2.5 Cavity Wall: Flashing shall be laid in a slurry of fresh mortar and topped with a fresh full bed of mortar. Flashing shall start 1/2 inches from outside face of wall, carry through the wail and be upward across cavity a minimum of 6 inches and secured in back wall mortar joint or reglet. 5.2.6 Heads and Sills: Flashing for heads and sill shall start 1/2 inch from outside face of wall, carry through the wall and be turned up at the inside not less than 2 inches. Head flashing shall be carried 6 inches beyond both ends of the steel lintel. Both head and sill flashing shall be turned Lip at the sides to form a pan. Ail corners shall be folded - NOT CUT. Install weep holes. 5.2.7 Spandrels: Spandrel flashing shall start from the outside toe of the shelf angle, go to the face of the beam and then through the wall, turning up on the inside not less than~". Install weep holes. .-5.2.8 Parapet or Coping: Flashing for parapets or copings shall be laid in a slurry of fresh mortar and topped with a fresh full bed of mortar. Flashing shall come within 1/2 inch of the exterior and interior faces of the wall. Weep holes shall be installed approximately 52 inches on center immediately on top of flashing. 5.2.9 Dowels and Anchors: Completely seal around dowels and anchors which project through the flashing membrane and completely cover top surface of shelf angles, reglets, lintels., etc. extending at least four (4) inches above the top of each member or as otherwise detailed on the Drawings. 07700 WALL FLASHINO 4 5.2 (continued) 2.5.10 Wail Openings: At wail openings, extend the wall flashing at least 6 inches past iambs, and turn up I inch to form a waterstop. Extend the material under sill and turn it up behind frames. Extend " dampproofing at least 4 inches above the top of lintels and shelf angles, and secure similar members to vertical surfaces with a coat of mastic. _ 5.2.11 Joining Membrane: End laps shall be a minimum of 6 inches, and side laps shall be a minimum of 4 inches; all sealed with an approved type cement. Roll laps with a heavy hand roller until beads of cement - appear at the edges. 5.2.12 Weep Holes: Drain flashing to the outside. Provide weep holes at 52 inches on center in the head joints in the first course immediately above the flashings. Keep weep holes free of mortar droppings. 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 5.5.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, sidewalks, streets and adjacent property clean and neat at ail times. 5.5.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the prodect site at approved locations. 07800 ROOF ACCESSORIES 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not ali inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, SPECIAL PROVISIONS. .2 Furnish and install roof accessories complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Roof hatch with intergal curb. .2 Skylites .5 Protect the Work of other Trades. .4 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: 1.5.1 Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1, SPECIAL PROVISIONS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Metal Roof Hatch: Type S-20 as manufactured by the Bilco Company, New Haven, Conn., size 2'-6" x 5~-0". 2.1.2 Skylite, student activity area: Custom tetrahedron as manufactured by Naturaiite, Garland, Texas. Bronze acryllic glazing, Bronze anodized aluminum frame. 2.1.5 Skylites, Foyers: Pyramid PL6060 as manufactured by Naturalite, Garland, Texas. Bronze acryllic glazing, Bronze anodized aluminum frame. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 Install Roof Accessories in accordance with details in the Drawings as specified herein. 5.2. Flashing of accessories idto roofing shall be in accordance with · provisions of Section 07510. 07800 ROOF ACCESSORIES 2 - 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 5.5.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 5.5.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the prodect site at approved locations. 07900 CAULKING AND SEALANTS i PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not ail inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install caulking complete as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Caulk joints around windows and doors including any exposed joints around trim for same. .2 Caulk joints in fascia boards and exposed unprotected ]oints bewteen fascia boards and addacent materials. .5 Protection of the Work of other trades. .4 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: 1.5.1 The ambient temperature shall be within the range specified by the approved manufacturer of the approved sealant when the sealant is applied. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Sealant (caulking material): One part, 100% liquid polymar, acrylic base, sealant equal to MONO as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Co. Colors as selected by the Owner. 2.1.2 Joint back-up material: non-absorbent, nonstaining, compatible with the sealant and approved by the Owner. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 PREPARATION: 5.1.1 Examine ]oints to receive the Work of this Section and report on unacceptable conditions to the Project Superintendent for correction before commencement.of the caulking operations.' 07900 CAULKING AND SEALANTS 2 -- 5.1 (continued) 5.1.2 Prepare and clean joints to be caulked in strict accordance with recommendations of the approved sealant manufacturer. 3.1.5 If joint depth exceeds 1/2 inch, install back-up rod or other approved back-up material to a distance of not less than 1/2 inch from the surface of the joint. 5.2 INSTALLATION: 5.2.1 Compound shall be gun applied with a nozzle of proper size to fit the width of joint indicated, and shall be forced into grooves with sufficient pressure to expel air and fill groove solidly. 5.2.2 Caulking shall be uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles, and shall be left sufficiently convex to result in a flush joint when dry. 5.3 PROTECTION: 5.5.1 Protect the Work of other Trades. 5.5.2 Cleaning of adjacent materials shall be done immediately and Work shall be left in a neat, clean, unsoiled condition. Ail due care shall be exercised to prevent any damage or discoloration to any __ adjacent materials when removing excess caulking materials. 5.4 CLEAN-UP: 5.4.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 3.4.2 Dispose of all such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. DIVISION S DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AN[) FRAMES )8~(.~ FLUSH WOOD DOORS, SOLID CORE 08300 SPECIAL DOORS 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08701 FINISH HARDWARE 08765 THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING & SEALS 08850 GLASS & GLAZING 08950 STOREFRONT SYSTEM HOLLOW M~!~L_~OORS AND FRAMES 1 081O0 PART I GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF 'THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish all labor, material and equipment necessary and proper to install all metal doors and door frames as indicated on Drawings and specified herein. .5 Hollow metal Work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following: .1 Custom built, heavy gage hollow metal doors, frames and transoms. .2 Metal louvered doors and frames. .4 Finish hardware supplier will furnish hollow metal manufacturer with complete schedule of hardware to be furnished for doors and door frames and all templates required for punching, cutting, drilling, tapping, reaming and reinforcing. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS: 1.3.1 Where doors and door frames occur in openings requiring fire protection rating, construct doors and frames to meet the label requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, Inc., and apply appropriate UL label. I. 3.°~ ~ Except as otherwise modified herein, ail metal -frames shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the National Association of Aechitectural Metal Manufacturers Specifications for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, NAAMM Standard CHM-1-69. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS: 1.4.1 Doors and frames shall be as manufactured by Fenestra, Overly, Pioneer, Williamsburg or doors of equal substance and function as approved by Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: 1.5.1 Shop Drawings; Subm£t in accordance With provisions"included in Section 01000, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2 PART~ ~ PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Steel for doors and frames: Best quality cold-rolled sheet steel furniture stock. Gages herein referred to in connection with steel sheets are United States Standards. 2.1.2 Gages for Combination Bucks and-Frames, Anchors, etc. · I Combination bucks, frames Interior 16 gage Exterior 14 gage .2 Addustable anchors 16 gage .3 Floor anchors 14 gage .... .4 Hardware reinforcement - butts, pivots 7 gage .5 Hardware reinforcement - lock, latch, O.H. closers, strikes, etc. 12 gage .6Transom Bars - same gage as for frames .7 Moldings (stops) 18 gage "- 2.1.5 Gages for Flush Type Doors and Transoms: .1 Exterior door face plates 16 gage .2 Interior door face plates 18 gage .5 Z-bar Stiffeners 18 gage .4 Continuous channel top and bottom 16 gage .5 Hardware reinforcement, butts, pivot 7 gage .6 Hardware reinforcement, lock latch, flush bolts, concealed Holders, O.H. Closures 12 gage .7 Reinforcements for all other surface-mounted hardware 16 gage _. 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAM 2. 1.3 (continued) .8 Moldings (stops) 18 gage 2.1.4 Not Used. 2.1.5 Primer Paint: Meet or exceed Federal Specification TT-P-636c Red Oxide Primer. 2.1.6 Door Silencers: Glynn-Johnson GJ .64 silencers. 2.1.7 Metal Door Grilles: Where scheduled, furnish metal site-tight grilles of sizes indicated. Grilles shall be equal to Barber-Coleman Co. Type VF cores with channel frame. Finish: prime painted. 2.2 FABRICATION (DOORS): 2.2.1 Ail doors shall be custom made, of the types and sizes shown, and shall be fully welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on their faces or vertical edges. Minimum door thickness shall be 1-5/4", except where shown otherwise on Drawings. 2.2.2 Fabricate Doors of two (2) face sheets stiffened by continuous vertical formed steel section occupying the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. Stiffeners shall be spaced not more than six (6) inches apart and securely attached to both face sheets by spot welds not more than four (4) inches on center. Provide continuous spot welded channel stiffeners at vertical edges of doors. Sound deaden spaces between stiffeners by insulating full height of door with non-combustible bart-type materials. 2.2.3 Join door faces at their vertical edges by a continuous weld extending the full height of door. Grind all such welds, fill and dress to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface. 2.2.4 Close top and bottom edges of doors with a continuous recessed steel channel, extending full width of door and spot weld to both faces. Exterior doors shall have an additional flush closing channel at their top edges, and where required for attachment of weatherstripping a flush closure also at their bottom edges. Provide opening in the bottom closure of exterior doors to permit escape of entrapped moisture. 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 4 .2 (continued) 2.2.5 Hardware Reinforcement: Prepare doors for template hardware. Mortise doors, reinforce, drill and tap for hardware. Provide reinfor- cing for surface hardware; drill and tap for surface hardware in the field by the General Contractor. 2.2.6 Where openings occur in doors, place continuous pressed steel channels between face sheets around perimeter of opening and spot weld to both face sheets. Furnish glazing stops, fabricated-of steel, hollow rectangular section, with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth, and apply to doors with counter suck No. 6 oval head screws, 6" n.c. on interiors. Securely weld stops to door on security side. 2.5 FABRICATION: 2.5.1 All frames shall be custom made welded units with integral trim, of the sizes and shapes on Drawings. ~.~ ~.~ Ail finished Work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects, warp or buckle. Molded members shall all be clean cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their lengths. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends shall be as shown on Drawings. Corner joints shall have all contact edges closed tight, with trim faces mitered and continuously welded, and stops mitered. Grind all welds, fill and dress to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface. 2.5.5 Hardware reinforcements: Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap frames at the factory for fully templated mortised hardware only, in accord with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware Contractor. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only~ all drilling and tapping shall be done by others. 2.~.4 Floor anchors: Securely weld floor anchors inside each .~amb, with two (2) holes provided at each jamb for floor anchorage. 2.5.5 Jamb Anchors: Provide adjustable T-strap jamb anchors for frames installed in masonry walls and welded in strap or suitable design for frames installed in drywall or plaster partitions. The number of anchors provided on each jamb shall be as follows: .1 Masonry Walls: Frames up to 7'-6" height 5 anchors Frames 7~6" to 8~-0" height 4 anchors Frames over 8~-0" height anchor for each 2~ or fraction thereof in height. 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 5 2.3.5 (continued) .2 Plaster or Drywall Partitions: Frames up to 7~-6" height ~ anchors Frames 7~-6" to 8'-0" height 5 anchors Frames over 8~-©" height 5 anchors plus one (1) additional for each 2? of fraction thereof over 8~ --0" 2.3.6 Frames over 4~-0'' wide for installation in masonry walls shall have an angel ~r channel stiffener, not less than twelve (12) gage and not longer than the opening width, welded into the head at the factory. Such stiffeners shall not be used as lintels or load-carrying members. 2.5.7 Provide dust cover boxes (or mortar guards) of not thinner than -- 26 gage steel at all hardware mortises on frames to be set in masonry or plaster partitions. 2.5.8 Provide frames with a stell spreader temporarily attached to the feet of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. 2.5.9 Provide loose glazing stops, butted at corner joints and secured '-- to frame with countersunk oval head cadmium or zinc-plated screws. 2.5.10 Provide two (2) GJ-64 Silencers per head of double frames and three (5) per lock jamb or single frames. 2.4 Not used. 2.5 FINISH 2.5.1 Thoroughly clean all hollow metal surfaces of oil, grease, rust and other impurities, and bonderize. Ail irregularities shall be mineral filled and sanded smooth, followed by one (1) coat of best grade rust resisting metallic primer, baked on. 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 6 PART 5 EXECUTION: 5.1 INSTALLATION: 5.1.1 Set frames accurately~ plumb, true, in exact position desig- nated; brace them until enclosed in masonry, until mortar of such masonry has set. Set knee anchors in cement mortar with nails, dowels, or expansion bolts let through angles for fastening in position. In- -- spect frames periodically as they are being built in; maintain in proper position. 5.1.2 Make breaks, angles, corners square with walls. Set work that is to built in correctly; maintain until enclosed or built in and, except for moving parts, fasten securely in place; mmke rigid. Do required blocking, wedging for frames, hardware. - 5.1.5 Make doors fit accurately in their respective frames. At completion of Work, readdust all doors as necessary~ to put in perfect operating order. 5.2 CLEAN-UP: 5.2.1 Clean tip trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times 5.2.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the prodect site at approved locations. 08205 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, SOLID CORE 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 2. Provide flush, solid core wood doors to be fitted and hung including installation of' hardware, under provisions included in Section ~)6~.), to be finished under provisions included in Section 09900. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specified elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. -.- .1. Carpentry Work: Division 6. '~ Finish Hardware: Section 08701 .5 Painting: Section 09900. .4 Glass and Glazing: Section 08850. 1.5 GUARANTEE: _ 1.5.1 Furnish Owner, in name of Owner~ a written guarantee in accordance with Standard Door Guarantee of National Woodwork Manufacturers Association. Guarantee shall cover replacing and reasonable costs of rehanging and refinishing of doors. 1.5.2 Extend Standard Door Guarantee to two (2) years from original date of installation for exterior use and for interior use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Solid Core Doors: .1 Standard: Seven (7) ply~ flush panel solid core wood doors constructed and graded to equal or exceed applicable requirements of National Woodwork Manufacturers Association Standard NWMA IS 1- 69 and/or U>S> Commercial Standard CS 171-58. .2 Bonding: Exterior Doors; Type I (waterproof adhesive); hot press method. Interior Doors; Type 11 (water resistant adhesive~; cold press method. 08205 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, SOLID CORE 2 -- .5 Core: Manformed Wood Particleboard conforming to requirements _ for Type 1, Density C, Class 1 of CS256-66. .4 Top and Bottom Rails: Kiln dried stock, minimum width 1-1/8 inches built up of a net 5/8 inch hardwood outer rail securely glued to a staved inner rail of Pine or equal species. .5 Stiles: Kiln dried hardwood, total width 1-2/8 inches, built -- up of two pieces of stock securely glued together. Exposed edges shall be one piece, and of same species as face veneer. .6 Crossbands: Kiln dried hardwood 1/16 inch thick, extending full width of the door and laid with the grain at right angles to the face veneers. .7 Face Veneers: Kiln dried flitch laid with grain at right angles to top and bottom of door. Both faces sanded smooth. .1 Natural: BIRCH .8 Fire-rated doors to have full UL label. 2.1.~ F'reservative Treatment: .1 Treat exterior doors with a toxic, water-repellent preserva- _ rive conforming with the standards of the National Woodwork Manu- facturers Association. 2.1.5 Finish: -- .1 Doors to be job-site finished per Section 09900. PART ~ EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: 5.1.1 Provide doors to be fitted and hung under provisions included inSection 06220. 5.1.2 Store doors in fully-covered, well-ventilated areas and protect from extreme change in temperature. 5.1.3 Protect wood doors before and after hanging, against damage, in a suitable and acceptable manner approved by the Owner. 08205 FLUSH WOOD DOORS~_~QL!Q_~QS~ ..... ~ ................ 5.2 CLEAN-UP: 5.2.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section~ keeping premises, sidewalks, streets and all adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 5.2.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project at approved locations. 08500 SPECIAL DOORS 1 PART 1 GENERAL - 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with the terms of the CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, SPECIAL PROVISIONS. .2 Furnish Doors, for installation under related sections complete as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Rolling Counter Doors. .2 Sliding Mall Front. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: 1.3.1 Shop Drawings: submit in accordance with provisions of Section 01000, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Roofing Grilles: Packaged rolling counter door, model FCB4, as manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation, Dallas, Texas. Provide stainless steel curtain assembly, non-rated, keyed cylinder lock, (cylinder by hardware allowance), and stainless steel frame. 2.1.2 Sliding Mall Front: Multi-track unit, Model No. 1010, as manufactured by Kawneer, dark bronze anodized aluminum, keyed Adams- Rite cylinder lock, (cylinder by hardware allowance). 5.2 CLEAN-UP: 5.2.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean and neat at all times. 3.2.2 Dispose of materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS I PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as -Follows\; .1 Comply with the terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions of DIVISION I, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install WINDOWS and related items to complete Work indicated on Drawings, as specified herein, or both. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specified sleswhere, WHEN REQUIRED: .1 Caulking and Sealants: Section 07900. .2 Finish Hardware: Section 08701. .5 Glass and Glazing: Section 08850. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF DESIGN: 1.4~.1 Referenced Standards of the Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with provisions of Section 01000, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.4.2 Samples: Submit samples of materials to Owner for approval in accordance with provisions-of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Section 01000. Samples shall consist of full section of frame, complete with finish~ not less than six (6) inches long. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Pro]ected Aluminum Windows shall be series p800 conforming to AAMA P-A2-HP by PRO~ECT-O-LITE, Waxahachie~ Texas, or equal. 2.1.2 Metals: Framing members, transition members, mullions, adapters and flat panels: Extruded 6065-T5 aluminum alloys. 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 2 ~.~- I (continued) _ 2.1.5 Screws and miscellaneous fastening devices and internal components: Stainless steel, aluminum or other plated or corrosion resistant materials of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are used. 2.1.4 Glazing: Extruded snap-in type, minimum depth 3/4 inches. Glazing in accordance with provisions binder Galss and Glazing: Section 08850. 2.1.5 Finish: Exposed aluminum surface, including finish hardware: Color, PERMANODIC, Dark Bronze No. 28, satin finish. 2.1.6 Hardware: Ali locks, strikes, keepers, etc. to be Nickel Bronze US-25D Brush finish. 2.2 FABRICATION: 2.2.1 Fabricate frames of extruded aluminum sections providing for flush glazing on all sides with through sight lines and no projecting stops or faces. Insofar as possible ~it Work in shop. Provide system complete with fully resilient settings for glass. ? o o Finishings: Exposed surfaces of members: Finished free of _ scratches and other surface blemishes: Cleaned and finished as speci fled. .1 Where aluminum frames come in contact with dissimilar metal, masonry or concrete, keep aluminum from direct contact, with such parts by application of alkali resistant paint recommended for the finished aluminum. PART 5 EXECUTION 5. I INSTALLATION: 3.1.1 Set Work in correct locations as shown, level, square, plumb, and at proper elevation and in alignment with other work. 3.1.2 Anchor materials in place with concealed screws using backing, masonry plugs, or anchor straps as required. Set frames tightly against _ masonry or concrete in approved caulking in order to secure a watertight job. Final caulking of exposed joint between aluminum frames and masonry or concrete specified under Caulking and Sealants: Section 07900. - 5.1.3 Accurately cut and fit mouldings trim, where they are joined, to result in a tightly closed hairline joint. __ 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 5 5.2 PROTECTION: 5.2.1 Afetr erection, protect all exposed portions of storefront Work from contact with lime, plaster, mortar, concrete, cement, acid~ and other harmful substances as well as from damage by careless handling of tools, machinery and material. Use protection procedure as prescribed by manufacturer. 5.5 CLEAN-UP: - 5.5.1 Clean up all trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. ~.~ 5.~ Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 08701 FINISH HARDWARE 1 PART I GENERAL - 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section while not ail inclusive but listed as a guide is as follows: .1 Comply with the terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL -- REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish Finish hardware complete~ for installation under provisions included in Section 06220. .5 Items of finish hardware will include, but not necessarily be limited to the following: .1 Lock Sets. .... .2 Passage Sets. .5 Butt hinges for Doors. .4 Door Stops. .5 Panic Hardware with concealed rods. .6 Hardware Schedule. .7 Protect the Work of other Trades. .8 Clean-up. .9 Finish Hardware to be furnished as scheduled. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: 1.5.1 Carefully examine the Drawings and furnish hardware to conform with the hands, bevels, door thicknesses, swings, etc., to obtain perfect operation of all members. 1.5.2 Furnish four (4) copies of proposed schedule to he Owner for approval. Contractor must have written approval of hardware schedule from Owner prior to start of construction. 08701 FINISH HARDWARE 2 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING: -- 1.4.1 Ail hardware to be properly wrapped in separate packages, complete with all screws, parts, accessories, etc., for door openings_. and to be plainly labled. 1.4.2 Deliver hardware to the job site to be received, stored and installed under provisions included elsewhere. - 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS: 1.5.1 Products that are equal in substance~ appearance, and function to Russwin, Yale and Towns or Schlage will be acceptable if provided with identical functions and approved by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: _ 2.1.1 Provide schedule per Contract Documents ~or review and approval by Owner. Per Allowance. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION: _ 5.1.2 Hardware shall be installed under provisions included elsewhere. 5.1.5 Install hardware accurately fitted~ securely applied and carefully adjusted. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use care not to damage other work. 3.1.4 Provide and use proper equipment as required for proper installation. 3.1.5 When required~ remove and replace doors so that door top and bottom may be painted. ~.~ 1.6 Remove all visible hardware before painting is begun and replace afterwards, prior to completion o~ building. 5.2 CLEAN-UP: 3.2.1 Clean up all trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises~ streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. - 3.2.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations .... 08701 FINISH HARDWARE 5 PART 4 ALLOWANCE The Contractor shall allow the sum of $35,000.00 to purchase Finish Hardware as selected by the Architect. * * * 08765 THRESHOLDS~ WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEAL 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section while not ail inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install weatherstripping on all exterior entrance door frames and thresholds at sills of all exterior entrance doors, complete including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Samples of weatherstripping and thresholds. .2 Protection of the Work of other Trades. .5 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specified elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. .1 Carpentry Work: Division 6. o Moisture Protection' Division 7. .5 Doors: Division 8. 1.5 SAMPLES: 1.5.1 Submit 12 inch-long samples of each type of weatherstripping and threshold to the Owner for approval. 1.5.2 Weatherstripping and thresholds must be approved before shipment of materials to the Sob site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Head, and buttside: PEMKO No. 74B or approved equal spring bronze weatherstripping. 2.1.2 Sill: None. 2.1.5 Threshold: PEMKO ~200-5AV or equal. 2.1.4 Meeting side of pairs of doors: PEMKO #505 AV. 087&5 THRESHOLDS~ WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEAL 2 .... 2.1 (continued) 2.1.4 Caulking: As specified in Section 07900. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION: 5.1.1 Install weatherstripping at heads, jambs, and sills of exterior doors with fasteners of type and size as recommended and in strict accordance with approved manufacturer's recommendations. 5.1.2 Install thresholds in complete bed or caulking compound or approved mastic. Fasten each threshold with a minimum of five (5) anchors in a secure and substantial manner. 5.2 CLEAN-UP: 5.2.1 Clean Lip all trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section~ keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 3.2.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 08850 GLASS AND GLAZING 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, ia as follows: .1 Comply with the terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install glass and mirrors complete including bltt not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Glass and glazing materials. -- o Mirrors .3 Cleaning of glass and mirrors. .4 Protection of the Work of other trades. .5 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specified elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. .1 Carpentry Work: Division 6. .2 Moisture Protection: Division 7. .5 Doors, Windows and Glass: Division 8. .4 Toilet and Bath Accessories: Section 10800. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OP REGULATORY AGENCIES: 1.5.1 Local codes and ordinances. -- 1.3.2 Flat Glass Jobber's Association. 1.5.5 Applicable Commercial Standards and Federal Specofocations. 1.5.4 Consumer Product Safety Commission. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: .... 2.1.1 Glass: Shall conform to Federal Specification DD-G-451c, & CPSC 16CFR-1201 in accordance with their designated types and classifica- 08850 GLASS AND GLAZING 2 .1.1 (continued) tions as indicated on the Drawings and/or specified herein, and manufactured by any of the following: Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co. or Libby-Owens Ford. 2.1.2 Glass Types: .1 All interior glazing: 1/4" tempered plate. .2 Building Entrances: 1/4" tempered "SOLAR BRONZE". .5 Windows: 1/4" poi. plate, "SOLAR BRONZE". 2.1.3 Glazing Compound for Metal Surrounds: Federal Specifications TT-G-410. .1 Glazing Compound for aluminum units shall be aluminum colored, nonstaining, and of the type not requiring painting. .2 Resilient Setting Blocks, Shims, Clips, and Springs, Spacers, etc., required for setting units: in accordance with approved written instructions of glass manufacturer. .5 Anchors for Mirrors: Concealed type; stainless steel or chromium plated drive clips; minumum of two anchors per side. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 GENERAL: 3.1.1 Glass sizes shown are approximate. The sizes and proper edge clearances shall be determined by measuring the actual unit to receive the glass. 5.1.2 Clear sheet glass shall be cut and installed with the visible lines or waves running with the horizontal dimensions. 5.1.5 Moveable items shall be securely fixed and in a closed and locked position until putty or glazing compound has thoroughly set. OGSSO GLASS AND GLAZING 3.1.4 Operative units shall move freely and properly in the frame of the unit after glazing. 3.1.5 Labels shall not be removed until final approval is obtained. 3.1.6 Glass shall not be soaped, marked or taped in any manner. 5.2 PREPARATION: - 5.2.1 Protective coatings in glass rabbet areas of aluminum items shall be removed with a solvent that will not mar or etch the finish. 5.2.2 Rabbets and beads of factory-primed metal units shall be thoroughly cleaned but require no painting prior to glazing. 5.2.3 Check openings, before glazing to verify that the openings are square, plumb and in true planes. If found unsatisfactory, glazing shall not proceed until proper corrections have been made. 3.3 8LAZINS: 5.5.1~ Glaze openings., in conformance with the details and general conditions concerning glazing in the Flat Glass Jobbers Association -- Face puttying method illustrated and described in the Commercial Standard shall not be used. 5.4 PROTECTION: 5.4.1 After installation of Work included herein this Section, the protection of all glass and mirrors included in this Work shall be the sole responsibility of the sub-contractor for this Work. 3.4.2 Cracked, broken, and imperfect glass shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 3.5.1 Upon completion of the Work, glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, with labels, paint spots, putty and other defacements removed. .... 3.5.2 Clean tip trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 5.5.5 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. * * *. 08950 STOREFRONT SYSTEM 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section while not ali inclusive but listed as a guide , is as follows: .1 Comply with the terms of the CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions of DIVISION 1, SPECIAL PROVISIONS. .2 Furnish and install storefront, doors and related items to complete Work indicated on Drawings, as specified herein, or both, including but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 Glass framing, vertical and horizontal mullions; transition members connecting these components adapters and mountings for trim mouldings and facing materials. .2 Aluminum entrance doors, frames, sidelights and related items. .3 Finish hardware for entrance doors, except for cylinders, panic devices, & removeable mullions specified in 08701, Finish Harware. .4 Glass and glazing for items under this Section. .5 Weatherstripping for doors. .5 Not used. .4 Protection of the Work of other trades. - .5 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF DESIGN: 1.5.1 Design Conditions: Design store front to withstand a 20 psf wind -- load after glazing. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS: 1.4.1 Aluminum Storefront System. Asmanufactured by Kawneer, P.P. or Amarlite. .5 SUBMITTALS: 08950 STOREFRONT SYSTEM 2 1.5 (continued) _. 1.5.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for complete storefront system in accordance with the CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1, SPECIAL PROVISIONS. 1.5.2 Samples: Submit samples of materials to Architect for approval in accordance with Sections noted above. Samples shall consist of full section of frame, complete with finish, not less than six (6) inches long. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: o~. 1. 1 Types: Storefront (show window) frames: 1-5/4" ,",, 4-1/2" as shown on Drawings. ~.~ 1.~° Metals: Framing members, transition members,, mullions,, adapters and flat panels: Extruded 6065-T5 aluminum alloys. 2.1.5 Screws and miscellaneous fastening devices and internal components: Stainless steel, aluminum or other platmd or corrosion resistant materials of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are used .... 2.1.4 Glass Setting: Fully resilient settings by use of neoprene gaskets on both sides of glass. Glazing in accordance with provisions under Glass and Glazing: Section 08850. 2.1.5 Finish: Exposed aluminum surfaces, including finish hardware: Color, Dark Bronze, satin finish. 2.1.6 Glass as specified in Glass & Glazing: Section 08850. .2 FABRICATION: 2.2.1 Fabrication frames of extruded aluminum tubes and sections providing for flush glazing on all sides with through sight lines and no projecting stops or faces. Insofar as possible fit work in shop. Provide system complete with fully resilient settings for glass. 2.2.2 Door moldings shall be accurately fitted to flush hairline joints and mechanically fastened with screw-and-spline joinery at door corners and sub-frame intersections. o ? Finishing: Exposed surfaces of members: Finished free of scrat- ches and other surface blemishes: Cleaned and finished as specified. .1 Where aluminum frames came in contact with dissimilar metal, masonry 6r concrete, keep aluminum from direct contact with such parts o¥ application of alkali r~sistant, paint recommended for the finished aluminum. 08950 STOREFRONT SYSTEM PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION: 5.1.1 Set Work in correct locations as shown, level, square, plumb, and at proper elevation and in alignment with other work. 5.1.2 Anchor materials in place with concealed screws using backing, masonry plugs, or anchor straps as required. Set frames tightly against masonry or concrete in approved caulking in order to secure a water- tight job. Final caulking of exposed joint between aluminum frames and masonry or concrete specified under Caulking and Sealants: Section 07900. 5.1.5 Accurately cut and fit mouldings and they are joined, to result in a tightly closed hairline joint. 5.2 PRQTECTION: 5.2.1 After erection, protect all exposed portions of storefront Work from contact with lime, plaster, mortar, concrete, cement, acids and other harmful substances as well as from damage by careless handling of tools, machinery and material.Use protection procedure as prescribed by manufacturer. 5.5 CLEAN-UP: 5.5.1~ Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 5.5.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09170 'S T U C C 0 (]9260 G","P SUM DRYWALL 09310 CE'RAMiC 'FILE 09330 WOOD FLOORIi',.IG ('~'9340 'TERRA Z Z 0 r~-960() SF'OI--,'TS StJRFACING 0966() RESILIENT TILE FLOOR 09680 CARF'ET 09900 PAINTING 09170 STUCCO 1 PART I GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1. i. ! Work included in t. his Ser'ti-L~n, while not all inclusive but l~.sted as guide, is as follows: . i Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary and proper to complete all plaster and stucco as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. 1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: :~ 2.1 Do not applv st. ucco when the ambient t. emperature is 40 '~ ' · ~.~ eg~ e ~... :~ F or lower, or when a drop in temperature below 40 degrees F anticipated within 48 hours after applicat.:ion. I. 3 SCAFFOLDING: 1.3.1 Scaffolcling and equipment required for proper' execution c,f th:ks Work shall be so erected to limit as far as possible :i. nter-ference with or. her 'trades. 1.3.2 The sc:a~folding shall be removed as soon as the stucc:c) Work :i.s completed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. I MATERIALS: 2.1.2 Lath: Diamond mesh :3.4 Expanded copper bearing steel, painted: all-purpose type at soffits and self-furring tvpe at walls. 2. 1.3 Cement, Portland: ASTM C-150. 2.1.4 Exterior St. ucco Finish: ORIENTAL. Exterior Finish Stucco by' U.S. Gyp sum Company. 2.1.6 Lime Putty; Mix hydrated lime with water to form putty; allow to stand at least 15 minutes before using; protect from exposure to sun and .~rom exc:essive evaporation during storage. 09170 STUCCO 2 ..- 2. 1 (continued) 2.1.7 Nails for attaching ;tath over sheathing shall be large-head galvanized nails with an approved '¢urring evice that wi].l permit the -- -~ormation o-~ plaster keys not less than 1/4 inch between the lath and the sheathing. 2.1.8 Sand: [;lean, hard and -~ree ~rom loam, silt or other impuri't, ies., and shall be well graded .~rom ~:ine to coarse. 2. 1.9 Wa~er': C1 ean and ~r'ee ~rom injurous amour~ts o~ or~Tani c -. impuri ti es. 2. I. 10 Water' Repellant: Stearate or' creat, e o~ ammonium, sodium of calcium, or an approved commercially manu-¢actured product. 2. 1. 11 Corner Beads: Equal to MILCOR "Super-Ex", ~ga'~vanized. 2. 1. 12 Control Joints: MILC[]R No. 40, galvanized, depth as required. 2. 1. 13 Casing Beads: MILCOR No. 66 or' approved equal galvanized c~sinq bead. 2 1 14 Sealer: ~ "' . . -,er tical sur'-~aces to be sealed with F'RIME-A-PELL 200. 2.2 MIXES: ]~.]7. ! F'roportions by volume ~or scratch and brown coats: . 1 ! part Portland Cement. .2 3 parts Sand. .3 1/1() part hydrated lime putt,/. Note: When stucco is applied c)ver met. al lath. 1/5 bushel o.~: ha:ir or .¢iber per bag o~ cement shall be used in the scratch coat [)nlv. PART 3 EXECUTION .... 5. I PREPARATION OF SURFACES: 3. !. 1 Metal lath will be required where s(uc'.co is applied over sheathing. Metal. lath will not be required where stucco is applied to masonry except ~or leveling 'bhe surface. 3. 1.2 Concrete and masonr'y sur.~aces shall be tested ~:or proper aiiqnment, out o-~ level or irregular shall be covered w:i. th metal lath. using metal -~urring as necessary to pr[)duce a regular, straight, plumb ._. and level ~inish with stucco not over 7/8 inch thick as specie:led hereinafter. 09170 STUCCO 3. 1 (continued) 3.1.13 Concrete surfaces shall be dampened to eliminate excessive suction and permit proper application o,~ stucco. In addition, concrete sur-~aces shall be roughened with chisels and hatchets to provide a good mechanical key. 3.1.4 Surfaces to receive stucco shall be clean, ~ree ~rom ~rc.~st., loose particles, dust. dirt. oil, soot, e~¥1orescent, grease, oil , acid and other ~oreign matter that might inter'~ere with a satisfactory bond. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL LATH: 3.2.1 Metal lath shall be applied straight, wit. hour. buc:kles, and w:i. th joints staggered. Metal lath shall, be applied with the longer ..... nd laps shall be not less than i :i. ncln and dimen~ions acro. ss supports, c shall be tied at intervals not exceeding 6 inches. .1 On wood supports and sheathing: Metal lat. h applied to? wood supports and sheathing shaI1 be secured with nails or staples. Nails or staples shall be driven through ~urring sleeves so as provide a ~ull and continuous 1/4 inch thickness o-f stucco at back oT reinforcement. Nails or staples shall be spaced not over 6 inches on centers along each support. Where sheets o~ metal lath are lapped, nails or staples shall be driven to hold the lapped edges. Where wood supports adjoin masonry or concrete in the same plane, rein-~orcement shall over-lap masonry or c:oncrete at. least 16 inches. .2 Over metal lintels and ¥1ashings: Metal lath over metal lintel, s to be covered by stucco shall be extended vertical. Iv over t. he angles to a height oT not less than 6 inches and horizontally across the underside o.~ the lintels and shall be secured in an approved manner. Metal lath over metal ~:lashings to be cc)vered by stucco shall, lap the ~lashings no~ less t. han 2 inches and sha].i be extended vertically ~or a height o~ not less than 6 inches. 3.2.2 Installation oT comer beads, e;:pansion joints and casing beads: Accessories shall be set level and plumb to straigh'~ lines. Fastenings shall be spaced not over 12 inches on center Tot single ~:langes and not over 24 inches on centers for clouble ~langed accessories. Miter or cope a.t corners. 3.3 MIXING PLASTER AND/OR STUCCO: 3.3.1 Cement. and aggregat, e for each batch shall be accurately measured and mixed dry until evenly distributed and until the mass is uni.~orm in color. Frozen, caked or lumpy materials shall not be used. Batches shall be of a size that can be entirely used within 1/2 hour. Mechani- cai mixer's o~ an approved type, except where hand mixing of small batches is approved, shall be used -~or the mixing o-~ stucc:o. Mixers, mixing boxes and tools shall be cleaned and kept. ~ree ~ stucco from previous mixes. Water shall be maintained at a minimum. c29_~ZC2 ............................. S_.TU_e_~__C]. ..... 4_ ....................................... 3.3. 1 (continued) Mixing shall be continued until plasticity :is c~btained. Co:lored mortar shall be mixed -to produce a uniform color throughout in the ~:inished Work. Mortar that. has be(Jun to set shall not be used. Re-t. emperin~ will not be permitted. .......... : A water repellent shall be added to the ~inish coat. :[~ in powder ~orm, the water repellent shall be well mixed clr]~ with the cementing materials. I~ in ].iquid or paste ~orm, the repe].lent sha].l be aclded to, and mixed wit. h, ~he mixing water. The quantity/ o~ compound -- used shall provide 0.2 pound o-~ ~atty acid ~or each 1()0 pounds cement in he ~inish coat. 3.4 APPLICATION OF STUCCO: t:he stucco shall be in place, plumb, straight~ and true prior to he, inn:lng the stucco Work. .~ Metal lath shall be in place and pos:L~''' .... ' t.o provide a kev at back o~ reinforcement. Where reinforcing is app].ied over sheet metal, the sheet metal shall be given a heav,/ coat. c)f bi'[umeiqoL.Jr pairit. . ~ Masonry sLur'faces to r-ec:eive st. ucc(] shall be evenly L,'~m? ................ with a fog spray immediat, ely prior to application o.[ stuc:cc].. .4 Edges to be joined shall be dampened s].:L(~lht!y to produce a smooth con~: 1Llenc:e. .5 Stucc:c~ coats shall be applied con{inu~]usl'y in one general direct, ion, w:Lthout allowing mortar tc~ city at eclges. Where it. :Ls impossible to work the -fLJl[ dimensions o~: a waZ]. SLl~'fac:e :i.n a cont. inuous operation, .joint:lng shall lie made at a break, or other natural division of 'the surface. .6 All corners shall have corner beads. Casing beads shall be instal led where stucco abutts other material . ~.4.~ APPLICATION: Stucco, unless other indi(:at, ed , shall be ~:~(,' · ~---'-," ~ork not less than 5,"4 inch thick as ~ol:Lows: . i Scratch coat: Shall be approximately 1/4 inch thick over the reinforcement and shall be applied under suf¥:[cient pressure to ¥orm good keys and to cc]mp].ete].y embed the rein-forcement. Be'fore the scratch coa~ has set, it shall be well-cross~-scrat-"--',"L,.e~l '~,.o -- provide a strong bond. The scratch coat and brown coat. shall be appl:LL,~ together. 0917A STUCCO 5 3.4 (continued) .2 Brown Coat: Shall be approximately I/4 inch thick. ]-he scrat, ch coat shall, be dampened evenly with a Cog spray to obtain uniform suction before the brown coat is app:/ied. The brown coat shall be applied to the scratch coat with sufficient pressure to force the st..ucco ~.nto the scratches and shall be brought t(_-; a plumb, tr'ue, even surface, but le-¢t rough in texture. When set su~-t:iciently, -[he bt'own coa'b shal:t be prevented by spr'a~ing or by other approved method. The int:erval between the application o.z the brown coat and o-.~ the .~inish coat shall be at least. 7 day's o~ dry weat'.her. .3 Finish Coat.: Shall be approximately 1/4 inch thick. []olored cement ~inish sba:t1 con~orm to approved samp:.'es and shai:l be applied and damp-cured strictly in accordance with the mar;u-~ac'~u- rer*s directions. Addition.al dampening at t.:ime o~ appl:~c:ation shall be by -~og-spraying. Dampening bv brush wi].l not be permit.- ted. Finish shall matrh the approved samples .~of color' and rex ture. 3.5.1 As soon as the fin:ished coat has t. aken it*s in:itial set, 'tine stucco shall be protected against direct rays o'~ the sun or r'apid dr'y::r;g for at least. 6 days. During t.h'i.s t. ime, stuc:co shal:/ be kept moist by frequent fog-spraying. 3.5.2 Care shall be taken to prevent staining stucc:o. 3.6 CLEANING AND REPAIRING: 3.6. i Stucco w:L'Eh (]rar.:ks, biisters, p:Lts, checks, color streaks, or discolorations shall be clean and sound a~ter all other related Work has been rompleted and pa:inting and repairing oT dama~.:;ed portions be per-Eor'med in an ac¢:eptable manner. 3.6.2 F'ainting and repaii~s shall match e;-,' :b st i ng stucco in 'f:.ex'tiure anti col or. 3.7 CLEAN-UP: 3.7.~, Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work o4: this c,=.,:~ecti.,,3n, keeping premises, streets: sidewalks, and adjacen'b property neat and clean at all times. :3.7, .~ Dispose o~ accumulated trash in a manner and at a Iocat:i. on satisi:actory to hte local authorities. 09260 GYPSUM DRYWALL 1 PART i GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1. 1.1 Work included in this Sect. ion, while not ali inr'lusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: . 1 Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT ~ , '- ] I ' vi "- I - ~ and related provisions in DIVISION 1 GENERAL. .2 Furnish labor., materials and equipment necessary, rand propmr ~'~,.,~ complete drywall Work indicated on Drawings and s~eci-~ied In~_r .... ~n. . i Interior suspended ceiling. '~ .... z~ g ~ r i n CI s. {5 o I L~ ~II Fi · ~ A]. I other' c~ypsuf~l board parti ti on ........ fl.lrr'i['lg~ gl-ld ~inish indicat, ed on Drawings. .3 C ! e a n - u p. 1.2 RELATED WORK: !.2. i Related Work specified elsewhere WHEN F!EQUII~ED: . ! Framing: Section 06101. .2 Caulking and Sealants: Section 07900. .3 F'ainting: Section 09900. PART~ o F'RODUCTS ~.° 1 MATERIALS: 2. 1. 1 All materials shall be as manufactured bu U.S. Gypsum. Eoual materials manufactured by National Gypsum, Kaiser Gypsum or Celot. ex ma,? be furnished. 2.1.2 All materials shall conform to the Drawings in respect to thickness, -~:ire rating and application. 2.2 FRAMING: ~..~.1 Exterior walls: Metal studs and runner tracks shall be 18 roll-formed galvanized steel. Not used. z...z..~. Interior Pertitions: Metal studs and runner tr'acks shall be guage roll-formed galvanized steel. 2.2.3 Ceiling Suspension Main Runners shall be~-1/2" steel =.nan~'~ .... ().475 lb. per ft. cold-rolled. 09260 GYPSUM DRYWALL 2 '~=..-~ ~continued) · .-.~.4 Fur'rinci._ channels shall be 25 guage, -~/c~,,,,~ hat _.~.ut. ic~ns. 2.2.5 Hanger wire shall be ASTM A641, so-~t~ el. ass 1 ga].vanized, pre- stret, ched, sized in accordance with GA-203. 2.3 ACCESSORIES: 2.3. 1 (]orner beads shall be equal to USG Dur-A-Bead. 2.3.2 Casing trim shall be equal to USG No. 200-A Metal 'Trim. 2.3.3 Anchora~ge -~or stud.s to runners or -~or studs to s~-uds..... '--~'~,,a~"i be 3/8" type "S" pan-head screws, and for gypsum board to studs or channels shall be 1-1/-4" type "S" o~ .... S-12" bugle-head screws.. 2.4 WALL BOARD: .~:.'~. 4. 1 Wal I board at Ceramic Ti ~.,. e shal I be "SHEETROCK W/R ,~:~'"=:~=~'".~.,-,,_,...(.~c_"~¥'~"'- 5/8" thic~.- 2.4.3 Per~orated tape, .jo:~nt compound and -~:inishinc~. ~..,..mpo,_,nu~ " -' shall 10e as manu.factured by USG or National Gypsum. 2.4.4 Adhesive, USG Durabond. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION: 3. i. ! F'osit. ion hat sections at 16" centers, securing at. ali jambs, ~,,.er...e_~.o,~_, corners and o~her similar conditions with wire 'lz'~es. 3. ~ o y :~.,=~.~ and .... Appl wall b~3ar'd hor'izontal with head joints ~'~ ...... cle~ ..... ' centered on 'Framing. Power screw wall board at 12" o.c. at edges and 8" o.c:. in t. he -field. 3. 1.3 J~oint compound shall be mixed in stric:t accordance with manu~:ac- turer's instructions and sha].l be applied over joint in a un~.~ormly t. hin layer approximately 4" wide. Center tape to Torm secure bond. 3.!.4 Apply ~irst topping coat over dry joint a~t. er expiration o-f 24 hours or more. Tape sha]L1 be completely covered and ~oppin~; ~.~tnered out t.o 3" or more on each side. .3.1.5 ATter ~irst topping coat is completely dry/, apply second coat ~eather'ed out to 3" or more on each side. (')926(1) GYPSUM DRYWALL 3. 1 (continued) :-'-'..~,.6 ourew head dimples shall be covered with three .,~'3) coats, with · first coat joint compound: second coat joint or topping compound~ and third roar topping compound. Each roar shall be feathered out preceedinc;. 3. 1.7 All i ns'~de corners and the flanges of m~ll c:or'ner beads shall be covered with three (3) coats o-F compound, feathering out to 9" or more fr'om bead to corner. 3.1.8 Completed Work shall be smooth and uniform, read,/ for application of finish. CLEAN-UP: 3.2.1 Clean up al) trash and debris caused by the Work of this. Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks anti adiacent, pr'ope.rt:v neat and clean a't a].l 'times. 3..~.~-' Di~-.~po.~e.-'-~ of such materials outside 'the Ii:nits of the p r- n -;_ ..] ,= ,_ *,.. s~-,~' ~..~.. at approved locations. 0931© CERAMIC TILE 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: !. 1. 1 Work included in 'this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows. · 1 Comply with the terms of 'the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAl_ REQU I REMENTS. .2 Furnish and install ceramic tile indirated on the Drawinos to be appl. ied bv the "Thin-set" method. Inrlude all shapes as required for caps, cove bases, etc. .4 Leveling coats as required for walls. .5 Installation of inserts and accessories, etoc., furnished by other trades. · 6 Samp i es. .7 Cleaning of all Work included in this Section. 8. Protection of the Work of other trades during installation of this Work. · 9 C] can-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specified elsewhere when rec.]uired. · 1 Concrete: Section 0~300 .2 Concrete Masonry Units: Section 04220 · 3 Gypsum Drywall: Section 09260 .4 Toilet & Bath Accessories: Section 10800 1.3 REGULATORY AGENCIES: 1.3. i American National Standards Institute, ANSI]· 1.3.2 U.S. Dept. of Commerce 1.3.3 Federal Specifications A9.310 CERAM I C T I LE 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Submit samples of eac. h material proposed for use on the pro.-ject for approval and for color selection. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING: 1.5. i Deliver t. ile in original, unbroken containers with labels intact. Keep containers dry until tiles are removed and checked. Guard against staining t. ile prior to setting. PART~ o PRODUCTS 2. 1 CERAMIC TILE: 1 Meet or exceed STANDARD GRADE reclui~ ._.ment.= of U.S.b~..~.~... " Commerce SPR-R61 and Federal Spec. SS-1-308b. i Wall Tile: o.,azed, 4-1/-4 x 4-1/4. cushion edge~ by Dallas Ceramic or equal, set vertically. ..~ Floor Ti!e: Ceramic Mosaic, 2 x 2, by Dallas Ceramic equal. .3 Base: Cove type to match wall[ tile. .4 Trim: As required for contours of room. Internal vertical corners shall be square, external corners shall be bullnosed. Trim pieces to match type and pattern of wall tile. THIN-SET MORTAR: I Organic_ adhesive: Comply with ANSI spec for c~r'ganic ~,..h. ....... ye, A136. I - 1967. ..~.° Water: City, tap water. .4 Grouts: Hydroment by UPCO, color as selected. .5 Wall sealer: as recommended by manufacturer c).~~ appro,~'ed adhesi ve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 PREPARATION: 3.1.1 Examine surfaces to r'eceive tile including inserts and ..... --'~-~- ies. Surfaces shall be dry, clean, , and shall be firm, level and plumb. 09310 CERAMIC TILE 3 3. 1 (continued) 3.1.2 Surfaces shall be made level and smooth wit. hin a tolerance of 1/4" in 10 feet or no more than 1/16 inch per foot before commencing to lay tile. Notify General Contractor of discrepencies. Starting of Work shall indicate acceptance of floor conditions. · 3. i.3 Do not perform Work unless ambient temperature of area in which Work occurs is at least 40 degrees F. ~ and rising. 3.2 INSTALLATION: ~3.2.1 Installation shall meet the requirements o~ the current. American National Standards Institute Specifications for installation of ceramic tile with Organic Adhesive, ANSI A801.4 and Conventional Se't, ANSI A 108.2. . 1 Layout. wor'k on vert. ical surfaces, where possible, in order that no tile is less than half full size shall occur. .2 For heights stated in Teet and inches~ unless tile work is intended to exactly fill vertical spaces, courses shall be maintained full to produce nearest attainable height, with:~n a variation above or below equivilant to less than one half course to ,avoid cutt:ing of t. iles which would otherwise be necessary. 3.3 PROTECTION: 3.3.1 Immediately upon completion ancl as direc:ted, t. ile shall be t. horoughlv cleaned with clear water and soap powder and rec].eaned and pointing touched up if necessary just prior to complet.:i, on of the building. The use o~ acid is not permitted. 3.3.2 Protect Work from damage of an,/ kind until the completion of the building contract and remove and replace any loose, chipped or otherwise defective tile. 3.4 CLEAN-UP: 3.4.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of t. his Sect. ion~ keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 3.4.°.~. Dispose of such mat. erials outside the limits o~ the p~ .... c~..~s='-~',_,_ site at approved locations. 093.3¢~ WOOD FLOORING 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1. 1.~' WorL.'... included in this Section, while not al'~.~ inclusive "'ut," listed as a guide is as follows. . 1 Comply with terms o~ the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTI~AC-I- and related provisions id DIVISION 1, GENERAl_ REQLIIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install flooring in locations indicated on the drawl ngs. .3 Leveling coats as rec!uired for floors. .4 Sampl ess. .5 Cleaning o'¢ all Work includecl in this Sect.:kon. .6 Protect. ion of Work o-f other trades during installation of this ~l O r k . .7 C1 ean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified elsewhere when required. 1.3 REGULATORY AGENCIES: !.3. ~ American F'arqL~et Asseciation~ InE. Z.3.2 U.S. Depar"Ement e'¢ Commerce 1.3.3 Federal Spec:i~ications t. 4 SUBMITTALS: t.4. t SLtbmit samples o~ each material proposed ~(]~ L~Se OR the project. for approval and for color selectSens. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING: .~. 1 Deliver ~leoring in original, unbroken containers with I .... e.[s intact. Keep containers dry Ltnt$1 ~].ooring is removed and checked. Guard acjainst staining prier' to setting. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. I WOOD FLOORING: 1 Standard pattern, factory-f:~nished, 6"x 6"x 5/:[z'' ton[:~ue ~' groove.natural & better, oak, as manufac:tured by' Peace Flooring Co., Magnolia, Arkansas. 0~550 WOOD FLOORING 1 2.2 ADHESIVE: .1 Manufacturers reccommended parquet adhesive. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 PREPARATION: 5.1.1 Examine surfaces to receive flooring, including inserts and accessories. Surfaces shall be dry, clean, free of oil or waxy films and shall be firm, level and plumb. 5.1.2 Surfaces shall be made level and smooth within a tolerance of 1/4" in 10 feet nor more than 1/16 inch per foot before commencing to lay flooring. Notify General Contractor of discrepencies. Starting of Work shall indicate acceptance of floor conditions. 5.1.5 Do not perform Work unless ambient temperature of area in which Work occurs is at least 40 degrees F., and rising. 5.2 INSTALLATION: 5.2.1 Installation shall meet the requirements of the current American Parquet Association, Inc. for installing parquet flooring over concrete sub-floors. 5.5 PROTECTION: 5.5.1 Immediately upon completion and as directed, flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned and waxed. Cleaning and rewaxing will be required just prior to completion of the building. 5.5.2 Protect Work from damage of any kind until the completion of the building contract and remove and replace any loose, chopped or other- wise defective flooring. 5.4 CLEAN-UP: 5.4.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at ali times. 5.4.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. * * * 09540 TERRAZZO I PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1. i. 1 Work in(cluded in this Sertion, ~Jl~:ile not ali. inclusive but listed as guide, is as follows: · 1 Comply with the terms of the CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION I~ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install F'olyacrylate modif:[ecl Terrazzo floorin~ complete, including but not necessarily limited to the following: . i Polyacrylate Modified Terrazzo. .~: Divider's, stops, control joints, anchorages, etc. .3 Cleaning &protect. ing Terrazzo .4 Protecting the work of o~her trades· .5 C1 ean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: !·2·1 Related work specified elsewhere· .1 Furnishing and sett:[ng floor drains. DIVISION 15. .2 Concrete Subfloor, Section ()3310. .3 9emporar¥ heat, water' and electricity. Section 1000. 1.3 REGULATORY AGENCIES !.3. i National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association - NTMA 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4. 1 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings for layout of divider strips, control joint strips and border strips if required. I. 4..~ Sampl es: .1 SLIbmit two (2) samples minimum 6 inclnes x 6 inches for each color and type of terrazzo. .2 Submit two (2) 6 inch length of each type and I-::ind of divider strip and/or control joint strip. 09~4o TERRAZZO 2 -- 1.4 (c~nti hued) 1.4.3 Maintenance Literature: .l Submit two (2) copies o.f N.-F.M.A. maintenance r-ecommendatic;ns. 1.4.4 Certi ,~ication: .1 Suppliers: shal;L ~urnish rerti~:Lcation attesting that materials meet specification requirements. .2 Suppl :i ers shal 1 ~urni sh complete instructions ~:or ar',y precautiions or special, handling o.f materials in order to comply with the Occupati(~nal Safety and Health Act. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING 1 5.1 Delivery o,· Material,=- Deliver mater:ials in a manner ~.(::) ~ ........... damage to cor'..tainers and/or bag~. ---- 1.5.2 St. orag~ o-F Materials: Store materials :in a c:~ean dr',.; loc:atior'~ -furn±shed b',? the General Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. i MATERTALS: 2. 1. 1 Polyacry:late: Formulated t.o meet require:~ient ,,3~ MIL-D-:'-'-';!34F Z.c,'.r binder materiaZ. 2. 1.2 Marble Chips: 2. 1.3 Strips: .l Divider and Stop Strips: !/8 inch white alloy o.~ zinc. .2 Contrail Joint "T" Strip: 16 guage white alloy o'f: zinc w:~'th 1/4 inch white neoprene ~or' a 1/4 inch topping. .:3 Anchoring Devire: Configuration ~r' attachment shall provide ¥or secure system o~ anchoring all strips in ~loor. 2.1.4 Colorants: Alkali-resistant non-~ading color pigments. ~-.I.5 Terrazzo Cleaner & Sealer. 2. 1.6 Polyacrylate Terrazzo per N.T.M.A. 09540 TERRAZZO 5 o o MIXES ~..-..1 Terrazzo selection to be made from standard color from localy ._ available chips. PART 3 EXECUTION '-' .3 . 1 INSPECT I ON 3. 1. i Examine areas to receive terrazzo for: .1 Defects in existing work that affect proper execution of terrazzo work. ...-- Deviations beyond allowable toleranc:es for the concrete slab wot I.::. 5.2 INSTALLATION: · -...~.. 1 Subf 1 oor: .1 Instal] stop and divider strips .2 Install[ expansion strips precisely above e;.,'pans:ion joints· .3 Thoroughly clean and prepare concrete sub~:loor in accordance with suppliers instructions. .... --'.~ F'lacing Terrazzo: · I F'lace terrazzo mixture and trowel to level surface. .2 Seed trowelled surface with additional chips in same proportions as contained in terrazzo mix and trowel. 3·2·3 Curing: .1 After completing placement of terrazzo, cure in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 5.2.4 Finishing: · I Rough Grinding: .! Grind with 24 or finer gr:it stones or with comparable diamond plates. .1 Follow initial grind with 80 or finer g. rit stones. 09340 TERRAZZO 4 3.~''~. 4 (continued~, · -.- Grout ing: . 1 Cleanse floor with clean water and rinse t.horou;4h!y. - .~° Remove excess rinse water and machine or hand c~p~,~y- ~ grout using iden{ical portland cement, color and pigments as used in topping taking care to fill all voids completely. .3 Fine Grinding: .1 Grind with 80 or finer grit stones until all grout is removed from surface. 3.03.D.4.a 120 grit stones may be used and will leave floor' smoother but initially ~loor may show "polish or swirl" marks which disappear rapidly with use. . .~ Upon compl eti on terrazzo shal I show a mi ni mum o.E: -7n¥, ._-,. to ....... /,_~/. of marble chips. ' .... ~.5 Cleaning and Sealing: .! Thoroughly wash all surfaces with a neutral cleaner a~ter the grinding. .2 Rinse with clean water and allow sur'~ace to) dry thoroughly. .3 Apply sealer in accordance with manuTacturer~s directions. 3.2.6 F'rotection: Upon completion the Work shall be read,..,, ~:or final inspection and acceptance by the owner or his agent. The General Contractor shall protect the finished ~lo~r from the time that the Terrazzo Contractor completes the work and requests final inspect, ion. 3.3 CLEAN-UP: 3.3.1 Clean-up trash and debris caused by the Work tof this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property clean armd neat at all times. .~ Disoose. oT such materials outside the limits of the pr'oj=-~=~. si~',..e at approved locations. 09550 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Sect:ion while not al:': :inclusive but listed as a C..luide, :is as follows: · I Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install acoustical ceiling systems Work and related items to complete Work indicated on Drawings, as speci-i:ied herein, or both. .3 Veri~y all measurements and dimensions at job site and coordinate and schedule Work with the Work of others a'i:~ected, with part. icular at. tention given to Mechanical and Electrical Work. .4 Unsatisfactory conditions or de~ects detrimental to proper installation o-~ Work included in this Section o~ the Speci.~ica- tions: recti-~ied before commencement of Work specified herein. .5 Protection o~ the Work o~ other trades. .6 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related work specified elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. . 1 Steel Joists: Section .2 Gypsum Drywall: Section 09260. 1. .3 Electrical: Division 16. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF CEILING SYSTEM: 1.3. I Ceiling system shall be 24 inches x 48 inches and 24 :inch x 24 inch exposed steel grid suspension system with lay-in acoustical units as selected by the Owner. Location as shown on plans. 1.3.2 System shall support ceiling assembly shown, or specified herein, with maximum deflection o~ 1/270 of the span. 09530 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 2 1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: 1.4.1 Acoustical Work: Performed according to the CODE OF PRACTICES FOR ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM INSTALLATION as prepared by the NACA and SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE AND LAY-IN PANEL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS as prepared by the ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS ASSOCIATION. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS: 1.5.! Acoustical Products: As manufactured by Armstrong Cork Co., or products of equal substance and function as approved by the Owner. 1.5.2 Acoustical suspension systems: As manufactured by Eastern ?roducts Corp., Arms'~rong Cork Company, Bonn Products, !nc., products of equal substance and function ass approved by the Owner. .1 System shall permit the installation of recessed lighting · ~ixtures upon the flanges of the system. Universal splices or other types however ingeniously devised, whose use wc~ulci obs-truct 'the passage o-~ recessed lighting fixtures through the grid openings, or make untenable their' reposition upon 'the flanges the beams, may not be used. 1.6 SUBMITTALS: 1.6.1 Submit representative samples of all component, par'ks of acoustical ceilings and o.~ the mechanical suspension systems, anchors and clips, and of all other materials as requested in accordance with orovisions of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Section 01()00. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: 1.7.1 Unless ot. herwise approved by Architect, do not. start installation of acoustical treatment until exterior openings have been ~lazed in and wet Work, such as concrete, cement finish and plaster is completed and has dried. 1.7.2 A uniform temperature of not less than 6(i) degrees F., shall be maintained immediatel, y before, during and after installation of acoustical tile and acoustical reiling board. 1.7.3 Each area must be broom clean before installation of acoustical materi al s. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Acoustical Ceiling Unit. s shall conform to FS SS-S-I!8a (GSA-FFS). · 1 Type 1 FINISH - White vinyl latex paint. .2 Type 2 FINISH - White scrubble vinyl plastic. 09550 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 2. 1. 1 (continued) .5 Lay-in ceiling units shall be 24 ~inches x 48 inches x 5/8 inch. .4 TECTUM, 24"x 48"x 1" thirk, square edge. 2.1.2 Exposed Grid Suspensic~n Systems: . 1 Suspension systems shall be exposed Grid T System as approved by the Owner. .2 Suspension systems shall be complete with ma:in 'T"s, c:ross 'T"~s, perimeter- wall moldings, hold down clips, and accessories for a complete system. T:'s shall be double web desi,.3n. .3 Exposed members shall have a matt wh:i;e .,~inish on 'the room ss i d e. .4 Hanger wires for T:s shall be 12 gage soft steel galvan:ized wire. .5 Hanger wires for main runners shall be ga;lvanized. 2.1.3 Runner Channels shall be 1-1/2 inch hot-rolled steel with coat of rust :inhibiting paint. Channel flanges at least 7/16 inches wide; minimum weight 1,260 lbs. per 1.,(')00 linear feet. 5. i INSTALLATION: 3. 1. I General: .1 Recessed ;ighting fixtures shall be supported by tl'"[~ Metal Suspension System by reposing on the flanges of the inverted Tee members. Do not hang ceiling hangers from corrugated metal dec:k for roof deck system. .2 Lighting fixtures or suspension systems shall not be suspended from or supported by air--conditioning or other type ductwork, or piping intended for any purpose or steel deck. 3. i.2 Suspension Systems: .i Suspend, space, level and attach main T~s at 4~-0" on centers. Hanging wires for the suspension system shall be spaced so as to provide the maximum support for lighting fixtures. .2 The modular spacing o~ wires at 4'-0X~ on centers along with Main Tee Beam: arrange so as to occur on or within six (6) inches of eac:h corner o~ each 4~-0" x 4~--()" module. Attachment: made to Main T's, not the lighting fixture. .3 Install hanger wires at 48 inches on center to true lines in either" direction unless otherwise indicated or approved. 09530 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 4 3. 1.2 (continued) .4 Steel Construction: Securely att. ach hanger wires tn steel joists, or to structural members three (3) turns and then three (3) full twists around itself. - ,ur,..he~ apart ~..,.~n 5 Suspend from runner channels spaced not · ~ ~ '~--. 4~'- 0" on centers where steel joists or steel beams are spaced more than 4'-0" on centers, or where sheet metal ducts over 4~-0" wide , ,-4.~, inches in occur. Install hanger wires not over fortv-eight ~ either direction from runner channels. .6 Secure lower ends of hanger wires to Main T~s by three (3) twists around itself. 3. 1.3 Where steel ._~oi=t=.~-.~ or steel beams are spaced more than 4?-,_,''~" on ~-r~n-t .... wher~ sheet metal ducts over 4~-(]" ............. , .... ~ or othero,.~:~u,~'-~ ...... uc.~,..].' ohs oc:c:ur, instal 1 r'unner channel ~ spaced 4~ -0 '~ on centers hl.!ng ~ r'oiTi str'L~[]-- tu.l'-e above with hangers same as spec:i~ied in subparagraphs .2 and .:Z -'- ab(r~ . Insta].l hanger wires nat more than _." :,'e . _- apart and at ends of rL.unner channe].s. Size o~ rLJnner channe]Ls and hanqers_ .... =~ ..... ~ ] conform to runner' sch,_(.luze at end of {his Sect:Lc)n. :3. ~.4 Space main 'T"s 4'.-0" on centers for '2~ x 4' grid and grid. Join c:ross T's to main -r's with a positive interlock. At perime-- ter areas, columns, et.c., secure angle maldinq to ver'ti(zal surfaces. Rest T's on angle moldings at wa~ls columns, etc. Tabs o~ cr~ss shall remain unbent. Fasten inverted main T to upr'ight leg of wall mo].ding. Do not lap exposed ~lange o~: any member o~ the system. 3. 1.5 T-Sections shall be straight in all:Lgnment, arid exposecl surfaces flush and level. Pat~ ~ ,.[.rn shall conform to Drawings. · 3.1.6 Do not cut T's ~or light -fixtures. 3. 1.7 Acoustical. LJnits: . 1 Inst. all acoust:L(:al units in stri(:t ac:cord with the manufacturer ,s recommendations. .2 Install acoustical units in rect. angular or square pattern, as shown, parallel to adjacent walls. Align joints in both di recti ans. 09550 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 5 3.2 CLEAN-UP 3.2.1 Clean up t. rash and debris caused by 'the Work of 'this Section, keeping premises, sidewalks, streets and adjacent propert_y neat and clean at all times. 3.2.2 Disp,~se of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 0960C) SPORTS SURFACING 1 PART I GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1. I. i Work inc]/uded in this Section while not all inc]lusi,Je but Ii'-~_~.~.~u as a guide, is as follows: . i Comply with the terms o~ the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION1, GENERAL REQU I REMENTS. .2 F'urnish and install sports surfacing comp]Let, e, :Lnc:lucling but not necessarily limited to the following: . 1 Flooring material. .2 Markings. .3 F'reparation of substrates. .4 Primers and coatings. .5 Accessori es. .6 Protecting the Work of other Tracles. .7 C1 ean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Specified Elsewhere. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: 1.3. i Samples: . 1 Submit samples o~ material proposed ~or use on the project Architect for approval and for color selections. .2 Submit court marking layout for approval. .3 Obtain Architect's written approval of samples, .color selection, and court marking layout prior to delivery of material to job site. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: i..4. i Comply witln manufacturers requirements concerning stage of completion, temperature, traffic, power and HVAC, etc. 09600 SPORTS SURFACING 2 1.4 (,,:onti hued) 1.4.2 Maintain adequate vent. ilation to remove moisture and volatile fumes. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING: 1.5.1 Deliver materials to the project=~te in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with the manufacturer's brand name clearly marked thereon. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS: 1.6.1 Complete installation to be performed by manufacturer's approved installer only. 1.6.2 Installer to submit list of five (5) installations of prc~duct.. 1.6.3 Products of equal substance and function may be substituted with approval of Owner. I. 7 GUARANTEES: 1.7.1 Surfacing to be jointly war'r'anteed by installer and manufacturer, materials and workmanship, for one (1) year from date of acceptance of building by Owner. I. 8 ALTERNATES: 1.8.1 Woocl flooring: "THRUST-A-F'AD SLEEPER SYSTEM" by Hormer, 25/32 inch maple flooring, second or better grade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. i Materials: 2. 1. 1 Gymnasium flooring: "WOOD-LOCK" by Connor Forest Industries, Inc.., ~. ~:.= inch maple flooring, second or better gracle, sh'-¢~so; ,.. . 2.1.2 Weight room flooring: "GYMTILE" by Pawling Rubber Corporation, Pawling, New York. 2.1.3 Court Marking: Standard color range, selection by Architect. Submit court marking layout. 2.1.4 Coatings: as approved by the manufacturer. PART 5 EXECUTION 3. I PREPARATION: 3.1.1 Surfaces to receive the flooring shall be swept clean and shall be free from moisture, paint, oil, wax.. or other film which may affect the aclhesion. 09600 SPORTS SURFACING 5 3.1.2 No curing agents shall be used on the concrete slab in the area · that the sports surfacing is to be applied. 3.1.3 Concrete subfloor shall, be checked and repaired as required prior to installation. Cracks, rough areas, .'ioints, ancl other surface defects in the concrete subfloors sha].l be fi.l. led with a material recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Riclges, trowel marks, and other surface project_ions shall be ground smooth. 3.1.4 Mo:isture content of t. he slab be cherked per' flooring manufacturer'~s recommendations. If slab moisture content is not acceptable, corrective measures shall be taken. 3.1.5 Starting of Work in any area shall constitute acceptance of subfloor in that area. 3.2 INSTALLATION: 3.2.! Installation shall be deferred until alii tother work that nit-iht cause damage to 'the flooring has been completed. 3.2.2 Installation shall be as per manufarturer:s .~ecommendations, by manufacturer approved installer. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING FLOORING: 3.3.1 Upon completion of floor:i, ng, clean and protect sports surfar:kng per manufacturers recommendations. 3.3.2 Immediat_ely prior to final inspection, clean and dress flooring oer' manufacturers recommendations. 3.4 CLEAN-UP. 5.4.1 Clean up 'trash and debris causecl by t. he Work o~ this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and (clean at all times. 3.4.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the prc,'-jec, t site at approved locations. 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 1 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section whi]le not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: · I Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provision in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and instaill resilient tile floor rovering complete including but not necessarily limited to the roi. lowing. .1 Resilient floor tile· .2 Vinyl plastic edge strips at exposed edges of tile fl.c~orin~;. .3 Preparation of substrates. · 4 Adhesives. .5 Cleaning and protecting f]loor tile. .6 Protecting the Work of other trades· · 7 Clean-up. I.~° RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specif~ied elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. · i Heavyweight Aggregate., Structural. Concrete: Section 033!(). 1.3 SUBMITTALS: 1.13. 1 Samples: .1 Submit samples of each material proposed for use on t. he project to Architect for approval and for color' selections. .2 O~tain Architect:s written approval of samples and rolor selection prior ~o delivery of material to job site· 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: 1.4·1 Store materials at a minimum temperature o-t: 70 degrees I--. for at least 24 hours before installation. 1.4·2 Maintain a temperature of at least 70 degrees F. :in spaces where material is to be installed for a period of at least 48 hours before instal 1 ation. 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 2 1.4 (continued) 1.4.13 Maintain adequate ventilation 'to remove moisture and volatile · ~ umes. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING: 1.5.1 Deliver materials to the project site in the manu~act, urer~s original unopened containers with the manufacturer's name clearly marked thereon. 1.5.2 Distribute ~loor tile on the job site such that tile each color lair in any one space shall be ~rom the same lot. PART~ ~ PRODUCTS 2. I MATERIALS: 2. I. 1 Resilient Flooring: . 1 Vinyl Composition 'Tile, Armstrong Supreme Vinyl Corlon Tile equal ~ 1° .... 12" '~ I ~' Edge Strips: Beveled vinyl plas'tic, 2.1.3 F'rimer: as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer ~or each related substrate. 2.1 4 Adhesive ~or Vinyl Composition Tile as - ~"-~ ' manu.~acturer -~or each related material to be bonded. o I 5 Adhesive Tor Vinyl Plastic Strips: as recommit, nc, ed by the strip manuTacturer ~or each related material to be bonded. 2. 1.6 Vinyl Cove Base: .080" guage, 4 inches high. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 PREPARAT I ON: 3.1.1 Surfaces to receive the tile shall be swept, clean and shall be -~:ree ~rom moisture, paint, oil, wax, or other ~ilm which may a~ect the adhesi on. 3.1.2 Concrete sub,loot shall be checked and repaired as required prior to tile installation. 3.1.3 Cracks, rough areas, joints, and other sur-~ace de.~ects ;~n the concrete subTloors shall be ~il]Led with material recommended by the tile manu-Facturer. Ridges, trowel marks, and other surface projecti.ons shall be ground smooth. 3.1.4 Start. ing o~ Work in any area shall constitute acceptance oT sub-~loor in that area. 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 5 · --' INSTALLATION: 3.2.1 Installation of tile shall! be cleferred until all other work t. hat might cause damage to the flooring has been completed. 3.2.2 Lav tile in a workmanlike manner so as to be sat:isfactory appearance to the Owner. Work shall be executed by experienced mechanics. 3 2 3 Applv priimer to concrete floors in such manner that the ~" · - .. en,..i; e sur-,~ace to receive tile will be evenly covered. The specific method of application shall be :in accordance wit. h the tile manufaL-turer:s~ recommendations. 3.2.4 Apply adhesive after the pr~imer has been allowed t.o dry thoroughly'. Method of application and time allowed for setting shall be in ac:c:ordance w:ith tire tile manufactLtrer's recommenclat:~ons-~. 3.2..5 Apply tiles starting from axes that will produce tile against opposite walls of equal widt. h and not less than half the till,_ -~,~*k Entire undersurface of the tile shall be bonded to the subfloor., with each tile in tight contact with surrounding tiles ancl wit. h joints aligned with room axes. 'Tile shall be laid under all fixtures and shelf unit. s. The direction o~ graining in adjacent tiles shall be changec[. 3.2.6 Edge strips: shall be instal, led at exposed edges of tile flooring and where thresholds are not. required. The top surface shall be flush with tile floor. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING TILE: 5.3. 1 Immecliately upon completion o~ tile installation il~ a room or area, floors and adjacent surfaces shall be dry cleaned with an approved cleaner to r'emove surplus adhesive anti other' soiling. Floors shall not be washed ~or at least 5 days a~ter installation, a~ter which time they shall, be washed with an approved nonal kal :i ne c!eanin~g solution~ rinsed thoroughly with clear, cold water· 3·:3.2 From the time o~ cleaning until acceptance by tne Owner, the tile shall be covered with clean, heavy-duty building paper before traffic is permitted. Vegetable-~iber board, plywood or other suitab].e material that will not mar the tile shall be placed over tile in areas used as subsequent building operations, elsewhere as directed. 3.3.3 Immediately prior to final inspection, wax resilient floor covering with wax o~ a grade and in a manner presented by the ~loor covering manufacturer. 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 4 3.4 CLEAN-UP: 3.4. 1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 3.4.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. 09680 CARPETS I 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1. 1. 1 Work included in 'this Section, while not ali: inclusive but listed ass a guide, is as fo!ows: · 1 Comply with terms c)f the GENERAL C[!NDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and r'elated provisions in DIVISION1, GENERAL REQUIRI:--MENTS. .2 Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary and proper for the complete installation of all carpet, and padding as herein sperified and as shown on the drawings. .3 Guarantee: The installation contractor shai. i quarantee in writing to rela,/ or restretch any carpet t. hat. does not provic~e an attractive, wrink].e-free appearance and to correct ~nv condition due t.o faulty installatic~r~ whic:h ma~ appear witl~in one ,/ear of t. he acceptance o-F tl~e completed installation, including any loss adhesion to the sub-f:loor. .4 Protect the Work o'F or. her trades. .5 C1 ean-up. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: 2. !. 1 Carpet: .1 Floor Carpet: All c:arpet exc:ept c:lassroom c:arpe't, CARLTON by Bentley Carpet Mills, City of Industry~. California. Carpet to have unitary bark and t.o be instal]led by the direct ~!lue method. Color to be 240-L774 RHAPSODY· ..~- Floor Carpet.: Classroom carpet, CARLTON by Bentley Carpet Mills, City of Industry, California. Carpet to have unitary back and to be installed by the direct glue method· Color to be 240 .... L754 Bt_UE VELVET. .3 Wall Carpet: CARLTON by Bently Carpet Mills, Cit.~ of Industry, Ca].ifornia. Carpet to have standard back and to installed by 'the direct-glue method. Color to be 240-L774 RHAPSODY and 240-L754 BLUE VELVET, location as selected b'y Architect. 09680 CARPETS 2 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION: 3.1.1 All surfaces to receive carpet shall be thoroughly c:lean, dry, -'- dust free and in condition satisfactory to the installation contractor. The insta]Llation contractor shall not. i~y the Owner in writing c~ any conditions which will prevent him from producing satisfactor]~ finish work. The start of carpet installation shall be an indication of his acceptance of the surfaces as being sat( sT actor¥ for installing carpeting and he will automatically assume the responsibi]Li't'.,/ for any unacceptable finish work caused by the floor condition. 3. 1.2 Carpet shall be i~ .... ailed lin ac:cordance with carpet manufact, urers r'ecommendation as outlined in installation manual. 3. 1.3 Car-pet shall be laid with a minimum number of edge and ,,:r'c:,ss- s,,-?ams. F'atches witl'; pieces wi].l not be permit:ted and seams not aPl:;ro,;ed c)n the shop clrawings will nc;t be allowed on ~.1~. fin:ished ~ob.. 3. !. 4 Carpet =~- ' ..... al~ be instal, led wall. to wa!.~ us(hq con'ti' .... r .... leno~.hs and as broad wi dths as possibl e-cut edqes... appropriat, ely treated to form non-raveling joints where exposed. 3. 1.5 Binder bars ,..~ ....~ i ... ~n~.~ be installed at a./1 areas where floor cover'inq materials changes of a carpet edge that does not abut. a vertical sur-~ ace . 3. 1. 6 Instal 1 ed rarpet, sba! 1 be free of spots,, di r't , of so:i..L ~ and shall be w:ithout tears, frays, or pul:Is. 3.°~ REMANTS: .:5.2 :! For' replacement and r'epa:[r's, the inst:allat, ion contr ......... ~',,:)r sha]." furnished the owner with all usable scrap packaged in appropria+,:e wrapping, l(~.-,e~ed and del :i verecl to-the owner at job ~";+ 3.3 CLEAN-UP: 3.3.1 On c:ompletion o.F the :installation on each floor', al:/ dirt, carpet scraps, etc, must be removed from the surface of the carpet. Any so:(led spot. s or excessive acl~esive on the carpet sha:il be removed with the proper spot remover. All loose pieces of face yarns must be removed with sharp scissors. 3.3.2 (]lean up all tr'ash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, str'eets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and c:lean at al:[ times. 3.3.3 Dispose of such materials out. side the l:imit, s of the project site at. approved locations. 09900 PA I NT I NG 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.i Work includecl in this Section ~hi'Le nc)t alii. inc-lLtsi,/~ bE.vt, lis;ted as a guide, is as roi;Lows: .1 Comply .... with terms of t. he GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE r,-~,.-.--.,L, Ni,~AL,-,~.- and related provision in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .~ Furnish materials.. , prepare sLtrfaces, and field paint or . ..... a...n ur~fir~ished sub-faces complete inclLtcling but not necessa~-i].y !imited · to the -f:ollo~ing: i Int. erior rL~nning mhd ~s'tmnding tr'im ~-" E'X IDOSSed mi ]. ~ ~Ol'- k. .3Ha].[o~ metal door'~ and Exposed ga}','an~zed metal. Exposed gyp~L~m ~a].lbascd ~L.tKf~C~ ~nC:}LtdJ. ng ~qL.Liced .7 F'ratec't. ton of the Nor-k of other tr'~d~. ,:~ F',~ir~t:i. ng ~ha~} be irt ~dd~t.$on to prime ~nd ~hoD cc)at.~ specified in other Sections. .-4 Furnish a pmir~ting sch~dul(~ listing all SL~rfmC::~S tO be painted, indicating method end materials to be LIsed. 1.~° WORK NOT INCLUDED: .,.~.1 Exc:~pt as otherwise specified~ the follow:Lng i-teem snml'~ not. be paint, md under provisions included in tlnis Section of the Speci f i cati ohs. . I Pr~finished itemss. .2 Striping c)~ p,aved .~ Surfmaes to receive other finish mmter-ialss. .4 Shop or factory applied prime 09900 PA I NT I NG 2 i.~.° 1 (continued~· .5 Gypsum dr,/wall joint preparat.'~.on. 1..7. RELATED W[]RK: Specified elsewhere. · 1 Concrete Unit Masonry: 04220 .~ Millwork: 06220 .3 Sheet metal: 07600 .4 Hollow metal doors ~ frames: 08100 ~ Gypsum Drywall: 09260 1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: i.4.1 Comp].',/ with applicable codes and ordinances. 1.5 SCAFFOLDING: 1.5.1 Scaffolding and trade related equipment for the execution of the Work o~ this Section shall be erected and placed in such a way as not to interfere with the Work o~ other trades. 1 5 2 Upon completion of the Work of this ,)~c. tion, a].]. such items shall be dismantled and removed ~rom site. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING: !.6.1 Deliver materials to the job site in original c:onta'iners with seal unbroken and labels intact. ~.~..,: St. ore materials on the job site in a singular place as designated by the job superintendent. i Keep the storage area clean and . . nua~. at al'~ times. .2 Repair any or all damage to the storage area and its surroundings to the satisfaction of the Owner' and at not cost to t. he Owner. 1.6.3 Cancel Labels on empty containers and, if reused, clearly mark label, to identify contents. 1.6..4 Observe fire safety pr'ecautions continuously: .I Remove oily rags, waste and combustible materials from each building every night. 099(:)~') PA I NT I NG 3 1.6.4 (u-ontinued > .2 Do not brir;g gasoline, benzine or' c;ther materials not pr'ov:ided for under the Specificat_ions on the job site. 1.7 SUBMITTALS: 1.7.1 Submit a painting schedule as specified 'i.n Paragraph 1.1.1 the Architect -~or approval. 1.7.2 Prepare and furnish, in duplicate, samples for each cc~lor and type of finish as directed by the Architect. 1.7.3 Co]ors and samples shal:l be selected by the Archit. ec:t and [].~: ~ ]l ~: [i.. ~ .I: AF:'F'ROVAL must be received b,/ the painting o ,: ........ ~ ....., ..... ~._.~: .... :~ starting the painting Work. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: 1.8. I Apply paints, other than water-thinned coat:[ngs, to) ~DlL~rfa~zes that are []omp!etely free of surface moisture as determined by sight or 1.8.2 The t. emperature of the surfaces to be painted and c~.f the atmosphere in contact therewith shall be maintained at or above degrees F. for water-thinned coatings and 45 degrees F. for other coat i ngs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: .~:. .... 1 : Tine term "paint",. as used herein, i nc.uu~:.=: ~:::- emul :sions, e.::n:..n' ..... n :=l ~ 1 l [ '' ' = [, pair-:ts, stains, varnishes, sealers, cement-emulsion filler, and otl'-ier coatings, whether use. d as prime, int. ermediate, or fil-:ish coats. 2. 1.2 Accessory materials shall be of the best quality and o¥ reputable approved brands. 2.2 MATERIALS: l~ 2.1 Paintinll.] and ~inisbirlg materials sba;1 be as selected by '~' .... Owner in accordance with the painting schedule included herein; shall be products manufactured by the Glidden Co., Comerco, Inc., or Otlher mat..erials of equal substance and functions as specified herein, as approved by the Owner, and as ~:o]lows: . I Interior Texture Finish, gypsum wallboard: USG Multi-Purpose lyex ture. 09900 PA I NT I NG 4 2.2.2 Surfaces lis'ted in 'the painting schedule shall receive the surface preparation, paints and number of coats prescribed. 2.'2.3 Surfaces of fabricated and assembled items that are .~inish painted by the manufacturer, or specified to be finish painted under other Sections of the Specifications are exempted from the -~ol~Lowing schedule requirements for surface preparation and painting. 2.3 PAINTING: Scheduled from Pittsburgh F'aints 2.3. 1 EXTERIOR WORK: . i Galvanized Metal Ist Coat: "Speecihide" galvanized steel primer, MWF 2.3 mils 2nd and 3rd Coats: "Speedhide" water base gloss enamel, MWF 4.0 m i 1 s. .2 Ferrous Metal 1st Coat: "Speedhide" inhibit, ire red primer, MWF 3.2 mils 2nd Coat: :Speedhide" water base gloss enamel.. MWF 3.6 mils. .3 Ext. eri or concrete THOROSEAL by Thoro Sysyem Products, apply in ac~cordance with manufacturers specifications. ~.° ~.~ 2 INTERIOR WORK: . 1 Concrete Masonry Units 1st Coat: "F'itt-Glaze" block ~iller ..... 2nd Coat: "Satinhide" latex semi-gloss, enamel 6, MWF 3.6 mils. .2 Concrete Masonry Units: Epoxy 1st Coat: "Pitt-Glaze" block filler 2nd Coat: "Pitt-Glaze" coating, semi--glc~ss, water-base t~pe~ MWF 4. () m i 1 s. .5 Drywall-After Texturing 1st Coat: F'PG Quick Drying Emulsion Sealer MWF 3.6 2nd Coat: PPG Eggshell latex enamel, MWF 3.6 .4 Woodwork & Trim: F'ainted 1st Coat: PPG water-base white undercoater~ MWF 3.5 mils 2nd Coat: "Speedhide" latex semi-gloss enamel, MWF 3.6 mils " .5 Woodwork & Trim: Natural 1st Coat: lear "Rez" sealer-primer 2nd & 3rd Coats: "Rex" polyurethene satin-clear .6 Metal Doors & Trim: Factory F'rimed 1st Coat: "Speedhide" r'ed inhibitive primer'. MWF 3.6 mils 2nd .~ ~- 3rd Coats: "Speedhide" water base gloss enamel 2.3.J~ In no instance will less than coverage be accepted. 09900 PA I NT I NG 5 ~°.4. MIXING AND THINNING: 2.4.1 Mix materials only as recommended by' the manufacturer on t. he label on each container. .~.4.~ Mix colors and 'tints t.o match color samples selected. Und~rcoa- ters and primers shall vary slightly' from the color of the next coat. 2.4.2 Thin package paint when required by sur-~:ace conditions. temperature, weather, and/or method oT appl~.cation. 'T'hinning shall be immediately prior t~3 application in accordance with the manuY:acturer~s directions, but not in access of I pint oT suitable thinner' per gallon. The use o'f thinner for any reason shall not. rel~eve t. he pa~tnter obtaining complete hiding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 F'REPARAT I ON: 3.1.'~ Inspect all sur'¥aces with r'e~Dar'd to t. heir suit. abiliT-,,~.~ 't.o recei,,~ a-~inish coat a.~ter preparator]/ Work. Application oT ~inish shall constitute acceptance of the surface. 3.1.2 Sur.Faces to receive painters -~inish shall be clean, Yr'ee o-~ de.~ective paint, scale, grease and rust c)n metal sur-~aces. ~.~l.~ ~:~po~-~.s and damaged_ shop coats with spec i -f: i ed rust-inhibitive primer. Grind 'Eo r'em(~ve shc~ulder's c~: paint, to prevent Tlaws Tr'om photo~raph'in~ ...... ~ ~ sh clouts. 3.1.3 Chemically treat and wash galvanized metal sur.~aces with compounds -~or this purpose ~Galvaprep, LathaTorm, ~ ibiey, etc.) in accordance wit. h manufacturer's directions. 3.1.4 Prime glazing rabbets and beads prior to glaz~.ng. 3. 1.5 Knots ~ '~' ._ .~h~..,.L1 be surface scraped and thor'c3u~hl,/ cleaned~ and given '~- ~ .. ~I ..... - a ,.;~.n coat o-~ know sealer' conforminc; to Military Speci-~ications ~ '--co be-fore application c)T the priming coat. 3.1.6 Do not pain~ pipe until the related piping ?/stem has been res'ted and appr~ved. 3. ~° PROTECTION: 3.2.1 Hardware, accessories, ~:ixtures and similar items placed pric)r to painti~g shall be removed or adequately pro'retted during pain'ting and replaced on completion of painting. ] 9 9 Cleaning and painting shall be so programmed that dust and contaminants from the cleanin~ process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 09900 PA I NT I NG 6 3.2.3 Protect the Work of other trades during the painting and finishino_, operations. 3.3 WORKMANSHIP: ..:...~..1 Mat. erials shall be applied by skillecl workmen in accordance w~i ..... ~ the pric~ted direction of the manufacturer. .3.3.2 Materials shall be applied and cut in neatly to dry uniforml,¥ to the color and sheen specifSed. , ~ree. from runs, sags, wrinkl~,~.._, shiners. streaks and brush marks. 3.4 APPLICATION: 3.4.~. Sur..~aces 'that. have been cleaned, pre-treated and/or otherwise prepared for painting and finishing shall be given a coat of the speci- -~ied first-coat materials as soon as practicable after such prepara-- tions has been completed, but in any event prior to any deterioration o¥ 'the prepared surface. 13.4.2 Paint to dry hard betweer; coat. s and sand smooth al! enamel undercoats prior 'to recoating. 3.4.3 Ac-tess doors, grilles, louvers, conduits, pipes, ducts, etc., to be painted shall be painted the same c~.~lor as adjacent walls and/or ceilings. Surfaces to) be of uniform color and appearance and coverage c ~-~mp I et e. 3.4.4 FINAL COAT on interior Work shall not be applied until other trades and Contractors are finished with their Work, and their mate- rials and debris removed, and tl-.e pr'emises left in a _,ub.~t~:~.~..ial]~; broom clean condition. 3.5 CLEAN-UF': 3.5.! At c:omp!etion, touch up and restc, re '~inish where da.mac;ed or defaced; remove all paint where it. has been spilled, spia,.'a~hed, splattered on surfaces, includir'~g fixtures, gl. ass furniture, .~:it'tings, etc., leave all surfaces in a first-c:lass concli'tic;n. Where it is impossible to satisfactorily clean these surfaces, they shall, be replaced to the entire sat:isfaction of the Owner wit. hour aclditiona;L cost to the Owner'. 3.5.?. Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Election, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 3.5.3 O.~.:~po ..... of such materials out. side the limits of the pro.'-,-'*'.~e .... site at approved locations. DIVISION 10 SPECIALITIES 10000 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALITIES 10!0() CHALKBOARDS & TACKBOARDS 10182 TO!LET PARTITIONS 10800 TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES 10000 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALITIES I PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while nrJt all inclusive but listed as a guide is as follows: · i Comply with terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provision in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install miscellaneous specialities as listed herein· .3 Protect the Work of other trades. · 4 C1 ean-up. I · -' RELATED WORK: 1.2·1 Related Work: Specified elsewhere· 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS: F'roducts are specified her'ein as ~uides to Perfor- mance', Quality, and Function of the specific item. Products o~ equal substance and function may be substituted as approved by the []wner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Shop Drawings and Samples deemed necessary in accordance with Section 01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: As scheduled herein. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION: 3. 1. I Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations each application method. 5.2 CLEAN-UP 3..'2.1 Clean up trash and debris caused by the Work of this Section, keeping premises, street_s, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 3.2.2 Dispose o~ such materials outside the limits o~,; the prc~ject site at approved locations· 1(')000 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALITIES 2 PART 4 SCHEDULE 4. 1 D..o.L~.r£_~_~_~]~je_F_'lat_es_:. Furnish name and number pla~== .... as manufactured by the SOUTHWELL COMPANY. Plates shall be engraved plastic with letters and colors as selected from manufacturer'~s standard products. Plates shall be adhesive applied. Furnish '2 inch high plates, lengtl) as ,~-equ~.,,~o~_c~ .~.or average of 12 letters. F'rovide 20() name plates. Type face "HEL. VET I CA" Medium. 4.2 ~".eta! L. ockers: Furnish and instal) lockers in locat, ions shown on drawings as manufactured by REPUBLIC STEEL. Color as selected by Architect from Standard Colors. F'rovide sloping tops and front fillers. . i Coach'.s lockers: 18x21x~O,ventilated,~. locker,. ~44 bunting, blue. .2 Personal lockers: 12x12x30 double tier, standard locker, three colors, ~44 bunting blue in corridors 1028, 1034, &i()41, ~ ~-}z~ . . ~ .... ~25 ecru in corridors ~._~J=, 1183, & 1211 ~50 oray in corridors 1177 1170~ ~- 1164 .3 Gymnasium lockers: per plans, ventilatinc] lockers with solid end panel., ~44 bunting blue. .4 Teacher cabinet: 36x24x78, wardrobe cabinet ~, ki+, 538031 .=,.~. 538032, ~44 bunting blue. 5 Kitchen lockers: 12xl .... . . ~,,72, standard locker, ~44 bunting blue. 4.3 ~[!.{!~Og._~gOl Furnish and install complete architectural letters by the SOUTHWELL COMPANY, OPTIMA 0-704~ 16 inches high, baked enamel aluminum, moun{ed flush on wall with masonry anchors."COPPELL M!DDL. E SCHOOL" 4.4 ~_E~._~)'i~_Og~]{~]~!~[iE Furnish and install complete LARSON~S cabinet type 2409-6R with ~ull glass door and extinguisher model MP!O. Provide i0 thus. Location per Architect. 4.5 E!~g._.~Z~!~i Furnish and install complet, e three (3) flag poles by TEXAS FLAG POLES, INC.; ground set, Executive Model, 25~-0" high - high standard fittings. 4.6 M~'!~i__~X!~k~i Furnish and install one cast bronze plaque, 2-4x36, style & size, composition as selected by the Architect. 4.,~ ~.~E~oi~._~c~cc]i Furnish and install complete NADEN Scoreboard Model SS-698. Furnish and install complete ~our (4) forward folding backstops Model 517 with No. 211-200 backboard and goal with safety padding; ~wo (2) ~ixed backstops Model 526 with 232-200 backboard and goal safety padding; one fixed backstop model 518 with 211-200 backboard and goal safety padding, all thus each gym. Provide No. 760 manual wi nth, ai 1 as manufactured by the PORTER EQUIF'MENT CO. 10000 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALITIES 4.'-.TM ~_- g ..l_. .d_ .i_ E, g Bleachers: Furnish and install complete telescopic bleac:hers by HUSSEY: Model 2A00. Home side, provide four '20'-0" sections, 6 rows each, 9-5/8 inch rise, 22 inch row spacing, Provide scorers 'table· Visitors side, provide four 12'~-0'' sections, 6 rows earh, 9-5/8 inch rise, 22 inch row spacing. Provide integral full height end panels. 4.10 !~l__~r_.t..~i_n__.T_r_.aF__~_.'i:. Furnish and install complete curtain track as located on drawings: Front curtain track: "RIG-I-FLEX" no. 140-R, provide valance· Cyclorama: "BESTEEL" no. 170 Rear curtain track: "RIG-I-FLEX" no. 142-R. Side curtain tracks: "ROTODRAF'ER" wit. h 1" clamps, provide 'I" pipe shown on drawl nos, wal 1 wai nscoat No. ~,-)"---=;r~-?':).~. st. andard col or ~e,ec.~ion, as manu'~actured by Porter Equipment Co., Schiller Park, Ili.[inois. 4..12 F_!_o_~E._.A.n~b.~>..r.s_:' Furnish and install complete four anchors, clover plates, and cable adapters Tot gym floor as selected, for installation after gym floor is installed, provide each gym, by Porter Equipme-'~t Co., Schiller Park, Ill-:inois. display cases b,/ Claridge, Premiere series with "hook-fab" back panel~ provide with .~lourescent lights. Corridors lr)21, 1124, 1211, & 1185: Mociel no. 486 Corridor 1150: Model no. 485 Library: Model no. 481 4. !4 Be__n_c.h__Sup~_oF_t_s. Furnish and install complete Bench Pedestals by Republic Steel. 4 1~ Book Storage: High densit, y, mobile storage system as manu.~_~ .... u~-_.d by SPACESAVER GROUP, Ft. Atkinson, Wisconsin, Model HC-1B space-pacik. Provide one single side fixed unit, .~ull width, the remainder to be double side mobile units, unit. s not t.o exceed 7 feet. in length. 4.16 ~'J_aiL.'.z~_a,z_.C_o_ver_:_ Walkway system with pyramid skylights, bronze acrylic glazing, bronze anodized aluminum, by Nat. uralite, Inc., Garland, Texas. 4.17 Floor Sink Grating.: Aluminum bar grating as manu-~actured by McNichols Co., Dallas, Texas. 4. 18 Entrance Mats: Entrance mats to be recycled 'tire mats, parguet style with edge border as manufactured by Eldorado Tile Co., distributed by Carpet Services, !nc. Blue & Co., Carlstadt, New Jersey. 10000 M I SCELLANEOUS SF'EC I AL I T I ES 4 10100 CHALKBOARD & TACKBOARD 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.!.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as fc~llows: · 1 Comply wi'th terms of the CONDI-[IONS OF THE CONTRA~CT and rel. ated provisions in DIVISION 1, SPECIAL PROVISIONS. .:2 Furnish and install chalkboards and tackboard complete including but not. necessarily limited 'to the following..]: · 1 Chalkboards wi th chalk troughs & map rails. .2 Tackboards and bulletin boards· .3 Accessories, fasteners, anchors, etc. · 4 Guarantee. · 5 Samp ! es. .6 Protect the Work of other trades. · '7 C1 ean-up. I.~° RELATED WORK: .,~.~.'~' 1 Related Work specified elsewhere: · i Millwork: Section 06220 .2 Gypsum Drywall: Section 09260 .3 Paint. lng: Sect. ion 09900 1.3 GUARANTEE: 1·3. 1 Submit Industry standard guarantee. 1.4 SAMPLE: 1.4.1 Submit one (1) sample of each type of chalkboard &' tackboard and color samples for color selection. Color samples shall be ac:tual material '~o be furnished. 10100 CHALKBOARD &.o TACKBOARD ~° 1.5 MANUFACTURERS: 1.5.1 This specification is based on the foll~wing manufacturers: Claridge Products & Equioment, Inc., Best-Rite Chalkboard, Temple, Texas is an acceptable manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. I MATERIALS: 2.1 1 Chalkboards shall be Claridc~e, Series 4 Vitracit. e, '-)~' g~uac~e, 3/8" particle board, with Aluminum foil backing, color as selected. ~.° 1.~ Bulletin Boards shall be Claridge Cork ~.~iulletin Doa.~ ~-~'cl=>, trimmec! to match chalkboards, Duvacore backing, color 38 DS. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION: 3.1.I Installation by skil]Led meclnanics, at !oca'kic~r~s inc!icated on Drawl ngs. 3.1 .~ Items shall be ~nst. alled in strict accordance with d~.~a..~s on Drawings; as recommended by the manufacturer of each item and as -~ol lows: .1 Plumb. level, true and in correct planes. Securely anchored .3 Properly finished. 3.1.3 IJnsatisfactory Work shall be removed, damages repaired, ancl then 'the Work reinstalled to the complete satis-~action of the Owner. 3. ~° CLEAN-UP: 3.2.1 Clean up all trash and debris caused by the Work ~f t. his Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and ,adjacent property neat and clean at all times. ~.~: Dispose of such materials outside the 'limits o~: the project sit. e at approved locations. 10182 TOILET PARTITIONS 1 PART i GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: __ 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not ali inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with the terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install metal toilet compartments, accessories, and related items to complete Work indicated on Drawings, as specified herein, or both. .3 Protect the Work of other trades. . -4 C1 ean-up. 1 ~ .~ RELATED WORK: 1.2. 1 Related Work as specified elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. . i CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT: Section 0422(). .~.'~ Toilet and Bath Accessories: Section 10800. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS: 1.5.1 F'roducts specified herein shall be as manufactured b,/ the Sanymetal Products Co., or products of equal substance and function as approved by Owner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with provisions of Sect. ion 0100(), GENERAL REQUIREMENI'S. 1.4.2 Samples: Submit in accordance with provisions of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Section 01000. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 TYPES: 2. 1. i Compartments: Floor mounted, "NORMANDIE" type metal compartments. .~..1.=~ Shower Stalls: Floor mounted, "ACADEMY" type metal comp-'-~'~ ~m~.n~ t.s as shown on plans. 2. 1.5 Baked Enamel Finish, standard colors. 10182 TOILET PARTITIONS 2 2. i (continued) 2.1.4 Alternate: MARBLSTAL by -the Georgia Marble Company, color, one o~ ..~our standard marbles. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. I INSTALLATION: 3.1.1 Erect compartments, and related items in a rigid substantial manner, straight and plumb, and with all. horizontal lines level. 3.1.2 Clearance at vertica]l edges of doors shall be free of warp and wind. -- 3. 1.3 Install ur:inal screens and partitions with appropriate moun, ~.~ng"-= f or C.M.U. 3.2 ADJUSTING: 3.2.1 Adjust hardware and leave in perfect work:Lng order. 3.2.2 Adjust door hinges to hold door open at approximately .30 degrees. 3.3 PATCHING: :5.3.1 Field touch-up of scratches or (defaced enamel finish will]; be permitted only i.F it is approved by the Owner. Otherwise de-,~ective materials sha]:l be replaced with new mater:ials. 3.4 CLEAN-UP: 3.4..1 Remove pro-tective maskint-]s and clean surfaces, ]eav:ing them ';:ree o.~ sol! and imper.,~ections. 3.4.2 Clean up ali trash and debr'is caused by the Work o~: this; Sectinn, keeping premises, sidewalks: streets neat and clean at all · t i mes. 3.4.3 Dispose o~, such materials outside the limit, s of 'the pr .... o_l~:..._t'=~ si te at approved locations. 1A800 TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. I WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Furnish all labor, materials, and 'equipment. nec:essary and pr'c)per to provide all accessories as indicated on Drawings and spe¢:i~ied herei n. 1.1.2 Accessories shall include the following: · i Toilet room accessories. · ,' Janitor room accessories. 1.~° RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work speciTied elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS: 1.3.! Products specified herein as manufactured by Bobric. k Dispensers~ Inc., or approved equal· PART 2 PRODUCTS .2. I MATE. RIALS: As scheduled herein· PART 3 EXECUTION 5. 1 INSTALLATION: 3.1.1 Install accessories as indicated on drawings. 3.1.2 Anchorage and installation shall be suited to wall. materials and shall be as recommencled by manu-~acturer. 3.2 CLEAN-UP: 3.2. 1 C l e an up t. r ash an d deb r i s c au se d b y t h e Wot k o f t. h i s S e c t i on, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 3.2.2 Dispose of such materiaYs outside the limits of the prc,'-ject site at approved locations. 10800 TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES 2 PART 4 SCHEDULE 4 1 Boys 1(')>'59, 1A59, i'PA1 5, 1175: Girl= ].~.-)78, 1062, i?A? ?., 1174. . 1 Soap dispenser: B-111 .2 Toilet tissue dispenser: B-2740 .3 Mirror: B-165 1624 .4 Hand dryer: B-2007-120V .5 Grab bars: B-6195 x 48 & B-6106 x 24 4 2 Toilet 1154, 1157, 1016, 1147, 1015, 1(]19~ R, 1'-~'?"' . I Soap dispenser: B-111 · o Toilet Tissue dispenser: B-2740 .5 Mirror: B-165-1624 .4 Towel dispenser: B-569 .5 Napkin disposal, 1015, 1019, & 1232 only: B-270 6 Grab Bars: B-6193x48 ~, B-6106x24 1A16 1019, ~- 1147 only. · 4 3 Shower= 1071, 1("}~- 1090 1096 11(')4 ii14 11~=. . 1 Soap dish: B-6807 4.4 Coach's Toilets . I Soap dispenser: B-111 .2 Toilet 'Tissue dispenser: B-2740 .3 Mirror: B-165-1624 .4 Towel dispenser: B-369 .5 Napkin disposal, 1093, & 1119 only: B-270 .6 Soap dish: B-6807 -4.5 Toi 1 ets 1068, 1080, 1103, 1091, 1097, 1121, & I 115. . 1 Toilet tissue dispenser: B-2740 .2 Soap Dish: B-111 4.6 Custc~dial 1040, 1079, 1111, 115.2,-'- I?XA, 1061, 12A('~ 12'~.4. ~. 11'-','6' 1 Mop rack: B-°°~ 24 4.7 r_ --' - . . '-='~ & 072 0. es=~ng Rooms 111x~ 1106, 1()94, 1089, 1,.),~.,, . 1 . . 1 Mirror: B-165 2060 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11400 FOOD EQUIPMENT .- 11600 LABORATORY EQUIF'MENT 11931 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT 11400 FOOD SERVICES EQUIPMENT 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work inc~Luded in this Sert. ion while not. all inclusive but i.~is-;ted ass a guide, is as -Follows: .1 Comply with all terms of the GENERAL. CONDITIONS OF ]'HE: CONRTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAl_ REQU I REMENTS. .... Install, only, the food facilities equipment shown in 'the contract documents. The .Furnishing &. setting of the equipment wi!.l be included in th:is Contract under the provisions of DIVISION 1. Section ()1030, Alternates, Al. lowances, &. Unit Prices. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Rela'ted work specified elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. .1 F_-'.!=.U_.M.~.I_~._IG_, Division 15; including but not limited 'to: .1 Rough-in pip:Lng for supply and waste lir~es. · ~' Rough-in for traps, grease trap=_, line strainers~ tai pieces, valves, stops, shut--offs and miscel]/aneous .Fittlings required for complete instal, lation. .3 Final Connections. .2 "-Z?_--..~_'!]_~I.!=A_T.I_ON,_ Division 15; including but not. limited to: .1 Roof-mounted equipment and connect, lng clirect work not shown as part o'F the kitchen equipment. .3 EI=..E_~'..1].~II:~._A_!=z. Division 16, including but not :limit. ed to: .1 Rough-in of conduit, wiring, line and clisconnect switches, safety cut-of.Fs and fittings, control panel=, fuses, boxes, and fittings required for complete instal ]. ati on. .2 Final connections including mounting and wiring of starters and switches furnished as; part o~ t. he Food Service Equipment. 11600 LABORATORY EQU I PMENT 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. I WORK INCLUDED: __ 1.1.1 Work included in this Section while not all inclusive but listed as a guide is as follows: .1 Comply with terms of the CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, SPECIAL PROVISIONS. .2 Furnish and instal] laboratory equipment complete as indicated ._ on 'the Drawings and specified herein including but not necessarily limited to the following: . I Pre-finished cabinets. .2 Tops, curbs and fixtures, sinks (complete with strainers, tailpieces, and 'traps) and miscellaneous items of equipment. .3 Pre-drill all -tops, curbs, sinks, etc., t.o receive service fixtures installed by others. .4 Furnish laboratory equipment as indicaterl on the Drawings and specified herein for installation under Division- lc~- ,%,' ~6~, including butt not necessarily limited to 'the followinc]: · I Service fixtures, faucets, water valves, key cocks, turret bases, etc. .5 F'rotection of the Work of other trades. · 6 Clean-up. 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1..2.1 Related Work specified elsewhere: . i Mechanical: Division 15 -- .~ Electriral: Division 16 1.3QUALIFICATIONS: 1.3.1 Products specified herein are based on equipment manufactured by the Taylor Division of AMERICAN DESK. Products of equal substance and function may be submitted with the prior approval of the Owner or his representati ye. 11600 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Samples: Prior to the award of contract, the sucessful bidder .... must submit samples of the products offered, which are trul'¢ representative in all essentials, particularly of the product he wil. 1 deliver under the contract to the Architect for the purpc)se of examination for compliance with this specification. - 1.4.2 Shop drawings in accordance with the CONDITIONS ON THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1. I. 5 GUARANTEE: 1.5.1 Upon completion of the contract the equipment supplier shall furnish to the Owner a guarantee to replace or remedy any defects or blemishes due to workmanship or materials which OCCLtr within one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the equipment installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS: - 2. i. I LABORAI'ORY TABLES & CABINETS; shall be equal t.o "color lab" construction, style 2000, wood cabinets. 2.1.2 TABLE TOPS; i 1/4 inch thick cement and asbestos materia]L equal -to "Taycol ire". .-2. 1.3 SINKS-, one-oiece construction of modified epoxy resins equal to "layr esi n" 2.1.4 LABORATORY SERVICES; provide one (1) set-ups per table thus . 1 Electrical Outlets, two (2) pair of convenience outlets, 120V. .2 Sink, one (1) .3 Gas &. Water' Combination fixture, two (2) .4 Mark with industry standard snap-in type index buttons. .2.1.5 ACID NEUTRALIZATION BASIN; one, five gallon type, mount in al! Teacher Demonstration desks and under Darkroom sink. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. I Construction of cabinet work: 3.1.1 All cabinet work shall be in accordance with the best practice of Wood Laboratory Furniture Industry, using glued and screwed joints reinforced with blocking. 3.2 I NSTALLAT I ON: 11600 LABORATORY EQU I PMENT 5 3.2 (continued) 3.2.1 All cabinets, tops, etc., shall be installed by skilled mechanics at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.2.2 Cabinets and tc~ps shall be installed plumb, true and square, and securely anchored in place. 3.3 CLEAN-UP: 3.3.1 (]lean Lip ail trash and debris caused by the Work o-f this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 3.3.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits o~ the project s:'.-'te at approved locations. 11951 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT 1 PART I GENERAL I. i WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: .1 Comply with all terms of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE - CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. .2 Furnish and install kitchen equipment, complete inc!uding but not necessarily limited to the following: .1 K'itchen appliances as scheduled herein. .2 Brochures .3 Sample Color Chips .4 Protection of the Work of other trades .5 C1 ean-up 1.2 RELATED WORK: 1.2.1 Related Work specified elsewhere WHEN REQUIRED. . 1 Mechanical Work: Division 15. .2 Electrical Work: Division 16. I. 3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: 1.3.1 Company with applicable codes and ordinances. 1.3.2 Work in conjunction with kitchen equipment shall be fabricated and assembled in strict conformity with the requirements of the Underwriter'~s Laboratories, Inc. (Chicago) and shall provide appropriate protection. 1.3.3 Each item shall bear the appropriate label of the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Furnish brochures of kitchen equipment to the Architect approval. 11931 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT 2 1.4 (continued) 1.4.2 Furnish sample color chips to the Architect for color selection a'E the same time brochures are submitted. 1.5 PROTECT HANDLING: 1.5.1 Equipment shall be delivered to the site in the m~'~'~fac,_u,'" *' '-(~.~-~"~s original containers, unopened. 1.5.2 Storage shall be done in dry location in such a manner not to enclanger the equipment or 'the structure. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS: 1.6.1 Products specified herein are based on equipment manufactured by Acme or equal as approved by the Architect. 1.7 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: 1.7.1 Upon accept, ante o~ the equipment, provide ~ull instructions and demqnstrate to the Owner's designated representative, the proper methods o~ care, operation and maintenance of this equipment. PART~ o PRODUCTS 2. 1 GENERAL: 2. 1. 1 Refer to the Drawings Tot location and quantities oT kitchen equipment listed herein. '2.1.2 Colors shall be as selected by the Owner fr~3m manufacturer's s'Eandard colors except where speci-~ied otherwise herein. 2.1.3 Equipment shall be designed and wired at the ~actory Tor operation on available electric service indicated on the Drawings. 2.~° EQU I PMENT SCHEDULE: Teacher Work []enter 1013 Nurse 1()18 ~.:~ Concessions 1063 Custodian 1230 PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION: 3.1.1 Kitchen equipment shall be installed, test. ed and adjusted by skill, ed mechanics. ~3.1.2 Install all items in location indicated and/or as directed. 11931 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT 3 3.2 CLEAN-UP: ..'.1 Clean up all trash and debris caused by the Work of *'his Ser- tion, keeping all premises: streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 3.'2.2 Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site at approved locations. * * * DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS l'-.~'c,.~'~r') '{ " ' ,-, ~ ..... WINDOW ELIND~) 1~.~.) WINDOW BLINDS I PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1 Work included in this Section while not all inclusive but listed as a guide., is as .follows: . 1 Comply with the terms of the CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and related provisions in DIVISION 1, SPECIAL'PROVISIONS. .2 Furnish and install window blinds complete as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. .3 Protection of 'the Work of other trades· · 4 C1 man-up. 1. ~ o SAMPLE: 1·2.1 Submit working sample and complete color range c)f actual slats for Architect's approval and color selection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Type I window Blinds: "MONACO" by Levelor Lorentzen, cdr equal. Install. in all classrooms with exterior windows, 1073, 1092, 11()7~ & 1134. 2.2 Type 2 Window Blinds: "RIVIERA" by Levolor Lorentzen., or equal. Install in I()04, 1003., 1011: 1012, 1013, 1024, 1023, 1005, 1006... 1131. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. i INSTALLATION: 3.1.1 Window blinds shall be installed by skill, ed mechanics at locations indicated on the Drawings or specified herein, plumb, ].evel. and true, in correct planes, and securely anchored. 3.1.2 Install and anchor window blinds with approved type of fasteners, i.e.: screws, mol ley bolts, expansion shields, etc. 3.1.3 Loose items shall be taken down, damaged surfaces repaired and then shall be reinstalled to the satisfaction of the Architect. 12200 WINDOW BLINDS 2 5.2 CLEAN-UP: 3.~. 1 Clean up trash and debris caused by 'the Work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent property neat and clean at all times. 3.2.'2 Dispose of such materials outside the limi'ts o~ the project site at approved locations. * * * DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOY USED DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT APPLICABLE TABLE OF CONTENTS SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15010 Supplementary Conditions For Mechanical Specifications SECTION 15050 Basic Materials and Methods SECTION 15140 Pumps SECTION 15180 Insulation SECTION 15401 Plumbing Piping Systems SECTION 15402 Joining of Piping Systems SECTION 15403 Installation of Piping Systems SECTION 15424 Electric Water Heater SECTION 15425 Gas Water Heater SECTION 15442 Gas Accessories SECTION 15450 Fixtures SECTION 15652 Refrigeration Equipment SECTION 15802 Air Distribution SECTION 15901 Controls SECTION 15950 System Balancing DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16010 Special Conditons for Electrical Work SECTION 16110 Raceway System and Accessories SECTION 16120 Conductors SECTION 16134 Distribution and Lighting Panelboards SECTION 16140 Wiring Devices SECTION 16170 Safety Switches SECTION 16181 Fuses SECTION 16460 Transformers SECTION 16470 Switchboard SECTION 16501 Lighting Fixtures SECTION 16551 Lamps SECTION 16552 Ballasts SECTION 16600 Connections to Equipment Furnished by Other Sections of the Specifications SECTION 16760 Fire Alarm System (schools) SECTION 16761 Clock & Bells (schools) SECTION 16762 Public Address & Intercom (schools) 678~-1 SECTION 15010 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. All work covered by this section of these specifications shall be accomplished in accordanc~ with the respective drawings, information or instructions to bidders, general requirements, and the supplementary general conditions of these specifications. Any supplementary conditions, special conditions, addenda, or directives which may be issued by the Architect, herewith, or otherwise, shall be complied with in every respect. B. Bidders shall determine the contents of a complete set of drawings and specifications and be aware that they may be bidding from a partial set of drawings, applicable only to the various separate contract, sub-contracts, or trades as may be issued for bidding purposes only. The contract documents are the combined Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Heating, Kitchen, Ventilating and Air Conditioning and Electrical drawings and specifications. All drawings and specifications are on file in the Architect's office and each Bidder shall thoroughly acquaint himself with all of the details of the complete set of drawings and specifications before submitting his bid. All drawings and specifications form a part of the contract documents for each separate contract and shall be considered as bound therewith in the event partial sets of plans and specifications are issued for bidding only. the submission of bids shall be deemed evidence of the review and examination of all drawings, specifications and addenda issued for this project as no allowances will be made because of the Sub-Contractor's unfamiliarity with any portion of the complete set of documents. 1.2 SCOPE A. The work included under this specification consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, transportation, services, etc. which are applicable and necessary to complete the installation of the systems specified in the MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS, all as described in these specifications, as illustrated on the accompanying drawings, or as directed by the Architect. B. In general, the various lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under this specification shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards so as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactory workable manner. Run work parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. 15010-1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS C. The construction details of the building are illustrated on the -.. Architectural and Structural Drawings. Each Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details before submitting his bid as no allowance will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts to accommodate the ultimate installation of pipe hangers in the forms before concrete is poured, and in masonry walls be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. 1.3 INSPECTION OF SITE The Contractor shall visit the site, verify all existing items shown on plans or specified, and familiarize himself with the working conditions, hazards, existing grades, actual formations, soil -' conditions, and local requirements involved, and submission of bids shall be deemed evidence of such visit. All proposals shall take these existing conditions into consideration and the lack of _._ specific information on the drawings shall not relieve the Subcontractor of any responsibility. 1.a UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS Locations and elevations of the various ulitities included within the scope, of this work have been obtained from City and/or other substantially reliable sources and are offered separately from the Contract Documents, as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. This contractor shall examine the site, shall verify to his own satisfaction the locations, elevations, and availability of all utilities and services required, and shall adequately inform himself as to their relation to the work; the submission of bids shall be deemed evidence thereof. 1.5 CODE REOUIREMENTS Ail work shall comply with the provisions of these specifications, as illustrated on the accompanying drawings, or as directed by the Architect, and shall satisfy all applicable local codes, ordinances, or regulations of the governing bodies, and all authorities having jurisdiction of the governing bodies, and all authorities have jurisdiction over the work, or services thereto. In all cases where alterations to, or deviations from, the drawings and specifications are required by the authority having jurisdiction, the Contractor - shall report the same in writing to the Architect and secure his approval before proceeding. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall provide complete utility service connections, as directed and submit, as required all necessary drawings; he shall secure all permits and inspections necessary in connections with his work and pay all legal fees on account thereof. In the absence of other applicable local codes, acceptable to the Architect, the National Electric Code and Uniform Plumbing Code shall apply to this work. 15010-2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.6 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials unless otherwise specified shall be new, free from any defects, and of the best quality of their respective kinds. All like materials used shall be of the same manufacturer, model, and quality unless otherwise specified. B. All manufactured articles, materials, and equipmen~ shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, adjusted, and conditioned as recommended by the manufacturers, or as indicated in their published literature, unless specifically herein specified to the contrary. All work under this contract shall be performed by competent workmen and executed in a neat and workmanlike manner providing a thorough _ and complete installation. Work shall be properly protected during construction including the shielding of soft or fragile materials, and the temporary plugging of open 'lines during construction. At completion, the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned and ail tools, equipment, obstructions, or debris present as a result of this Contract shall be removed from the premises. 1.7 STORAGE AND PROTECTION Provide adequate facilities for items furnished under these specifications which are subject to damage or exposed to elements. Take such precautions as necessary to properly protect apparatus from damage. Failure to comply with this provision will be sufficient cause for rejection of the particular apparatus involved. 1.8 COOPERATION A. All work under these specifications shall be accomplished in conjunction with other trades on this project in a manner which will allow each trade adequate time at the proper stage of construction'to fulfill his work. B. Maintaining contact and being familiar with the progress of the general construction and the timely installation of sleeves and inserts, etc., before concrete is placed shall be the responsibility of this trade as will the installation of the required systems in their several stages, at the proper time to expedite this contract and avoid unnecessary delay? in the progress of other contracts, and meet all requirements of progress schedules set up by the Architect. C. Should any questions arise between trades as to the placing of lines, ducts, conduits, fixtures, or equipment, or should it appear desirable to remove any general construction which would affect the appearance or strength of the structure, reference shall be made to the Architect for instruction. 15010-3 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.9 SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL AND EOUIPMENT The Contractor shall submit for the Architect's approval a complete schedule of material and equipment which is to be installed under this contract. The schedule shall be submitted within 30 days after the award of this Contract and prior to the installation or fabrication of any of the materials the Manufacturer's name, Catalogue Number, Type and Trade Name; in addition, for equipment --- attach Manufacturer's Engineering Data and Specification Sheet. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS: See Architectural General Conditions 1.11 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The drawings show diagrammatically the locations of the various lines, ducts, conduits, fixtures, and equipment and the method of connecting and controlling them. It is not intended to show every connection in detail and all fittings required for a complete system. The systems shall include but are not limited to the items shown on the drawings. Exact locations of these items shall be determined by reference to the general plans and measurements at the building and in cooperation with other Sub-contractors, and in all cases, shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change.in the location of any part of this work without additional cost to the Owner. Should any changes be deemed necessary by the Contractor in items shown on the contract drawings, the shop drawings. descriptions, and the reason for the proposed changes shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. C. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before bids are submitted; otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any and all changes and additions that may be "' necessary to accomodate his particular apparatus. D. The Contractor shall lay out this work maintaining all lines, grades and dimensions according to these drawings with due consideration for other trades and verify all dimensions at the site prior to any fabrication or installation. Any descrepancies shall be reported to the Architect b~fore any installation or fabrication and the existing conditions shall be investigated and proper changes effected without any additional cost. E. Titles of Sections and Paragraph in these specifications are introduced merely for convenience and are not to be construed as a correct or complete segregation -to tabulation of the various units of material and or work. The Architect does not assume any responsibility, either direct or implied, for 15010-4 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS omissions or duplications by the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor, due to real or alleged error in the arrangement of matter in the Contract Documents. 1.12 ARCHITlgCTS APPROVAL A. In any statement under this contract where "approval" is required or requested, it is understood that such approval must be obtained from the Architect in writing before proceeding with the proposal, and an adequate number of copies of any such proposal shall be submitted to the Architect. B. The approval by the Architect of any materials, changes, drawings, etc., submitted by the Contractor will be considered as general only and to aid the Contractor in expediting his work. Such approval as may be given does not in any way relieve the Contractor from the necessity of furnishing the materials and performing all work as required by the drawings and specifications. 1.13 LOCAL RESTRICTIONS The Contractor shall become familiar with all rules and regulations of the City, County, and State, or any other authority having jurisdiction over this project; and if in his opinion any work or materials shown on the drawings or specifications do not comply with these rules and regulations as to size, type, capacity, and quality, he should make it known prior to the submission of his bid, which shall be deemed evidence of compliance; otherwise, the Sub-contractor shall be responsible for the approval of all work or material, and in the event that any such authority should indicate disapproval, he shall correct same with materials approved by the Architect at no additonal cost ot the Owner. 1.14 ELECTRIC WIRING Except for such items as are normally wired up at their point of manufacture and so delivered, and unless specifically noted to the contrary herein, the Electrical Contractor will do all electric wiring of every character both for power supply and for all pilot and control wiring, including the the controls, starters, etc. This Contractor shall erect all motors in place ready for connections and shall furnish with each such motor a starter of the type specified and deliver it in good condition to the Electrical Contractor at the job. The Electircal Contractor will mount all such starters, as directed, furnishing supporting structures where necessary. The Owner and other Contractors shall furnish with each item requiring electrical connections, the necessary instructions and wiring diagrams to the Electrical Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Specifications to determine the scope of the work. 15010-5 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.15 LARGE APPARATUS AND EOUIPMENT All large apparatus and equipment which is specified or shown to be furnished or installed under this contract, and which may be too large to be moved into its final position through the normal building openings planned shall be placed by this Contractor, in its approximate final position. This shall be accomplished through cooperation and coordination with other Sub-Contractors, before any obstructing structure is installed. All apparatus shall be cribbed up from the floor by this Contractor and cared for as specified under "Storage and Protection" or as directed by the Architect. 1.16 STERILIZATION The entire hot and cold-water and drinking-water piping system shall be thoroughly sterilized after fabrication with a solution --- containing not less than 50 parts per million of available chlorine.The chlorination material shall be either liquid chlorine conforming to the requirements of U.S. Army Specification No. 4-1 or sodium hypochlorite solution confirming to the requirements of Federal Specification 0-B-441 Grade D. The solution shall be introduced into the system in an approved manner. The sterilizing solution shall be allowed to remain in he system for a period of 8 hours, during which time all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After sterilization, the solution shall be flushed from the system with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million, unless otherwise directed. 1.17 CROSS CONNECTION AND INTERCONNECTIONS No plumbing fixture, device, or piping shall be installed which will provide a cross connection or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking or domestic purposes and a polluted supply such as drainage system or a soil or waste pipe which will permit or make possible the backflow of sewage, polluted water, or waste into the water supply system. 1.18 RESPONSIBILITY The Contractor will be held responsible for the satisfactory and complete execution of all work included. He shall produce complete finished operating systems and provide all incidental items required as part of his work, regardless of whether such items is particularly specified or indicated. 1.19 CLEAN UP A. Clean up trash and debris caused by the work of this Section, keeping premises, streets, sidewalks and adjacent areas clean and neat at all times. 15010-6 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS B. Dispose of such materials outside the limits of the project site of approved locations. 1.20 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING Provide necessary excavating and backfilling for the installation of work specified in this Division. Trenches for underground piping and conduit shall be excavated to required depth with bell holes provided as necessary to insure uniform bearing. Care should be taken not to excavate below depth, and any excavation below depth shall be refilled with sand or gravel firmly compacted. Where rock or hard objects are encountered, they shall be excavated to a grade six inches (6") below the lowermost part of the pipe and refilled to the pipe grade as specified. After the pipe has been installed, tested and approved, the trenches shall be backfilled in grade with approved material, well tamped or puddled compactly in place. Do not proceed with backfill operations until piping has been inspected by the Architect and Owner. Do not perform backfilling operations except in the presence of the Architect or Owner. All piping outside the building shall be installed below the frost line. Where streets, sidewalks, etc. are disturbed, cut, or damaged by this work, the expense of repairing same in a manner approved by the Architect shall be a part of this contract. 1.21 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors, 22 gauge glavanized sheet iron sleeves shall be used, except those is beams, outside walls, structural members or in concrete slabs in mechanical equipment rooms, which shall be standard galvanized steel pipe. The size of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of pipe of the proper size with adequate clearance for movement due to expansion and contraction. In the case of insulated lines the diameter of the sleeves shall be at least %" greater, than the outside diameter of the insulation. Where pipes pass through outside walls, the inside diameter of the galvanized iron pipe sleeves shall be at least %" greater than the outside diameter of the service pipe. After the pipes are installed, full the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with a mastic or caulk with lead. Use packing as required to accomplish this. B. Escutcheons except as specifically noted or specified shall be installed on all pipes passing exposed thorugh the floors, walls, or ceilings. Escutcheons shall be equal to the Crane No. 10 chrome plated sectional floor and ceiling plates and shall fit snugly and neatly around pipe or pipe insulations or insulated lines. Solid chrome plates with set screws shall be ._ used if sectional plates do not fit properly or stay in place. 15010-7 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.22 FLASHINGS Flash around all pipes passing through the roof in connection with this contract, with sheet lead weighing not less than 4 pounds to the square foot built a minimum of 10" into the roofing in all ~. directions from the outside of the pi'pe, running up the pipe a minimum of lO" and more where vent terminals must be higher to conform to the requirements of the Plumbing Code, and then turned over 1 inch into the pipe cavaity. All seams and joints shall be completely soldered closed and the entire flashing shall be completely waterproof. 1.23 EXPANSION OF PIPING A. This Contractor shall furnish and install all devices required to permit the expansion and contraction of all pipe work installed by him, particularly in water supply and circulating systems. In the main water and circulating lines, he shall employ expansion joints as required or where directed. B. Should the installation of mechanical expansion joints become necessary in the opinion of the Architect, joints 1~" and smaller shall be Fulton Sylphon No. 111 packless expansion joints. Joins on 2" and larger lines shall be Adsco, Flexones, or Tube Turn, bellows type expansion joints with the proper number of bellows sections of stainless steel. -- C. -Anchor all lines having expansion joints so that expansion and contraction effect is equally distributed. Verify exact locations of anchors with the Architect prior to making installation. The lines having expansion joints shall be accurately guided on both sides of each joint. These guides shall consist of saddles and "U" clamps properly arranged and supported. Submit complete details for approval. D. In installing expansion members, exercise care to preserve proper pitch on lines. Furnish and install all special fittings, connectors, etc. as required. 1.24 DIELECTRIC ISOLATION A. Wherever copper, brass or bronze piping systems are connected to steel or iron piping systems, tis connection shall be made with dielectric isolators. The dielectric isolators shall be so designed that nonferrous piping materials shall be isolated by the use of Teflon or Nylon isolating materials made up in the form of screwed type unions or insulating gaskets and bolt sleeves and washers for standard flanged connection. All dielectric isolators shall be selected for pressures of the systems involved .... B. Dielectric isolators shall be Epco, Crane or Maloney. 15010-8 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.25 VALVE TAGS Every valve throughout the building shall have a one inch diameter brass tag properly numbered and securely wired to the valve stem in a neat, workmanlike manner. Ail valves are to be numbered consecutively and' a typewritten, framed list shall be installed in the mechanical rooms. Properly coordinate valve numbering between the Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Sub-contractors so that a single list will be mounted for both the Plumbing and the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning valves. 1.26 PAINTING Upon completion, clean all pipes and equipment before painting. Painting of mechanical equipment and piping is specified in Painting Section. 1.27 ACCESS DOOR Access doors are to be provided by the General Contractor. This Sub-contractor will closely coordinate locations of valves, etc. in order to have access to all concealed portions of the system requiring periodic service. Prepare shop drawings for coordination of all access doors, locating same for installation by General Contractor. 1.28 PIPE IDENTIFICATION STICKERS AND MARKING A. After all insulation, equipment, etc. is installed and painted, provide W.H. Brady or equal pipe identification stickers and directional arrows on all exposed piping (including pipes in pipe shaft) installed by him. Stickers on pipes 4" and larger shall be 2~" high, stickers on pipes smaller than 4" shall be 1-1/8" high. B. Ail service piping which is accessible for maintenance operations, (including piping above accessible ceiling) occurring in the equipment rooms, and exposed piping in finished spaces will be identified with markers as specified above. Bands shall be installed at locations as follows: Adjacent to each valve and tee At each riser take-off At each pipe passage through wall, floor and ceiling construction At each pipe passage to underground On all horizontal pipe runs - marked every 30 feet At least one marker between each piece of equipment 15010-9 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS C. All items of mechanical equipment such as pumps, fans, etc. shall be identified by approved name plates to be provided by - the Sub-contractor furnishing the equipment. Name plates shall be securely affixed to each individual piece of equipment and also to each starter, switch, relay, transformer, etc. which controls that equipment. Name plates shall bear ndtations corresponding to the same notations on wiring diagrams and/or operating instructions. D. Name plates for major items of equipment shall be aluminum 1½" x 4", all others of a black enamel background, with etched or engraved natural aluminum lettering. 1.29 FL~ME SPREAD PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS All materials and adhesives used for acoustical linings and insulation, jackets, tapes, etc. shall conform to Interim Federal Standard Flamespread Properties of Materials, Inc. Fed. Std. No. OO336A (comm. NBS). The classification shall not exceed No. 2, wish the range of indices between O and 25 for these classifications as listed in the Federal Specifications for the basic materials, the finishes, adhesives, etc. specified for each system, and shall be such that when completely assembled the total will not exceed an index of 50 in Classification lll as listed in the Federal Specifications. Modifications shall be made to insulating materials, etc. as required to comply with the Federal Specifications. 1.30 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee in triplicate, warranting all materials, equipment and labor furnished by him to be free of all defects, for a period of one year from date of final accepta'nce by the Owner. He shall further guarantee that all equiment shall meet the characteristics, capacities and workmanship specified and should any defects or equipment be indicated within the warranty period, the defects and/or equipment will be repaired or made good without cost to the Owner. B. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: Conditions of the Contract and Division I "General Requirements" are made a part of this section whether attached hereto or not. END OF SECTION 15010-10 SECTION 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE Governing Provisions: The "A.I.A. General Conditions" Division 1, and Section 15010 "Supplementary Conditions for Mechanical Specifications" Shall govern work under this section whether .... attached hereto or not. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with Section 1.10, Division 15010. Indicate materials, quantities, sizes and installation details. !. 3 CODES Local plumbing code, local building code, all of which shal] be the latest edition with all amendments; also other applicable state and local codes ordinances. 1. a COORDINAIION Install materials ant equipment at proper time to keep pace wi[h the general construction ant the work of other trades involved. PART 2: MATERIALS 2.1 P:PlN,., 'A. The steel pipe shall be made and tested in accordance with the latest edition of "Standard Specifications for Welded Steel Pipe" of the National Tube Company, Youngstown SYeet and Tube Company, er other approved make. Unless otherwise specified, all pipe shall be Schedule 40 of ASTM A-120. B. Chilled Water Supply and Return Piping: Two inches (2") or smaller shall be Shcedule black steel pipe with cast iron or malleable iron screwed fittings. Piping two anl one-half inches (2~") and larger shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with weld fittings. C. Condenser Water Supply and Return Piping: Twe inches (2") or 15050-1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS smaller shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with cast iron or malleable iron screwed fittings. Piping two and one-half inches (2~") and larger shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with weld fittings inside building. Schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings shall be used underground and outside. D. Cooling Coil Condensate Drain and Drain Piping: Pipe shall be Type M hard copper. Fittings shall be soldered copper either forged or cast with sanitary waste patterns. Provide plugs in the unuseJ openings. Provide a deep seal P-trap at each air handling unit. E. Domestic Water for Makeup, etc.: Pipe shall be Type L hard copper underground and Type M hard copper elsewhere. Fittings shall be soldered copper, either forged or cast. F. Miscellaneous Services other than named above: Pipe and fittings shall be suitable and approved for the duties involved in each case. See other headings under this section for additional piping. G. Fitting Material: Fittings for copper tubing shall be sweat fittings, Mueller Brass ~mpany's "Streamline" solder fittings or approved equal. Drainange type fittings shall be used wherever possible. All solder for copper butting, unless otherwise specified, shall have a melting point of not less than 460 degrees, composed of 95% tln and 5% antimony. All piping shall be installed in a workmanlike manner, according to the manufacturer's instructions. All joints shall be thoroughly cleaned before connecting. H. All cast iron fittings shall be Crane or Grinnell. I. All connections between ferrous and non-ferrous piping, fittings, etc., shall be made with "EPCO" Isolation unions. Install in accessible locations and anchor piping as required to prevent stress and strain at the union. J. Weld fittings shall be Tube-Turn, Midwest, Taylor, Forge, Ladish or approved equal. Welding fittings shall have the same bursting pressure as pipe of the same size and schedule. Elbows in welded piping systems shall be long radius. 2.2 VALVES - A. Furnish a~d install all valves indicated on the plans, specified herein, or required to control the flow of water, .. condensate, etc. to and from various parts of the systems, in and out of various pieces of machinery, and equipment, to segregate various parts of individual systems, etc. 15050-2 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS B. Generally, valves shall be of the types and pattern corresponding to the following listings, but where necessitated by particular conditions or classes of work, special valves shall be employed. C. Valves in copper lines 2" in size and smaller shall be Crane No. 1.320 gate, No. 1310 globe, No. 1311 angle, and No. 1303 swing check solder joint valves. Other valves shall be in accordance with the following schedule of Crane Company valves unlless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Check valves listed are for horizontal service only. Valves shall be manufactured by Crane, Hammon, Stockham, Jenkings, Lunkenheimer or approved equal. VALVE TYPE VALVE SITE CRASE VALVE = Gate 2" and smaller ~38 Gate 2 1/2" and larger 461 Globe 2" and smaller 7 Globe 2 1/2" and larger 357 Angle 2" and smaller 17 Angle 2 1/2" and larger 353 Check 2" and smaller 37 Check 2 1/2" and larger 373 Ball 2" and smaller 2180 D. Butterfly valves shall be Norris R-series witk aluminum bronze discs, stainless steel shafts, resilient (rubber) seats, cast iron or malleable iron body, gear operators (for all throttling service valves), lever ~andle shall be extended to permit insulation of piping, lug wafer body or wafer body with spool piece. E. Where valves have discs they shall be selecte~ for the intended service, using those materials recommended by the manufacturer. F. Where cocks are required, they shall generally be brass, screwed pattern up to 2" and cast iron flangeC pattern 2 1/2" and larger plug cocks suitable for the system. Also provide and insall all special cocks required such as pet cocks, gauge cocks, etc. cocks in gas lines shall be Crane No. 32& except above 2", use Nordstrom No. 143 with removable ~andle. 15C50-3 BASIC ~A%ERIALS AND METHODS G. Check valves for services in vertical lines and other than specified above shall be similar to Combination Pump Valve Co., Style G., Smolensky or Miller. Valves shall have nickel-iron body, bronze fitted with stainless steel spring. Valves shall be for 250 psig min. cold working pressure. H. Where valves or cocks are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match. I. All iron body gate or globe valves listed above shall be brass or bronze trimmed. J. Connections between screw joint valves and copper lines shall - be made using copper to i.P.S, screwed or copper to i.P.S. flanged connectors. K. Special types of valves shali be employed in any and all lines where specified elsewhere to required by conditions existing at the job site. Prior apprcval shall be obtained for all such valves. ' .... 2.3 UNIONS Provide and install union between each item of equipment and the valve controlling and/or the various piping connections to it. Unions shall be as manufactured by Crane, Mueller, Grinnell or Walworth and shall be as follows: Steel Pipe: Unions 2" and '- smaller, malleable iron with brass seat and ground joints. Unions 2 1/2" and larger, flanged unions. Copper Pipe: Union 2" and smaller, brass ground joints, copper to copper. Unions 2 1/2" and larger brass flanged unions, with brass bolts. 2.4 GASKETS Gaskets shall be placed between the flanges of all flange joints. Gaskets in water lines shall be 1/16" thick gaskets cut from Garlock 24 wire insertion Red Rubber Sheet Packing. Gaskets shall be cut to fit within the bolt circle. 2.5 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide and install access doors as required for complete access to all motor operated and manual control dampers, adjusters, valves, coils, vents and equipment requiring service installed by this Contractor. B. All access doors in ducts shall have suitable frames, hinges, hold down devices required for complete and ready access. 15050-4 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Where installed in insulated duct, insulate all doors with internal insulation as specified. Submit shop drawings for approval before installation. C. All access doors are required in chases and walls, etc. of general construction shall be provided in Section 8P-Division 8. 2.6 BELT GUARDS A. Furnish belt guards for all belt driven equipment which is installed under this contract. Such belt guards shall be rigidly constructed of 18 guage sheet metal on an angle iron frame, and shall have fronts of expanded metal or 1/2" mesh hardware cloth. They shall be of such size as to permit belt tightening to the full extent of the motor slide rails, they sha!l be securely installed in such fashion that they can be readily removed to permit servicin~ of the protected drive. B. Where factor assembled equipment is furnished by its manufacturer with belt guards, such guards shall be used in leiu of these specified herein. 2.7 GAUGES Gauges shall be of the bourdon tube type, and shall be selected to operated at about the midpoint of their full range; i.e., for a 50 PSi operation, select a gaurge for 0 to 1OO PS!, Each gauge shall be provided with a brass lever handle union cock. Cases shall be Phenol or Steel, not less than four and one-half inches (4-1/2") in diameter. 2.8 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be of the easy reading mercury type with aluminum cases and glass fronts. They shall have separable sockets so selected and arranged that they can be read from the floor. The stems shall be angle stems where required. The scales shall be nine inch (9"), except wkere otherwise indicated. B. Where thermometer wells are called for, furnish and install brass wells with the tip of the well extending into the water stream. The well shall have a plug attached to it with a short 15O5O-5 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS length of chain. The wells shall be installed in the vertical or at 45 degree angle up .... C. Thermometers and thermometer wells shall be as manufactured by Weksler, Mueller, Trerice or American. 2.9 RELIEF VALVE - All closed water systems shall be protected with relief valves· Valves shall be spring operated, all brass, and shall meet A.S.M.E requirements for discharge capacities. Discharge lines shall be piped to the nearest floor drain. Relief valves shall be as manufactured by Watts, K!ipfel, McAlear or McDonnell and Miller. 2·10 DUAL CONTROLS Shall be TACO =323, 1/2" Bronze Relief and Reducing Valve Set 12 PSIG to feed and 29 PSIG to relieve with built in check valve and strainer, and adiustable to 30 PSiG to feed· 2.1' AUTTMATIC AIR '~"- Shail be TACO ~a26 Hot Water Air Valve. Vents shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. and at all high points of the systems and shall be piped to nearest appropriate drain. 2.12 WAIER SPECIALTIES A. Water specialties shall be required as shown on the Drawings and specified herein and shall be suitahie used at maximum operating condition of 200 degrees and 125 PSIG unless otherwise noted. · ~AC~ ~ . B Tank fitting shall be ~. ~. =~39 wi~h i/2" connections. 2.13 AlE EL~'~ ~ ~I~.AIO~ Shall be TACO Air Scoop =32! thru a37 as determined by heating "line sizes" thru 4" in size wirh !./8" ia?ping for automatic air vent and tapping for expansion tank llne. PART 3: EXECUT!ON 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Provide and install all valves that are shown on the drawings, specified or tha: max' necessary to install complete, controlled and properly operating systems as required by code. and as approved by the Architect. 15050-§ --' -'- BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS B. Each hot and cold water return branch line or riser serving two or more fixtures shall be separately valved where it is connected to izs respective main. The branch lines to batteries '- of fixtures or fixture groups shall be individually valved. The water supplies to which hotand/or cold water is connected, whether installed by this Contractor or others, shall be provided with a valve and union to facilitate its removal without interrupting any other supplies or services. C. Valves shall be located in accessible positicns or made accessible througE removable panels, etc., and where several valves are related as to function, they shall be grouped in a pattern. The Contractor shall arrange for proper location of all access panels required subject to approval of the Architect. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid leaving tool marks and scratches where connections are exposed in toilet room, machine rooms, and other conspicuous places. Provide and install stop valves of the indicated or required type in all piping systems where shown or required; at mains, at outlets, and i:ems of equipment, at the inlet amd outlet of each pump, and other appurtenances; in by-passes; in special service lines such as drain line, make-up waterlines and fill lines; and at all other places designted to n the plans and/or required to control flow of water, or to various sections of the buildings and to various groups of fixtures; items of equipment, etc. The supply of water to every plumbing fixture. specified to be installed under this Contract or provided and installed by others as part of the equipment by "Owner" or "Others" shall be provided with positive shut-off and stop valved. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install all piping for every purpose, air unit drains, and other piping illustrated on the plans and not covered under otker headings of these specifications. ~here the Contractor is required to make final connections between items of equipmenr provided and installed by others or existing items, he shall use the same class of materials and instal! them in the same manner as specified for the particular system -- involved or as installed in the existing systems, and he shall have reference to the other sections of these specifications for the class of material and method of installation required. B. In general, the materials described under "Prodcurs" in this section and gollowing methods of assembly shall be used in fabricating the various listed systems. The method of assembly 15050-7 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS may be varied only to meet special conditions; i.e, welding lines where the screwed fittings cannot be installed or vice versa, etc. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, the Contractor shall request exact instructions from the Architect as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering any material. Ail - steel lines 2 1/2" and larger shall be assembled by welding. All steel lines 2" and smaller may be assembled by either welding or by screwed fittings as specified. --. C. Welding shall be done by mechanics who satisfy qualification requirements of the American Welding Society. the pipe ends to be welded shall be machine beveled wherever possible. Gas cuts shall be true and free from all burned metal. Before welding, surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned. The piping shall be carefully aligned and no metal shall project within the pipe. Miter joints shall be allowed only bht eapproval of the Architect. All headers, connections, eblows, reducers, flanges and special fittings shall be made using forged steel welding __. fittings of the same weight as the pipe to which they are attached. All unions and connections to valves 2 1/2" anJ larger shall be made by the use of welded flanges. D. Branches in lines where the brach size is equal to 1/2 of the size of the main or smaller may be connected using Weldolets or Threadolets. Where the sizes are greater than one-half of the main, standard weight seamless tees and manufactured bY Tub-turns, ASYM Standard A-234 shall be used. E. The locations, direction and size of vent lines, drain lines, etc., are generally indicated on the drawings. Branch connections in general are indicated and shall be so installed as to provide proper grades. f. All lines shall be made up straight and true at proper grades. All vents and their drains shall pitch down a minimun of 1" in 40 feet unless shown otherwise. G. Piping shall follow as cleselv as possible the rcutes shown on plans taking into consideration conditicns to be met at the site. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after proper approval has been obtained. H. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping, in connections, and in equipment to'~zhich the lines -- are connected. 15050-8 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS I. All headers shall be assembled as indicated using welding fittings throughout. J. All screw joints shall be made with taper threads, properly cut. Joints shall be made tight with graphite and oil applied to the pipe thread only and not to fittings. K. Unions: Provide and install unions at proper points to permit removal of p:pe and various equipment and machinery items without injury to other parts of systems. No unions will be required in welded lines or lines assembled with soldered joint fittings except at equipment items, machinery items, and other special pieces of apparatus. Union in 2" and smaller lines shall be ground joint and 2½" and larger shall be flange unions. Unions shall be of the same material and strength as other fittings in the lines. Companion flanges on lines at various items of equipment, machines, and pieces of apparatus shall serve as unions to permit removal of the particular items. Unions shall be installed in all piping connections to all item~ of equipment and fixtures whether furnished under this contract or by others. The unions shall be installed between a valve provided under this contract and by others, and the equipment or fixture served to facilitate the removal any particular item without interfering with service to others. Unions shall be an approved type. L. Swing joints or expansion loops shall be provided wherever shown on the drawings or wherever else necessary to allow for the expansion and contraction of piping. Ibis shall be accomplished in an approved manner, and the contractor shall be responsible for any damage which may occur as a result of expansion and/or contraction of his piping and bear the expense of replacing same. M. Nipples shall be of the same size and material as the piping in the system in which they are being ins:ailed, except that close, or "all thread" nipples shall not be used. Keep all open ends of piping, inclu~:ng those extending through the roof, plugged or capped to prevent dirt or other debris from entering the pipe during construction. The ends of all piping installed shall be thoroughly reamed to the full inside diameter of the pipe. A thread lukricant or pipe dope shall be made up of powdered graphite and pure boiled linseed oil, and applied to the male threads only of all screwed pipes prior to installation. 15050-9 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.3 THERMAL EXPANSION OF PIPING A. Swing joints, turns expansion loops, or long offsets, shall be provided whenever shown on the drawing or whenever necessary to allow for the expansion of piping within the building. Broken pipes or fittings broken due to rigid connections must be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense. "- B. Ancho~ all lines having expansion loops or joints a-s indicated or required so than expansion and contraction effect is equally distributed. Lines having expansion joints shall be accurately guided on both sides of the joint. 3.4 DRAIN PIPING ..... This system shall consist of all piping from the source to a floor drain or other point of disposal in the building plumbing system. - Final connections to the plumbing system shall be through open sight, or indirect trapped correction. All drain lines shall be Type "L" copper watertube unless otherwise specified. Ali horizontal drains shall pitch 1/8" per foot and shall be provided with plugged tee cleanouts, unless otherwise accessible for cleaning. Fittings shall be drainage pattern. 3.5 EOUIPMENT CONNECTIONS Extend waste water to the various items of equipment as indicated or required, terminating the lines where and as directed. Make all final plumbing connections. Provide shut-off valves and unions at each water connection to each item of equipmemt requiring same. Furnish all P-traps for waste connections to this equipment. 3.6 TESTING AND AD3USTING A. After all vertical soil, waste and vent, drain and downspout lines have been set, all the outlets shall be temporarily plugged up. Yhe pipes shall then be filled with water, full to the top, and allowed to remain so for 2a hours amd proved .... watertight. B. A final t~st shall be made after ali vertical and horizontal soil, waste and vent pipes have been imstalled and all fixtures roughed-in, and before the sewer connection is made. In this case, as before, all pipes shasll ~e f~:~e~ to the top of the vertical lines and allowed to remain so for 24 hours and pr~ved watertight. C. All the above pipes in additon to the water tests, shall be tested by the peppermint or smoke test, if the Architect or 15050-10 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS inspecting authorities so require. All cold, hot and fire protection water lines shall be tested at 150 lbs. hydrostatic pressure and proved tight. Tests on water lines shall be made before covering or insulation is applied. All gas lines shall be tested at 30 lbs. per square inch and proved tight. D. All the piping tested above shall be proved tight by the tests. Should any leaks occur, they shall be stopped in an approved manner and the lines re-tested until they prove tight and are acceptable. E. All pumps shall be tested and proved to be operating satisfactorily. Make all other tests required by city ordinance and by the Architect to prove that the equipment and the installation is satisfactory in every respect. F. In the case of any defect, they shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Architect and the work retested without delay. All such work shall be done by the Contractor witheut additional charge. G. Notice shall be given to the Architect and the Owner before the tests are made and the water, air, etc., is not to bt drawn off the pipes or the pipes covered until the filled pipes have been examined and approved by the Architect. The Contractor shall adjust all flush valves, stops, flow control fittings, regulators, etc. and put the entire plumbing installation in complete and satisfactory working order. All repairs to piping shall be made by replacing the valves, fittings and/or pipe proving to be defective. Scratches, wrench marks, etc. on chrome plated lines will be considered defective and shall be replaced without scratches, marks, etc. H. All water piping in all systems shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure of 150 psig; all leaks shall be repaired. I. On systems calling for medium pressure duct, systems shall be tested at one and one-half times specified operating pressure with a maximum of 3 percent leakage. The contractor shall supply a written report of the test. J. All necessary materials and equipment required for correcting deficiencies in operating equipment .shall be furnished by the Contractor with no cost to the owner. K. Temperature Control System: The temperature system shall be adjusted and balanced and put in operating condition to cause the equipment to maintain the temperatue in accordance with the intent of these specifications. 1505C-11 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS L. Included in this contract shall be any necessary changes in fan drives within the capacity of the motors to produce the required results. 3.7 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Complete, neatly framed instructions for the care and operation of all equipment shall be provided and installed where directed. In addition, a bound manual shall be prepared in triplicate, constaining complete repair parts lists and operating, service, and _ maintenance instructions. This Contractor shall carefully instruct the Owner's maintenance man during the adjustment and testing period. The Contractor shall also, in the presence cf both the owner's representative and the Architect, demonstrate the complete operation of each and every piece of apparatus. In the case of heating and air conditioning equipment, both the heating and cooling functions shall be fully demonstrated at such times as are reuired. Instructional periods shall be for such lengths of time as may be necessary to thoroughly familiarize operating personnel wi=h the proper care, operation and maintenance of tke equipment. 3.8 ELECTRICAL ITEMS A. On all equipment requiring electrical connections, furnish and turn over to the Electrical Subcontractor all required and necessary starters, switches, relays, controls, devices and other appurtenances required (except wire and conduit). Also ... furnish complete and approved interlocking and wiring diagrams. The Electrical Subcontractor shall then set (unless furnished as an integral part of the equipment by the manufacturer) all controls and devices and shall completely wire same in .-- accordance with the approved wiring diagrams. B. Obtain from the Electrical Subcontractor the sizes and types of services to be installed for each and every motor or device furnished under this Division of the work and ascertain that each motor and device is compatible with the service to be installed. 3.9 FOUNDATIONS AND BASES A. Each piece of equipmen~ which is motor driven shall be furnished with an approved base, whick skal! be in addition to the foundation. Each base shall be furnished integral with the equipment or apparatus, or shall be furnished as a separate item, designed to accomodate the equipment or apparatus. Submit shop drawings for all foundations and supports for approval. 15050-12 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD5 B. This Contractor shall provide foundations and supports for each piece of equipment furnished by him except those foundations definitely shown to be installed by others. Where foundations and supports are shown to be provided under another section of the work and the equipment or apparatus furnished by this Contractor cannot be safely or satisfactorily operated and/or installed on the foundations shown on the drawings and/or specified, this Contractor shall pay the General Contractor to make the necessary changes in the foundations and supports as may be required to suit the apparatus or equipment furnished. C. In general, fans and other belt-connected equipment shall incorporate adjustable slide rails for the motors. D. This Contractor shall provide foundations and supports for each piece of equipment furnished by him except those foundations under all equipment and apparatus as hereinbefore specified and with the minimum provisions for vibration isolation indicated. Cork-neoprene pads where specified shall be Korfund "elasto-Rib" or equal with a loading of 40 psi. 1. Roof Exhausters - Curbs, 6" minimum furnished by fan manufacturer. E. Isolation Guarantees and Services - In connection with the isolation structures, this contractor shall comply with the folowing: Transmission of perceptible vibration or structure borne noise to occupied areas by equipment installed under this contract will not be acceptable or permitted. Should any noise or vibration be objectionable to the Owner or Architect, field instrumentation test and measurements shall be made to determine the cause of such disturbance. Any variance or non-compliance with these specifications requirements shall be corrected by this Contractor in an approved manner and re-tested. 3.10 MO/ORS AND CCNTROLS A. Furnish and install a motor of adequate capacity and suitable speed for proper operation of every piece of equipment requiring a motor. B. Furnish for installation by the Electrical Contractor, a motor controller with pilot and hand/off/automatic switch, of adequate capacity and suitable for the proper operations of each and every piece of equipment, or apparatus, requiring same except for motor starters in the distribution panel furnished 15050-13 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS by the Electrical Contractor. All motors shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. All motors shall be furnished with open frame, unless otherwise noted, or required by the NEC for the service conditions encountered. All motor starters and electrical devices exposed to the weather shall be approved for outside installation and be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor in motor control centers unless noted or specified otherwise. See Electrical Plans and Specifications and verify all requirements. C. All motors, unless otherwise noted or herein specified, which are rated ~ HP and over, shall be general purpose, squirrel cage, induction type, arranged for constant speed across-the-line starting, with ball or roller bearing and constructed and rated in accordance with the latest standards of ~EMA for 30 degree C ambient and wound for 208 volt, 3 phase, 60 cycle power service unless otherwise scheduled, listed or noted on the mechanical and electrical plans. See Electrical Specifications. Verify all job site voltages and power service available before installation of any motor or controls. D. Fractional horsepower motors under ~ HP shall be NEMA constructed and rated, and shall be wound for single phase, 120 volt operation, unless otherwise noted on schedule. Single phase motors shall be capacitor start, induction run type and shall be furnished with motor controller with pilot light, where scheduled. E. Lights shall be provided with each starter. F. Starters shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Allis-Chalmers, Square D or approved equal. 3.11 HANGERS AND INSERTS A. All hangers, brackets, clamps, etc. shall be of standard weight steel. Perforated strap hangers shall not be used in any wcrk. When two (2) or more pipes are run parallel, they may be supported on trapeze hang~rs, equal to Moder~ Figure No. 425. B. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, al! horizontal runs of piping shall be suspended from the floor or reof construction, as the case may be, by means of approved hangers spaced not farthers apart than ten (10) f~et on centers, except that hangers for piping 1~" in size and smaller shall not be spaceC more than eight (8) feet on centers. Vertical risers shall be supported by Fee and Mason Fig. 238 or approved equal (except where specified otherwise below) riser clamps or supports 15050-1~ BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS installed at the respective floor lines. Cast iron soil pipe hangers shall be spaced not greater than five (5) feet on centers. C. All individually suspended horizontal pipes in the building shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: 2" and smaller pipe - 3/8" rod; 2%" to 3%" pipe - 1/2" rod~ a" to 5" pipe - 5/8" rod; 6" pipe - 3/4" rod; 8" and larger pipe - 7/8" rod. --- D. Inserts shall be equal to Fee an~ Mason Figure 178. Continuous slotted inserts may be used to support multiple lines running in close proximity on ei[~er individual hangers or on trapeze and shall be equal to Fee and mason Figure 190. E. Hangers supporting and contracting brass or copper lines, 3" in size and smaller shall be equal to Fee and Mason Figure 361 hinged ring hangers and adjusters. F. Hangers supporting 4" and larger ferrous pipe shall be equal to Modern Figure 590 with two nuts for each support. G. Hangers supporting brass and copper lines &" and larger shall be equal to Modern Figure 59 copper plated. H. Ail exposed risers shall be supported at each floor and 8'-0" above floor. Install 4" x 4" plate on masonry with attached rod using Fee and Mason Figures 304 or 304BT hangers fastened tc risers. I. Where anchors are used on copper piping U-bolts and chairs "' shall be copper plated. J. Horizontal piping along equipment room walls, use brackets, Fee and Mason Figure 15Q with hangers and rods as specified. K. Supports anf hangers shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction in the piping systems. Where necessary to control expansion and contraction, the piping shall be guided and firmly anchored; anchors skall be approved by the Architect and shall be designed for equal effectiveness for both longitudinal and transverse thrust. No piping shall be self-supporting, nor shall it be supported from equipment connections. Transmission of vibration, noise, etc. shall be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampers to minimize transmission shall be used where necessary. Shooting of anchors into concrete will not be allowed. 15050-15 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS L. Where ducts interfere with the proper location of hangers, the Contractor shall furnish and install trapeze hangers° END OF SECTION 15050-16 SECTION 15140 PUMPS PARI 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Governing Provisions: The "A.I.A. General Conditions," Section 15010, "Supplementary Conditions for Mechanical Specifications" shall govern work under this section -- whether attached hereto or not. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Section 15050 Basic material and Methods 1.2 SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010. Indicate materials, quantities, sizes and installation details. 1.3 COORDINATION Install materials and equipment at proper time to keep pace with the general construction and the work of other trades involved. PART 2: MATERIALS 2.1 END SUCTION PUMP A. The pumps shall be selected to be non-overloading and such that the impellers are not more that 90% of their full size. Shop Drawing data for each pump shall include total head, efficiency, brake horsepower and pump curves. Casings shall be close grained cast iron. Impellers shall be one-piece cast bronze. Wearing rings shall be bronze, easily removable. Pump flanges or volutes shall be drilled, tapped, and fitted with pipe plugs for gauge connections. In addition to the head developed by the · pump, the pumps shall be built to withstand the static pressure of the system in which they are installed. B. The flexible coupled end suction pumps shall be as manufactrued by Allis-Chalmers, Aurora, Buffalo Pump, Chicago Pump, Pacific, Ingersoll-Rand, or Bell and Gossett. Pumps shall be designed to allow removal of impeller, shaft and bearings without disturbing piping.or motor. The seals shal~ be of the mechanical type. unless otherwise indicated, all condenser water/pumps shall have factory installed crossovers to improve lubrication of packing and/or reduce intake of air around shaft seals with the comparatively low-suction pressures 15140-1 PUMPS anticapated. Furnish complete with spacer type flexible couplings, shaft flangers, drain plugs, air cocks, stainless steel shafts, bronze or stainless steel enclosed impellers, etc. Bearings shall be heavy duty grease lubricated ball bearings. Pump and motor shall be factory .- aligned. Alignment shall be checked by the Contractor. Base shall be cast iron or heavy steel designed specifically for the pumps. Extend base drain to nearest floor drain. Provide coupling guard. PAR/ 3: INSIALLATION A, Provide all necessary drain piping from base of pumps to floor drain. Mount pumps on 4" concrete housekeeping pads. END OF SECTION 15140-2 6/8a SECTION 15180 INSULATION PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Governing Provisions: The "A.I.A. General Condtions," Section 15010, "Supplementary Conditions for Mechanical Specifications" shall govern work under this section whether attached hereto or not. B. Provide specified insulation for control of system heat loss or gain, condensation prevention and sound control. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods Section 15401 Plumbing Piping Systems Section 15802 Air Distribution 1.2 SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010. Indicate materials, quantities, sizes and installation details. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS Insulation shall be provided by a firm engaged primarily in the application of insulation for a minimum of five years and in work of similar size and scope, and by workmen regularly engaged in this type of work. 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Damaged, deteriorated or wet materials shall be rejected and replaced. PART 2: MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL Materials shall be manufactured by Johns-Manville, Armstrong, Owens-Corning, Certainteed-St. Gobain, Pittsburgh Plate Glass, Benjamin Foster or approved equal. Materials furnished shall be equal in every respect to that specified. A. Pipe Insulation: (cold and hot water piping): Johns-Manville Flame-Safe glass fiber pipe insulation with 15180-1 INSULATION GVB pre-sized glass cloth vapor barrier jacket. VB reinforced foil-kraft vapor barrier jacket in concealed areas. Piping exposed to the atmosphere shall have O.016" thick smooth or corrugated aluminum jacket with vapor barrier. Attachment shall be made by %" wide 0.020" thick aluminum bands with approved closure system. B. Condensate Drain Pipe insulation: Armstrong Cork Company fire-retardant Armaflex foamed plastic insulation. Joints sealed with 520 adhesive. C. Duct insulation - external: Certainteed-St. Gobain Standard Duct Wraptype IV 1 1/2" thick glass fiber --' insulation with heavy duty Foil-Scrim Kraft facing, 3/a P.C.F. density. D. Duct insulation - internal: Certainteed-St. Gobain coated duct liner #300 Ultra!ire, glass fiber insulation 1" thick 3 P.C.F. density. E. Vapor Barrier Adhesive: Benjamin Foster 30-35 or approved equal. F. Insulation and Finishiing Cement: Johns-Manville 375. G. Adhesive for pipe Insulation Jackets: Johns-Manville VBI or U-Glue Vapor barrzer adhesive. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARAIION Apply insulation after surfaces to be insulated are thoroughly cleaned and entire mechanical system has been tested and proven tight. 3.2 APPLICAII~' A. Provide equal thickness of Johns-Manville Thermobestos on hot piping and FoamGlas insulation in 24" sections at all hangers or other support points. Hangers shall be on outside of insulation and not in contact w{th pipe. Curved galvanized metal shield shall be used between the hangers or support points and the bottom of the insulated pipe. Shields shall be 12 gauge and 18" long on piping 8" and larger, 16 gauge and 12" long on piping 3" through 6" long on piping 1/2" through 2 1/2". Only horizontal downspout lines including elbows up and down require insulation. On hubs and spigot piping, build up insulation at hubs and provide a smooth be~el 2" bey. ond hub on each side. Pipe insulation shall have thickness as follows: 15180-2 INSULATION Service Pipe Size Thickness Domestic Cold & Hot water Supply & return (above ground) All 1" Downspouts Horizontal 1" Refrigerant Piping All 1" Horizontal Waster Lines .... Above Ceiling Connecting to Eioor Drains Handling Cooling Coil Condensate Ali 1" C. Ccmdensate Drain Piping: On pipe or tubing not vet ins~alled, unslit foamed plastic insulation shall be slipped over the full length of the piping or tubing leaving a sufficient amount of ~xposed piping for ccnnections. After connections are made and tested, insulation shall be applied over fittings so as to cover all piping completely. Slit insulation shall be used cn systems which are to be insulated after installation. Ail butt joints and slip insulations shall be sealed with adhesive, insulation shall be slipped over fittings. D. Duct Insulation - External: Insulate external supply, return and outside air ducts not containing interior lining. The facing shall overlap 2" at all joints and shall be secured with outward clinch staples on 4" centers. Ducts over 30" in width shall have applications of 4" wide strips of adhesive 12" o.c. or mechanical fasteners on not more than 18" centers applied to the underside. Seal all joints, breaks, fastener penetrations and punctures with adhesive reinforced with a 3" wide vapor barrier strip similar to that of facing material. Omit exterior duct insulation where duct lining occurs except overlap duct lininz a minimum two feet. E. Duct Insulation - Internal: Interior surface of supply ductwork within 20 feet of supply air connections of air conditioning units or exposed in mechanical rooms whichever is the greatest distance, all outside air and return duct exposed in mechanical rooms shall be provided with sound absorbing internal insulation. Attachment to the bottom and sides of the duct shall be made with adhesive. Top shall be attached with adhesive and sheet metal screws and ! 1/2" diameter caps. Screws shall be 1/2" longer than insulation thickness. All joints and breaks shall be pointed up to a smooth surface mastic. All lined ductwork shall be increased in size to maintain the 15180-3 INSULATION clear inside (air stream) dimension designated on the drawings. Duct liner shall meet the Erosion Test Method described in U.L. Pub. No. 181. All ductwork exposed to _ the outside air shall be internally insulated. END OF SECTION 15180-6 SECTION 15401 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The work covered under this section consists of furnishing all parts, labor, equipment, appliances, materials, and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of complete system of PLUMBING, as shown on the Drawings, as described in these Specifications, and as necessary to provide a complete and satisfactory operating installation. B. Without restricting the volume or generality of the above paragraph, the work shall include, but is not restricted to the following sections: 151&O Plumbing Pumps 15401 Plumbing Piping Systems 15402 Joining of Piping Systems 15403 Instllation of Piping Systems 15424 Electric Water Heater 15425 Gas Fired Water Heater 15442 Gas Accessories 15450 Fixtures C. Materials shall be first quality and shall be identified by make, weight, types and classes of product. D. Provide and install with all piping systems all fittings, nipples, adapters, unions, joints, traps, connections and other accessories as required to execute the layout shown or implied by the Drawings and Specifications. E. All systems shall terminate at points indicated on the Drawings with all final connections by the Contractor. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 UNDERGROUND DOMESTIC WATER PIPING & FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings 3" and Large~: All pipe 3" and larger used for underground water piping systems shall be Class 150 centrifugally cast close grained cast iron pipe arranged for mechanical joint or approved type joints designed to lock with rubber ring gaskets against displacement without caulking. Pipe shall conform in every detail to Federal Specifications W~-P421, E-4, Type II for cast iron pipe centrifugally cast in sand lined molds. Each length of pipe shall be plainly marked in such a fashion as to indicate the name or trademark or the manufacturer and the year in which the pipe was cast. 15401-1 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS Exterior surfaces shall be completely coated with coal tar pitch varnish to which sufficient oil has been added to effect a smooth coating, tough and tenacious when cold, _ not "tacky" and not brittle. Interior surfaces shall be completely coated with a cement mortar lining which shall conform in every detail to American Standard Specifications ASA A21, 4-1952 for CEMENT MORTAR LINING FOR CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS. B. Fittings: Suitable fittings where required shall conform .... to USA Standard A21-10 for mechanical joints. All fittings shall be coated outside with the same coal tar pitch varnish used on cast iron pipe. All fittings shall be coated inside with a cement mortar lining as used on cast iron pipe. C. Pipe and Fittings Smaller Than 3": .- 1.Pipe smaller than 3" located underground shall be Type "L" copper conforming to ASTM B-88-51. 2. Suitable fittings as required shall be wrought copper solder fittings or cast brass brazed fittings. 2.2 ABOVE GROUND AND INSIDE BUILDING DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND FITTINGS A.Pipe and Fittings 4" and Larger: Piping shall be cast iron with gasketed bolted flanged joints. B. Pipe and Fittings 3" and Smaller: 1. Piping shall be fabricated of Type "M" hard copper pipe made of deoxidized copper (99.9~ pure). No pipe smaller than 1/2" shall be used in this project. This Type M copper pipe shall conform in every detail to ASTM Standard Specifications for COPPER WATER TUBE, - Serial Designation B88-51, and it shall be provided in 20 foot straight length. 2. Fittings for 3" and smaller interior water piping systems shall be STREAMLINE Solder Fittings manufactured by STREAMLINE PIPE AND FITTINGS DIVISIONS, Mueller Brass Co, These wrought copper fittings shall be rigid and strong with openings machined to accurate capillary fit for the pipe. 15401-2 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 2.3 SANITARY SEWER AND STORM WATER PIPING SYSTEMS (Interior 2" and Lar~er A. All pipe used for house sewage and drainage purposes shall, unless specifically shown to the contrary, by service weight cast iron soil pipe arranged with bell-~nd-spigot joints. This pipe shall in every manner conform to ASTM Standard Specifications for CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS, Serial Designation A74-42, and the latest American Standards for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings approved by the American Standards Asssociation. B. All joints fabricated by the use of such soil pipe shall be packed with dry oakum run with molten lead and thoroughly caulked. All cast iron vent lines shall be fabricated of pipe conforming to the above specifications. C. An alternate method for joining piping shall be the use of "Ty-Seal" joints. Joints shall be positive double seal elastomeric compression type gaskets conforming to ASTM C- 564. D. All fittings used for house sewage and drainage lines shall be service weight cast iron moil pipe fittings. These fittings shall in every manner conform to ASTM Standard Specifications for cast iron soil pipe and fittings, Serial Designation A74-42, and the latest Edition of American Standards for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings approved by the American Standards Association. Fittings required for cast iron vent lines shall likewise conform to these Specifications. 2.4 ABOVE GROUND SOIL, WATER AND VENT PIPE FITTINGS A. Where chase or wall thickness is inadequate to conceal the required size in cast iron, shall be type "M" copper properly connected into the cast iron hub (utilizing heavy red brass ferrules and caulking in compliance with the local plumbing code). B. Storm sewer piping where wall space is inadequate to conceal cast iron shall be Schedule 40, galvanized steel with matched screwed fittings (above ground). 2.5 SUMP DISCHARGE PIPING Piping shall be Schedule 40 galvanized and shall be of screwed construction with galvanized matched cast iron drainage fittings. 15401-3 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 2.6 VENIS A. Vents for sizes 2" diameter and larger where exposed shall be cast iron as specified above. B. Vents for sizes 1 1/2" and smaller where exposed shall be galvanized steel pipe (Schedule 40) with galvanized malleable iron fittings. C. Vents for sizes 4" and larger either concealed or exposed shall be cast iron as per 2.03 above. 2.7 FLANGES A. All flanges used for the fabrication of 4" and larger water piping systems shall be Crane Company Screwed Pattern 150 pound Forged Steel Flanges which shall be hot dip galvanized after being machined. Such flanges shall be dimensioned, faced, drilled and spot faced to conform to the 150 pound American Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, B16.5. _ B. In instances in which a flange of the order mentioned above is attached to a valve or any other appurtenance having a flat face or having face dimensions which differ from those mentioned above, the facing of the steel flange shall be modified to correspond to the facing of the appurtenance to which it is connected. The nature of these operations shall be such as to create an effective joint. The arrangement shall, moreover, be such as to impose no undue straing in the case of the appurtenances which are attached to such flanges. 2.8 SOLDER Fittings for piping systems involving the use of copper pipe shall be fabricated with the use of Dunton's 95-5 (95% tin and 5% antimony) solder manufactured by W.M. Dunton Co., Providence, Rhode Island. 2.9 LEAD All lead used for making lead joints in cast iron piping systems shall be virgin pig lead. Under no circumstances shall any scrap lead be used. 2.10 JUTE Al! yarn used for caulking cast iron pipe shall consist of Yuca jute. It shall be specifically prepared for the service for which it is intended. It shall be clean stock having long fibre and it shall be carefully rolled. 15401-4 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 2.11 GASKETS Gaskets shall be used between the f~anges of all flanged joints. These gaskets shall be ring form gaskets dimensioned to fit accurately within the bolt circle. These 1/16" thick gaskets shall be machine cut from Garlock No. 24 Wire Insertion Red Rubber Sheet Packing. The inside diameter of such gaskets shall conform to the nominal pipe size and the outside diameter --- shall be such that the gasket extends outward to the studs or bolts employed in the flanged joint. 2.12 BOLTS AND NUTS All bolts used for the fabrication of flanged joints shall be square head carbon steel bolts with semi-finished hexagon nuts of American Standard Heavy Dimensions. This bolting material shall have a tensile strength of 60,000 psi and an elastic limit of 30,000 psi. Ail bolts and nuts must have full and clean cut threads. PART 3: EXECUTION "- A. Make all final connections at point of connection services. END OF SECTION -- 15401-5 SECTION 15402 JOINING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE ..... A. Provide all couplings, connectors, gaskets, compounds, etc., to make connection in all piping systems. PART 2: PRODUCTS A. Fittings on copper tubing shall be solder-joint type of wrought copper and shall be asembled with special solder, using a non-corrosive flux, all as recommended by the manufacturer of the tubing and fittings. Surfaces to be soldered shall be cleaned bright, use 95-5 solder for water piping and 50-50 solder for drains and vents. Heat copper tubing larger than 1" with ring torch. Wrap copper tubing with electrical tape wherever tubing touches a dissimilar metal. B. Joints in hub-and-spigot cast iron soil, waste and drain pipes and threaded pipe or caulking ferrules, shall be -- firmly packed with oakum and caulked with molten caulking lead at least 1" deep in one pouring and finish flush with hub. C. 3oints in hub-and-spigot cast iron pipe may be Ty-seal in lieu of lead and oakum at the Contractor's option, if acceptable by local code. 1. Joints shall be positive double seal elastomeric compression type gaskets conforming to ASTM C565. D. Threaded joints shall have American National taper screw threads, with graphite-and-oil compound applied to the male thread Connections between threaded pipe and ofl pipe shall be similar and threaded pipe shall have a ring or half-coupling scrwed on to form a spigot end. E. Connections between lead and cast iron hub-and-spigot pipe shall be made with red brass ferrules and wiped joints. F. Joints between cast iron and clay or concrete pipes shall be made with hot pour~ mineral filled bituminous joint compound. Packing shall be oakum. G. Bituminous joint compound shall be product which has been in successful use for at least five years. It shall adhere tightly to the pipe surface and when set shall have sufficient elasticity to permit slight movement of the pipe without injury to the joint. Compounds shall form tight joints under all conditions of trench and weather and shall not deteriorate when submerged in water or .... domestic sewage. 15402-1 JOINING OF PEUMBING SYSTEMS H. At the contractor's option NO-HUB Cast iron pipe may be used above ground only. The NO-HUB Cast iron pipe shal! be connected with NO-HUB couplings consisting of a neoprene gasket and a stainless steel corrugated shield. PART 3: EXECUTION A. All joints shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the best practices of the trades involved .... END OF SECTION 1 5&O2-2 6/84 SECTION 15403 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 DOMESTIC HOT, COLD AND CHILLED WATER A. Supply and install complete systems of hot and cold water distribution from water supply sources indicated on the _ Drawings to plumbing fixtures, drinking fountains, sinks, hydrants, et., as shown and or implied. B. Sopply and install control and automatic valves as shown on Drawings and as required. C. Provide sealed air chambers as required and install as per manufacturers' recommendations to eliminate water hammer. D. Properly pitch pipe, vent, etc., as noted and directed. 1.2 SANITARY SEWER AND STORM SEWER A. Supply and install complete gravity systems of drainage between plumbing fixtures, floor drains, roof drains, special equipment, etc., and the point of termination indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide traps for each untrapped fixture or device in the sanitarv sewer system. Trap shall be as close to fixtures as is practicable. PART 2: PRODUCT Refer to Sections 15401 and 15402 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEMS A. All systems shall be of a type suitable for each use. Perforated straps shall not be used in any work. Eor ferrous pipes, use malleable iron, adjustable, split ring, swivel hangers. Where several pipes are parallel at the same elevations, trapeze hangers may be used. For copper pipes up to and including three inches in size, use malleable iron copper-plated hangers. For copper pipes larger than three inches, use copper-plated clevis hangers. Hanger rod sizes shall conform to the following schedule: Pipe up to and including 2" 3/8" rods Pipe 2", 3" 1/2" rods -- Pipe 4", 5" 5/8" rods Pipe 6" 3/4" rods 15403-1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS -- B. All horizontal runs of exposed ferrous piping shall be .... suspended by meanns of hangers with the following maximum spacing: Pipe up to and including 1" 8 feet Pipe 1 1/2" and 2" 10 feet Pipe 2 1/2" and 3" 12 feet Pipe 3 1/2" and 4" 14 feet - .Pipe 5" and 6" 16 feet Pipe 8" and 10" 20 feet C. All horizontal runs of exposed copper piping shall be suspended by means of hangers with the following maximum spacing: ._ pipe up to 3/4" in size 5 feet Pipe 1" and 1 1/4" 8 feet pipe 1 1/2" and larger 10 feet D. There shall be a hanger within two feet of each elbow or tee. Additional supports shall be provided for valves, strainers, ..... etc. Cast iron pipe shall have not less than one hanger per length of pipe. Vertical risers shall be supported by approved riser clamps at each floor. Vertical pipes within a space shall have not less than two supports. Supports and hangers shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction in the piping systems. Where necessary to control expansion and contraction, the piping shall be guided and firmly anchored No piping shall be self-supporting not shall it be supported from equipment connections. Domestic hot and cold water hangers shall be sized to go around specified insulation with saddles being provided to protect the insulation. '" E. Systems shall have cleanouts and test tees as follows: 1. Cleanouts installed in connection with cast iron hub-and-spigot pipe shall consist of a long sweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to an easily accessible place or where indicated on the Drawings. An extra heavy cast brass ferrule with counter sunk trap screw cover shall be caulked into the hub of the fittings. 2. Test tees with cast iron cleanout plugs shall be installed at the foot of all soil, waste and drain stacks. 3. Cleanouts shall be provided at each change of direction, in interior horizontal runs at intervals not exceeding 50'. Cleanouts shall be brass caulked into the lines, and where they occur in walls or floor of finished areas, shall be provided with adjustable access plates. All interior cleanouts shall be same size as the pipe served up to 4" size and 4" for all larger lines. Exterior cleanouts shall consist of a concrete encased wye in the 15403-2 -' INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS line with cleanout leg extending upward therefrom and terminating in a concrete slab below grade At standard cast iron cleanout casting shall be set on this slab in such a manner as to be flush with finished grade and provide access through its cover to the cleanout. A removable concrete stopper shall be set in the open top of the cleanout pipe. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the ~ewer. Floor cleanouts shall be equal to Josam #56000. Wall cleanouts shall be equal to Josam #58710. F. Soil, waste, vent and drain piping for sanitary drainage, must be of size noted and be run as indicated Where elevations are given, pipes must be run in straight lines and have a uniform grade between the elevations noted and no branch drain shall have a less grade than that indicated for the main drain to which it is connected. Where elevations are not given, pipes shall be given a uniform grade of 1/&" /foot where possible but not less than 1/8"/foot. All overhead pipes must be kept as close to ceilings as possible unless otherwise noted or indicated. The soil and waste pipes so shown and noted on the Drawings shall be extended as vent pipes to above the roof line and project above roof line not less than 12" nor more than 18". Where so noted or indicated on D~awings, two or more vent pipes shall be connected together and extended as one pipe. connections on which the fixture vented is located so as to prevent the use of any vent lines as a waste. G. Changes in pipe sizes on soil, waste and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by 45 degree wyes, half wyes, long-sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, except that sanitary tees may be used on vertical stacks and short 1/& bends or elbows may be used in soil and waste lines where the change in direction of flow is from the horizontal to the vertical and on the discharge from water closets. H. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by Contractor and shall be worked into place withoutspringing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken the structural portion of the building. Service pipe, valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other surfaces to permit not less than 1/2" between finished coverings on the different sufaces. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. I. Pipe drains specified, required or indicated on the Drawings shall in mechanical rooms or habitable spaces, consist of %" globe valves with renewable discs and 3/4" hose nipples shall be installed at low points on the hot and cold water piping. All piping shall grade to the drains. 15403-3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS J. Air chambers, 12" long and same pipe 'size as riser shall be provided at top of each Plumbing Riser. In addition, air chambers shall be provided on all supplies, both hot and cold .... near each faucet control valve, or flush valve as applicable, and shall consist of 12" vertical lengths of pipe same diameter as branch supply, with cap. Provide shock absorbers where indicated on Drawings. K. Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of piping. Runs of pipe over 50' in length shall be --- anchored to the wall or to the supporting construction about midway on the run. L. Locations and sizes of chases and openings necessary for the proper installation of the work shall be determined in advance and provided during the erection of the work. Where pipes pass through water proofing membranes, flashing sleeves shall be installed with an integral flashing flange to which a flasing shield can be soldered and the space shall be made watertight. M. Where insulated and/or uninsulated pipes pass through floors, finished wall or finished ceilings they shall be fitted with chromium-plated escutcheons of an approved pattern. 3.2 ISOLATION Vibration and noise created in any part of the building by the operation of equipment will be extremely objectionable and precautions shall be taken against the same by isolating the various items of equipment from the building structure by use of Korfund isolators as may be necessar'y to eliminate all excessive vibration and objectionable noise produced by any equipment. All equipment having moving parts shall be isolated from the building structure by means of Korfund isolators. Equipment manufacturers' recommendations __ shall be followed in the isolation of the equipment. Vibration frequency of the mounted equipment will be less than 1/3 of the lowest rotational frequency of the equipment during its normal operation. 3.3 VALVE CHART AND LABEL Prepare and install, in suitable glazed frame, typewritten valve charts giving the number, location, and function of each line valve installed. Install on each valve stem a stamped l~" diameter brass tag plainly numbered corresponding to the number indicated on the "' above chart. Tag shall be secured to valves by heavy brass figure eight hooks. 3.4 CLEANING A. All piping shall be thoroughly flushed with water before placing in operation. As soon as the water in the piping runs clear, the strainers shall be cleaned and the system placed in 15403-4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS operating condition. B. Ends of screw-jointed pipes must be cut square so as to seat in bottom of recess of the fittings, and must be reamed out. .. Bending of soil, waste, drain and vent pipes will not be permitted. C. See ~rchitectural Plans for areas having suspended ceilings, furring, etc., where piping can be concealed. D. In no case shall piping be run exposed except as permitted by notations on Drawings. See other paragraphs for insulation required for piping not protected by burial in ground or structural slabs, etc. E. Particular care shall be taken in running piping so as not to interfere with finished electrical work. In the event of conflict location priority shall be afforded electrical work so as not to effect the appearance of the building adversely. 3.5 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS A. Upon completion of all tests and necessary repairs- or replacements all water piping systems shall be subjected to a disinfection procedure as herein specified. The systems to be disinfected shall include hot and cold waterpiping, drinking water piping, and any other systems that may be connected to the same supply source. The disinfectant shall be applied to all piping included in the Contract or from the main cutoff valve through all tanks, pumps and other appurtenances connected thereto. --- B. The systems shall be thoroughly flushed with water ro remove sediment. Following this flushing, they shall be disinfected in accordance with one of the following methods: 1. the system shall be chlorinated that a chlorine residual of not less than 10 ppm remains in the water after 24 hours standing. Water from the source of supply shall be controlled mo as to flow slowly during the application of chlorine. The rate of chlorine mixture flow shall be in such proportion to the rate of water entering pipe that the chlorine dose applied shall produce 10 ppm after 24 hours standing. This may be expected with an application of 25 ppm, although some conditions may require more. 2. For emergency repairs where a shorter retention is necessitated, it will be permissible to have a contract period of one hour with 100 ppm chlorine concentration. C. In the process of ~hlorinating the system, all valves and other appurtenances shall be operated while the pipeline is filled with the chlorating agent. 15403-5 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS D. Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the system at its extremities until the replacement water throughout its length shall upon test be approved by the public health authority having jurisdiction. This satisfactory quality of water delivered by the new system should continue for a period 9f at least three days as demonstrated by laboratory examination of samples taken from a tap located and installed in such a way as to prevent outside contamination. After the systems are drained, they shall be thoroughly flused with fresh water and returned to service. E. Costs of tests and disinfection shall be borne by the Contractor who must furnish the Owner, with a copy to the Engineer, a certificate authenticated by proper public health authority that all required water and piping tests and disinfection have been satisfactorily made. __ F. Contractor shall remain on the job after final acceptance to provide competent start up and operating instructions and information to Owner's plant operating employees. Such "' instruction shall not exceed eight working hours/day and shall be done at mutually agreeable times or time within the first week after acceptance .... G. Contractor shall rod all sewer lines in presence of Owner's representative before acceptance. END OF SECTIO~ 15403-6 6/84 SECTION 15424 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER PART 1: GENERAL A. Furnish and install hot water heating systems as shown on the Drawings. B. Install equipment where shown on the Drawings. C. System shall include where specified, electric heaters, piping, valves, insulation, pumps, controls, etc. D. Refer to other sections. E. Refer to diagrams on Drawings. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER HEATERS A. Equal to Ruud, electrical water heater, glass-lined tank, 125 lb. W.P.., ASME; 3-year guarantee, single control step, U.L. approved, Internal fusing, low water cut-off, magnetic contractor, high limit controls, T & P valve, control panel door safety interlock, temperature gauge, jacketed and ._ insulated. Heater capacities will be as scheduled on Drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION '" A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. B Ail water heaters shall have a five year guarantee against defective workmanship and materials, and leakage due to corrosion unless noted otherwise. C. Run relief piping from relief valve to floor drain or a noted. END OF SECTION 15424-1 6/84 SECTION 15425 GAS FIRED WATER HEATER PART 1: GENERAL A. Furnish and install hot water heating systems as shown on the .... Drawings. B. Install equipment where shown on the Drawings. C. System shall include where specified, gas fired heaters, piping, valves, insulation, pumps, controls, etc. D. Refer to other sections. E. Refer to diagrams on Drawings. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER HEATERS A. Equal to Ruud, gas fired water heater, glass-lined tank, 125 lb. W.P.., A.G.A & ASME; 3-year guarantee, single control step, U.L. approved, low water cut-off, high limit controls, T & P valve, temperature gauge, jacketed and insulated. Heater capacities will be as scheduled on Drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. B. All water heaters shall have a five year guarantee against defective workmanship and materials, and leakage due to corrosion unless noted otherwise. C. Run relief piping from relief valve to floor drain or a noted. END OF SECTION 15425-1 SECT1ON 15442 GAS ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: -- A. Governing Provisions: The "A.I.A. General Conditions" and Section 15010 "Supplementary Conditions for Mechanical Specifications" shall govern work under this section whether attached hereto or not. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Section 151OC Basic Materials and Methods 1.2 SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010. Indicate materials, quantities, sizes and installation details. !.3 COORD1XATIOX A'. Install materials and equipment at proper time to keep pace with the general construction and the work of other trades involved. 1.4 CODES A. The Local Plumbing Code latest edition with all amendments and other local and state codes which are applicable, and in accordance with Gas Company recommendations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Gas Pipe and Fittings: All gas piping inside the building and above gra~ shall be Schedule 40 Standard weight black steel pipe with black malleable iron screwed type fittings. All connections, elbows, reducers, flanges and special fittings shall be made using forged steel welding fittings of the same weight and the pipe to which they are attached. Fittings and flanged unions shall be as manufactured by Crane Co. or approved equal and carry standard catalogue numbers. All branch lines shall be made with 45 degrees or 90 degree tees out of the top of mains. B. Polyethylene piping may be used in exterior buried piping systems ii approved by local administrative authority. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 1NSTALLAT1OX A. Gas Pipe and Fittings: 1 GAS ACCESSORIES 1. Furnish and install Rockwell, Nordstrom, Crane, Walworth, or approved equal, plug type stop cocks in the gas lines, in each branch line or riser, serving two or more outlets where shown on the drawings or specified. An individual stop cock shall be provided at each outlet and a union at the connection to each item of gas consuming equipment. In each case, the union shall be installed between the stop cock and the item of equipment served. 2. In no case shall the firing valve, control constructed as a suitable cut-off and a separate cut-off cock or valve shall be provided in each such case. In addition, master shut-off valves shall be provided and installed at the points indicated, and at the meter, "All Thread" nipples or location in the gas piping system 3. Furnish and install a complete ventilation system of air tight ducts or piping for all concealed gas lines walls, chases, ceiling spaces, crawl spaces, etc. Ventilation ducts shall be Schedule &O black pipe Standard weight cast iron, Type "L" soft co.pper tube, or welded 20 gauge galvanized ductwork. Terminate all ducts 2" inside inhabited spaces and ventilate to above grade at outside entries. 4o Provide gas cock on gas piping at each end of each conduit. Install complete systems in accordance with all applicable local and gas codes. 5. All gas piping run underground, or that may come in contact with concrete or the earth, shall be protected by mill wrapping applied in accordance with the standards of the local gas company, and field fabricated joints shall be completely sealed and protected in accordance with their standard practice or recommendations. 6. This Contractor shall arrange with the local gas company to provide an adequate service line, regulator and meter. The meter loop, service line, and vents shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor at locations shown on the drawings. The meters and regulators will be furnished and installed in this location and as may be required by the local gas company. This Contractor shall pay all charges for the service line, regulators and meters and the installation of these items. This Contractor shall provide a complete and operable system in accordance with local gas company recommendations. END OF SECTION 15a~2-2 6/84 SECTION 15450 FIXTURES PART 1: GENERAL A. Supply and install all plumbing fixtures indicated on the Drawings. B. Refer to Architectural Plans for exact location on all plumbing fixtures. C. Provide all necessary fixtures and connection to make same operate to meet code. PART 2: PRODUCTS -.- 2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Fittings and piping shall be brass and wherever exposed, shall be polished chrome-plated. Provide tight wall or floor escutcheons of chrome-plated brass wherever pipes pass through floors, walls or ceiling. All porcelain or vitreous china shall be clean, smooth and bright. Ail shall be warranted not to craze, color or 'scale. All plumbing fixtures shall be white in color; all water closet seats shall be white. All hot and cold water supplied shall have chromeplated process stops. Plumbing fixtures shall be of the following types, furnished complete with all fittings, mounting flanges, carriers, cap setting compound, etc. B. Plumbing fixtures shall be as scheduled on the Drawings, or approved equal. PART 3: EXECUTION A. Install all fixtures in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Clean all fixtures after installation. END OF SECTION 15450-1 SECTION 15652 REFRIGERATION EOUiPMENI PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Governing Provisions: The "A.I.A. General Conditions," and Section 15010, "Supplementary Conditions for Mechanical Specifications" shall govern work under this section whether attached hereto or not. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Section 15050 Basic Materials amd Methods 1.2 SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with Section 15CIO. Indicate materials, quantities, sizes and installation details. 1.3 COORDINAtiON A. Install materials and equipment at proper time to keep pace with the general construction and the work of the other trades ~nvolved. B. This contractor shall familiarize himself with all Owner furnished items in order that he is able to make proper connection to such items. PART 2: PRODUC%S 2.1 AiR COOLED DX CONDENSING UNITS A. All condensing units shall be assembled on a heavy-gauge integral steel base. Units will be weatherproofed and include hermetic compressor's~, condenser coil(si which allow access :c all controls, and hp!:ing charge of R-22. Units have a hinged control access panel a~d removable panel~s] which allow access to al! controls and motor components. B. Unit frame one-piece welded assembly of heavy-guage zinc-coated steel. Exterior surfaces will be cleaned, phosphatized and finished with an air-dry enamel finish. C. Each unit shall have two separate and independent refrigeraticn circuits. Each refrigeration circuit will have an integral subcooling circuit. b. Direct-drive, 1, 75~ rpm, hermetic r~ziprocating compresser with integral sucticn accumulator; centrifugal oil pump; oil filter screen and magnetic disks; oil level sightglass; oil charging valve; twc-point lubrication fcr each bearing and connecting rod; crankcase heater and well: double mesh suctien inlet screen; high s:rength, nonflexing ring-type suction and 15652-~ REFRIGERATION EOUIPMENT discharge valves; and rubber-in-shear isolators. Motors will .... be suction gas cooled and have a voltage utilization range plus or minus 10 percent of nameplate voltage. Two winding thermostats embedded between the three motor windings will _. protect against excessive winding temperatures. E. The compressors shall be provided with a standard factory 5 year warranty. 2.2 CONDENSER FAN AND MOTORS A. Vertical discharge, direct drive fans, statically and dynamically balanced, with steel blades and zinc-plated steel hubs. Three-phase motors with permanently lubricated ball bearings, built-in current and thermal overload protection,and .... weather-tight slingers over bearings. 2.3 CONDENSER COIL A. V-type, air-cooled. Configurated aluminum 'fin secondary surface mechanically bonded to primary surface of 3/8 inch OD seamless copper tubing. Subcooling curcuit(s) with liquid accumulators) standard. Factory tested at 450 psig air pressure. Vacuum dehydrated. 2.4 LOW AMBIENT OPERATION A. Standard start and operation of approximately 40 degrees F at minimum load. Optional head pressure control damper permits start and operation to 0 degrees F and includes all necessary controls for low ambient operation. 2.5 STANDARD CONTROL SCHEME Two-step capacity modulation with ll5-volt control circuit including .._ fusing and control power transformer. Wired complete with magnetic contractors for compressor and condenser fan motors, three-let, solid-state compressor overload protection. High and low pressure cutouts mounted in compressor casing. Nonrecycling pumpdown and reset relay. PART 3: EXECUTION A. Contractor shall provide necessary charge of refrigerant and oil to satisfactorily operate the compressor units. B. Contractor shall set each unit on a flat and level, suitable reinforced concrete pad. C. .The manufacturer of the units shall furnish, for a period of 8 working days, a factory trained service engineer who shall adjust and start the water chilling units and instruct the owner's operator on the care and operation of the units. -- 15652-2 REFRIGERATION EOUIPMENT Manufacturer shall be responsible for repair or replacement of any parts which fail during the first year of operation. END OF SECTION 15652-3 SECTION 15802 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Governing Provisions: The "A.I.A. General Conditions," and Section 15010, "Supplementary Conditions for Mechanical specifications" shall govern work under this section whether attached hereto or not. B. Provide complete air supply, return, outisde air and exhause systems including fans, terminal devices and other components specified herein. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Section 15180 Insulation Section 15950 System Balancing 1.2 SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010. Indicate materials, quantities, sizes and installation details. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Install materials and equipment at proper time to keep pace with the general construction and the work of the other trades involved. 1.4 STANDARD CONDITION Inside: 75 degrees F. db, 50% R.H. Outside: Summer: 102 degrees F. db, 75 degrees F. wb Winter: 2 degrees F. db PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK A. Rigid ductwork: all air conditiong and exhaust ductwork, plenum, casings and sheet metal, connections shall be fabricated of new joint-forming quality galvanized prime grade copper bearing sheets. 15802-1 AIR DISTRIBUTION B. Rectangular Low Pressure ducts: Shall be contructed of the following minimum gauges: Largest Dimension of Duct Gauge of Metal Up to 12" No. 26 U.Do Gauge 13" to 30" No. 24 U.S. Gauge 31" to 54" No. 22 U.S. Gauge 55" to 84" No. 20 U.S. Gauge 85" & above NO. 18 U.S. Gauge C. Round Low Pressure Ducts: Shall be spiral wound as manufactured by United Sheet Metal Company, or approved equal. D. Oval Medium Pressure Ducts: Shall be sprial flat oval as manufactured by Untied Sheet Metal Company, or approved equal. E. Rectangular Ductwork Fittings: Shall be fabricated per SMACCA Standards for low pressure ductwork. F. Round and Oval Ductwork fittings: Shall be as manufactured by United Sheet Metal Co. and/or as detailed on the drawings. G. Ductwork joint sealant shall be equal to MMM EC-800. H. Flexible Connections: Connections to air conditioning units and fans shall be by woven asbestos, weighing not less than 36 ounces per square yard and at least 1/16" thick. They shall contain not less than 80~ asbestos nor more than 20% cotton. Neoprene coated glass fabric weighing 30 ounces per sqare yard will be acceptable. 2.2 FILTERS A. Type Filters shall be 2" throw away type and shall be FARR 30-30 filter similar types by Cambridge, Microtron or approved equal, o Maximum velocity through filter media shall be 500 FPM. B. Temporary Filters At the time of construction and until final acceptance by Owner, all units shall be loaded with specified filter panels, to fully protect all coils and air distribution systems from dirt and debris, also replace such filters as directed by the Architect during construction period. Install specified filters for final acceptance at time as directed by the Architect. 15802-2 6/84 AIR DISTRIBUTION 2.3 PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS A. Packaged Rooftop Units shall be factory assembled, tested, piped, internally wired and shipped in one piece complete with an operating charge of refrigerant and oil. Units shall be direct expansion cooling only. Packages shall be complete with all operating and safety controls. All units shall be factory test run and cooling capacity shall be rated in accordance with A.R.I. standards. B. Unit casings shall be phosphatized galvanized steel with factory baked enamel finish. Ail assembly screws shall be zinc plus zinc-chromate coated. 18 gauge screw fastened access panels with neoprene gaskets shall be provided for all system components requiring service. All interior surfaces in contact with the air steam shall have one (1") inch mat-faced fiberglass insulation. The unit casing shall be assembled in such a manner to be waterproof and provide for natural drainage. The unit base shall be watertight and constructed with 14 gauge load bearing members. C. All units shall be provide~ with direct drive hermetic reciprocating compressors. Compressors shall have factory installed isolation mounting. Each unit shall be equipped with integral suction accumulators, oil filter screen and magnetic disks. An oil level sight glass, oil changing valve and two point lubrication for each connecting rod shall be standard. High strengh nonflexing ring tyFe suction and discharge valves shall be provided. Compressor motor shall be suction gas cooled, provided with a crankcase heater and have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10% of name plate. Two winding thermostats shall be imbedded between the motor windings. Standard safety controls shall include high and low pressure cutouts, oil pressure cutouts, non-recycling pump down and reset relay. D. The evaporator coil shall be constructed of seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to heavy duty aluminum fins of configurated design. Coils shall be dual circuited with independent thermal expansion valves. Coils shall be factory pressure and leak tested at 300 PS!G. E. The condensing coil shall be fabricated of 3/8" O.D. seamless copper tubing with configurated aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubing. Sub-cooling circuits with liquid accumulators shall be standard. Coils shall be factory tested to 450 PSIG air pressure and then vacuum dehydrated. 15802-3 AIR DISTRIBUTION F. Condenser fans shall be vertical discharge, direct drive fans. Fans shall have steel blades and zinc plated steel hubs and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Motors shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings, built in current and thermal overload protection and weathertight slingers over bearings. G. Supply air fans shall be double inlet, forward curved fans with adjustable sheave drives. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated ball or roller bearings of the pillow block type. H. Unit will be provided with factory installed pneumatic transducer for interface with pneumatic zone demand systems. The pneumatic transducer will convert pneumatic signal to VDC signals to operate unit cooling functions. The transducer shall operate on pneumatic signal range of 10.5 to 18 psig indicating setpoint. I. Units shall be as manufactured by CArrier, Trane, Lenmox cr York. 2.4 FANS A. Roof exhausters shall be Cook, Penn, Acme, Greenheck or Jenn Air. The fans shall be complete with weatherproof protection for fans and motors, centrifugal wheels, automatic shutters, non-fused disconnect switches, bird screens, vari-speed drives on belt driven equipment, etc. Fans shall be all aluminum. The fans shall be firmly bolted to the curb on which they rest. Fans shall be A.M.C.A. rated. Provide factory curb to match fan. B. Propeller fans shall be Cook, Penn, Greenheck, Ilg, or Trane. The fams shall be complete with guards over the drive, gravity shutters etc. Furnish with a factory applied prime coat of paint. Fans shall be A.M.C.A. rated. C. Belted vent sets shall be Cook, Penn Greenheck, Ilg or Jenn Air. The fans shall be completely weatherproof. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT JOINTS A. Duct joint construction, including gauges, transverse, and longitudinal bracing and supports in accordance with "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards" published by the Sheet !5602-~ 6/8~ AIR DISTRIBUTION Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc., will be acceptable. B. The selection of the type joints and methods of bracing shall be approved by the Architect. C. Turning vanes of the double thickness type shall be installed in all square elbows and where shown on plans. Turning vanes shall be as manufactured by Turtle and Bailey or approved equal. Vanes may be fabricated to an approved detail after such detail has been been approved by the Architect. Provide single blade turning vanes (as approved) when turning vanes are installed in 90 degree elbows having unequal entering and leaving dimensions and in bends less than 90 degrees. D. Ductwork shall be fabricated in a manner to prevent the seams or joints being cut for the installation of grilles or registers. 3.2 FIRE DAMPERS Fire dampers shall be installed as shewn and where may be otherwise requi~ed by local or state ordinances. Access doors shall be provided to adequately service the fire dampers and the fusible links furnished with the fire dampers. Provide sleeves as required by local codes. 3.3 DUCT SUPPORTS All sheet metal ductwork shall be securely hung from the building construction. All ducts shall be hung adjacent to the seam in the duct and shall be secured in a suitable manner tc both the duct and the building construction. All vertical riser ducts shall be supported at each floor with angle iron secured to the ducts and set in the structural menters. These angles shall be the same size as specified for bracing. Horizontal duct supports shall be as follows: Ducts up through 59" maximum side lk c 18 ga. band iron, 8'-0" centers maximum with hangers bend over 1" at the bottom and fastene~ at this point with selftapping screws. Screws required to secure hangers side of duct at 6" intervals. Ducts 60" and larger maximum side 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 1/8" angles or 3/8 rod 8-0" on centers maximum for ducts 60" through 90" and 4'-C' on centers maximum on ducts larger than 90". Secure to bracing angles at bottom of duct or to 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 1/8" trapeze angle. 15802-5 On the inlet and outlet of each piece of air handling equipment, contractor shall furnish and install a flexible connection not less than 3" long. A metal band shall be sewn inside the material for each end of the connection and this metal band shall be secured to the ductwork and the unit involved. Sleeve, bucks, etc. in concrete construction required for installation of all ductwork shall be furnished and installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. 3.4 CLEANING A. Before the grilles or diffusers are installed, all fans and air conditioning units shall be operated and all debris and foreign matter shall be removed from the ducts. The air conditioning units shall be thoroughly cleaned, and the drain pans shall be thoroughly cleamed, and the grilles shall then be installed. B. See Section 15180 - Insulation for Duct Liner. Duct sizes shown on the drawings are clear air stream dimension. C. All access doors in ducts shall be provided with suitable frames, hinged, hold down devices required for complete and ready access. Where installed in insulated duct, insulate all doors a minimum of 2" thick on the interior of the door. Submit shop drawings for approval before installation. D. Mount all air handlers on spring type isolators. END OF SECTION 15802-6 S£CTION 15901 CONTROLS PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Governing Provisions: The "A.I.A. General Conditions," and Section 15010, "Supplementary Conditions for Mechanical Specifications" shall govern work under this section whether attached hereto or not. B. This Contractor shall engage the services of a qualfied Temperature Control Contractor to furnish all materials, supplies, labor (except electrical) and services for, required in connection with, or properly incidental to, a complete pneumatic, electrical and electronic system of temperature control for heating, ventilating and air-conditioning. C. Wiring and conduits shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Section 15050 Basic Materials acd Methods Section 15802 Air Distribution Section 15950 System Balancing 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010. Indicate materials, quantities, sizes and installation details. Include control system diagrams, a written sequence of operation and equipment data sheets. B. Diagrammatic layouts of the automatic controls sytem shall be provided which shall show all controls equipment the function of each item together with a sequence of operation and instructions for the operation of the system. These instructions shall be suitab!v framed and mounted. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 DAMPERS A. Dampers shall be Johnson Service Company type D-1300 or equal for outside air service and shall be of the opposed blade louver type with not less than 13 guage welded steel frames and galvanized finish, blades shall have interlocking edges. Al! blades shall be edged with neoprene if the damper is to operate in outside air service, either as an intake or as a discharge damper. Damper blades shall have steel trunnions mounted in nylon or oilite bearings. Dampers shall not be more than forty-eight inches (48") in length between bearings All 5007 CONTROLS modulating dampers shall be of the opposed blade type. Blades shall not be over six inches (6") in width and not less than 13 gauge galvanized steel. All hardware shall be zinc plated. B. The maximum leakage shall be 10 CYM per square foot of damper with 4" wg pressure differential. One damper motor shall be furnished for each 16 square feet of damper area. 2.2 DAMPER AND VALVE OPERATORS Operators shall be of the neoprene diaphragm type with adjustable springs and stops to permit proper synchronization of dampers. They shall be ample in size to handle the load imposed on them, shall be equipped with positive positioners where specifically required, and shall conform to the requirements detailed in the sequence description of this Specification. 2.3 FIRESTATS A manual reset high limit type thermostat shall sense return air temperature to each air handling system and exhaust fan, and shall stop its respective fan on a temperature rise to a predetermined setting. 2.4 ROOM THERMOSTATS Room thermostats shall be night set-back as manufactured by the company of the equipment they serve with lockable covers. 2.5 ECONOMIZERS Shall be manufactured by the company of the equipment they serve, using enthalpy control. Minimum outside air adjustment set to ten percent (10%). 2.6 TIME CLOCK Furnish and install a system of time clocks, for ~he various H.V.A.C. systems, having individual starting and stopping points for each day. A spring wound interval timer shall be provided to override the time clock for a pre-determined period up to 6 hours. (A night setback thermostat, locking type, shall override the time clock to cycle the fans on a temperature drop to 55 degrees) Each air handling system shall be controlled by an "Off-Auto" switch. When in the "OFF" position, the fan will not run. When in the "Auto" position, the time switch and its overrides shall control. 2.7 INSTALLATION REOUIREMENTS All wiring and conduit in connection with the automatic temperature control system, except within temperature control panels, shall be furnished and installed under Electrical Work. Wiring shall be _ 15901-2 CONTROLS terminated bv connecting to the temperature control device or numbered terminal strips as indicated on drawings furnished by the Temperature Control Manufacture. All wiring shall be color coded and shall be tagged for future identification. Except as otherwise noted, all electrical temperature control manufacturers, shall be installed under Electrical Work. 2.8 SERVICE GUARANTEE A. After completion of the installation, the Temperature Control Contractor shall adjust all thermostats, control valves, motors, damper linkages and other equipment provided under this contract. He shall place them in complete operating condition and shall demonstrate to the Architect's representative that the controls are working satisfactorily. Instructions shall be given the Owner in the operation of the control system. Ihe control system herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. If, within one (I) year from the date of acceptance by the Architects, any of the equipment herein described is proven to be defective in workmanship or material (except electrical wiring done by others), it shall be adjusted, repaired or replaced free of charge by the Iemperature Control Contractor: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 The Temperature Control Contractor shall furnish during the bidding period, wiring diagrams, including interlock wiring (an intergrated electrical interlock wiring diagram showing the sequence of air conditioning, heating and ventilating equipment starters, saftey devices, temperature controls, etc.) to the bidding electrical contractors for them to make an accurate estimate of cost. These diagrams shall include the type and size of all wire and cable to be used in the wiring of the temperature control and interlock systems. 3.2 All automatic control valves, and all automatic dampers specified in this sub-section, shall be furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor and installed under his direction by the Mechanical Contractor. Also, the Mechanical C~ntractor shall install all wells and receptacles, shall provide all openings required for thermostat bulbs and sensing elements in piping, ductwork or mechanical equipment and shall mount all damper operators as directed. 3.3 All switches, panels, electronic modules, etc., furnished and/or installed by teh Temperature Control Contractor shall be indentified by means of plates made of plastic or of black anodized aluminum, suitably engraved. Punched type will not be accepted. 3.4 Furnish an engraved plate on the main control panel with: A. The name of the project. B. The date. C. The Architect's name. D. The Mechanical Engineer's name. E. The Mechanical Contractor's name. F. The General Contractor's name. END OF SECTION !59nl-3 6/8l, SECTION 15950 SYSTEM BALANCING PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Governing Provisions: The "A.I.A. General Conditions," and Section 15010, "Supplementary Conditions for Mechanical Specifications" shall govern work under this section whether attached hereto or not. B. Testing, adjustment and start-up of mechanical systems shall be preformed by personnel certified by the American Air Balance Council or similar organization. Ail necessary test equipment, instruments, materials, and labor required for performing all the tests described shall be provided as part of the work of this division. C. Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment, to check, adjust, and balance system commponents to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. D. Prior to requesting a final inspection, this contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer complete reports on the balance and operations of the system, bearing the seal of a certified air balance technican. The form to be used is attached hereto. E. Make an inspection in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at the time make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the system components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The balancing technician shall be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing and logging the data on the performance of fan, all dampers in the duct systems and all air distributien devices. The Mechanical Contractor and the suppliers of the equipment installed shall all cooperate with the balancing technician to provide all necessary data on the design and proper application of the systemat components and shall furnish all labor and materials required to eliminate any deficiencies or malperformance. B. During the balancing the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between contro!ling instru- 15950-1 SYSTEM BALANCING' ments and calibrated by the Temperature Controls Sub-Contractor using data submitted by the balancing technician. The total variation shall not exceed 3 degrees from the present median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. C. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 3 degrees within each separately controlled space, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Mechanical Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives an/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volume. 1.3 REPORT A. Before final acceptance is made, the balancing technician shall fill out the attached form. B. The data shall be neatly entered on appropriate fcrms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. C. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of four copies shall be provided. Do The typed test data sheets, and correlation of the test results shall Ee certified to be true and correct by a certified air balance technician over the signature of the Contractor. Such signature shall be executed by an officer if the Contracting firm is a corporation, a partner if a partnership, or by the Owner if a sole ownership. This data shall be delivered to designated members of the building operating personnel not less than three days after the test are complete. E. When oppostie season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, reading, etc. shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.4 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods, the balancing technican shall instruct .... the building operating personnel in the construction and operation of all equipment. 15950-2 6/8~ SYSTEM BALANCING B. Typewritten operating instructions, automatic control system diagrams, and control sequence description shall be prepared, framed under glass, and mounted in location selected by the Owner. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Section 15050 Basic Material and Methods Section 15802 Air Distribution Section 15901 Controls END OF SECTION 15950-3 SECTION 16010 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1; GENERAL 1.1 SPECIAL NOTICE A. Each Contractor shall read all relevant documents, become fami- liar with the job, the scope of work, type of general cons- truction, architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical drawings and the specifications. Each contractor shall also familiarize himself with the purpose for which these drawings have been prepared and shall become cognizant of all the - details involved. B. The term "contractor" used in these sections of Specifications shall mean the contractor whose work is covered by that section. C. When the term "Engineer" is used in this section of specif- ication it shall mean the consulting electrical and electrical engineer. 1.2 scoPE OF WORK A. The work under this section of the specifications shall include all labor and materials noted, required or necessary for the complete Electrical Installation described herein and/or on the drawings. All work shall be completed to the entire satisfaction of the Architect and Engineer. B. This work includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Electric service and metering hereinafter specified incl- uding fees, permits, and provisions for metering equipment. 2. Complete systems of distribution and utilization for light and power. 3. Empty conduits system for public telephones. 4. Lighting fixtures and lamps. 5. Rough-in and final connections to mechanical equipment. 6. Rough-in and final connection to owner's furnished equipment. 1.3 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. This contractor shall contact the local power company and make 16010-1 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK all arrangements, pay all fees, and acquire all permits as required for the installation of the electrical service and systems as hereinafter specified and shown.. B. The local Power Company will furnish and install Primary, Transformer, metering and make all terminations to the transformers. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all secondary electrical service (Refer to the plans). Verify requirements with the local Power Company. Service characteristics will be as shown on the drawings. 1.a FEES AND PERMITS Each contractor shall obtain all permits, inspections, and approvals applicable to this trade, as required by regulatory authorities. All fees and costs of any nature whatsoever incidental to these permits, inspections and approvals shall be assumed and paid by the Contractor. The general building permit will be obtained under other sections of the work and not portion of the costs involved in obtaining this permit will be paid bv the contractor for the electrical trade. The pro-rata costs, if any, or utilities serving this property will be paid for by the Owner and shall not be included as part of this Contract. 1.5- CODES AND STANDARDS A. Ail materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable local, county, state and national codes, specifications, ordinances, utility company regulations and specified industry standards. B. In case of difference between building codes, specifications, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. The contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any such difference. Should the contractor perform any work that does not comply with these requirements, he shall bear costs arising in correcting these deficiencies. C. In addition to the above, if the following industry standards and codes are more stringent, they shall take precedence. IEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IES - Illuminating Engineering Society ~EC - National Electric Code NEMA - National Electric Manufactruer's Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association UL - Underwriter's Laboratories 16010-2 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 1.6 MANUFACTURE'S DIRECTIONS The manufacturers' published directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage, protection, installation, piping and wiring of - all equipment and material. Should the contractor perform any work that does not comply with the manufacturers' directions or instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising in .... connection with deficiencies. 1.7 GUARANTEE SERVICE .... The Electrical Contractor shall furnish the Architect, for transmittal to the Owner, the name, address and telephone number of those persons responsible for service on systems and equipment covered by the "Guarantee." The persons named shall be regular employees of the contractor and shall be located locally to the job and telephone calls from the project shall not be toll calls. 1.8 SUBMITTAL DATA A. See General Specifications - Section __, Division B. Each contractor shall, within thirty days after award of the contract, make a submittal of all proposed equipment to be used on the job. C. The submittal shall be handled as follows: The contractor shall submit through regular channels as specified in the Architectural Section of the specifications, at least seven copies of the submittal data. Upon receipt of this data, the Engineer will check, stamp and sign it, 'retain one copy, and return the remainder for distribution. D. Before submittal of final data, the contractor shall check each piece of apparatus, equipment and accessory to insure -' compliance with the requirements fo the plans and specifications and shall clearly mark each submittal with his signature to indicate that they are in full compliance. An>' submittals received without the Contractor's signature may be returned without being checked by the Engineer's office. E. Each set of data from any one manufacturer shall be bound in an individual folder properly indexed and marketed to indicate job, contractor, supplier and purpose for which data enclosed is being offered. 1.9 EOUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. All major equipment such as panelboards, disconnects, and other similar equipment shall be identified by the attachment of name -- 16010-3 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK plates constructed form laminated phenolic engraved plastic 3 ply with black surface and white interior core at least 1/16 inch thick. Engraved lettering shall be condensed gothic at least k inch high and properly spaced for easy and legible reading. Plates shall be attached t6 equipment by the use of a - permanent type adhesive or chromium plated screws. B. Complete all identification cards for switches, starters, and ._ other devices install panelboards, and similar pieces of equip- ment, on a typewriter in a neat manner and insert the card in the card holders behind a sheet of clear plastic. 1.10 RECORD5 FOR THE OWNER A. Each contractor shall obtain at his own expense a complete set ._ of blue line prints on which he shall keep an accurate record of the installation of all materials and systems covered by his contractual agreement. The record shall indicate the location of all equipment and the routing of all systems. All conduit buried in concrete slabs, walls, and bleow grade shall be located by dimension unless a surface mounted device in each space indicates the exact locaton. He shall then obtain at his expense one complete reproducible set of the original drawings on which he shall neatly transfer his notations and deliver these drawings to the Engineer at job completion before final payment for. delivery to the Owner. B. In addition to the above, each contractor shall accumulate during the job progress the following data in duplicate prepared in a neat brochure or packet folder and turn over to the Engineer for checking, binding and subsequent delivery to the Owner. The Electrical Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of binding into a book. 1. All warranties and guarantee and manufacturers' directions on equipment and material covered by the Contract. 2. Copies of approved shop drawings. 1.11 ELECTRICAL ENERGY, WATER AND SANITARY FACILITIES Electrical energy, water and sanitary facilities required for the construction of this project shall be provided as hereinbefore specified under the Architectural Sections of the work. All electrical energy required for welding shall be provided by the contractor.doing the welding in the form of a portable gasoline -- power generator. The electrical contractor shall not be responsible for the cost of electrical energy, water and gas required to comlete the testing of the heating and air conditioning equipment as required by these specifications. 16010-~ SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 1.12 SUPERVISION Each contractor shall keep a competent superintendent of foremen on the job at all times and shall be fully responsible for the supervision of his work. Periodic visitations to the project by the Engineer, commonly referred to as observations, is only for the express purpose of verifying compliance by the contractor with the contract Documents. Such visitations by the Engineer shall not be construed to make the Engineer responsible for providing a safe place for the performance of the work by the contractor or the contractor's employees or the safety of the supplies of the contractor or his sub-contractors. 1.13 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The interrelation of the specifications, drawings and schedules shall be as hereinbefore described in the Architectural Section of the Specifications, Section B. Should the drawings disagree in themselves, or with the specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be estimated upon, and unless otherwise offered by the Architect in writing, shall be performed or furnished. In case the specifications should not fully agree with the schedules, the later shall govern. Figures given on drawings govern scale measurements and large scale details _ govern small scale drawings. C. The "Scope of Work" as hereinbefore stated, is intended .to designate the general description of the work which shall be performed by each of the major sub-contractors. It is not intended to include all items of work, either generally or specifically, not is it intended to limit the scope of the work where plans, schedules, notes or standard practice requires the inclusion of other specified terms. D. When the drawings do not give exact details as to the elevations of pipe, conduit and ducts, the contractors shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the systems involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct system are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. Work shall be concealed in all finished area. E. Different electrical outlets, devices, etc. are indicated by symbols scheduled on drawings. Approximate locations are shown, however, the Architect reserves the right to make reasonable changes in locations without additional cost. 16010-5 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK F. Lines indicating branch circuits do not show exact routing but _ indicate the arrangement and control of circuits. Conceal raceways (unless noted otherwise) and run in most direct manner between cabinets, outlets, etc. PART2: PRODUCTS 2~1 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS -- A. Materials furnished shall be new, of best quality and grade of standard manufacture and shall conform to National Board of Fire Underwiter's requirements and bear the Underwriter's Laboratories seal of approval. B. Naming a manufacturer, brand or model number as part or all of -- the description of manuiactured items shall be deemed to include any description or specifications of such item in that manufacturer's literature currently available, the better _. quality or greater quantity of material or workmanship described shall be. furnished under this contract. Indication on drawings and/or naming in specifications of model numbers of a particular manufacturer shall not be construed as excluding from consideration similar and essentially equivalent items produced by other manufacturers, subject to the following provisions: 1. Each item of equipment shall fit plan and space allowed and surrounding conditions and fulfill completely the function for which it is intended as well as item named on drawings or in specifications. 2. Full and complete catalog illustrations, specifications and descriptive data defining in detail each item shall be submitted to Architect for approval before subcontractor places any order for such items° 2.2 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING AND HOISTING A. All horizontal runs of conduit shall be suspenced from the -- structural members above by means of approved hangers. Supports and hangers shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction in the conduit system as necessary. No conduit shall be self-supporting not shall it be supported from the equipment connections. Branch circuit conduit run above suspended ceiling may be fastened to ceiling hanger wires with approved type conduit clamps. B. Hangers shall be fastened to the contruction by the use of malleable iron a~iustable clamps, properly designed and sized for steel encountered and installed with lock nuts or bolts securely tightened. !6010-6 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK .... 2.3 SLEEVES A. Each and every conduit, regardless of material, which passes .._ thru a concrete slab, masonry wall, roof or other portion of the building structure shall be free from the structure and shall pass through a sleeve. B. All sleeves, except as hereinafter spec'ified, shall be constructed from electro metallic tubing or equivalent weight steel tubing and shall be flush on both sides of the surface penetrated. The sleeves shall be sized to allow free passage of the conduit shall be caulked with jute twine and filled with an asphalt base compound to insure a waterproof penetration. C. Sleeves passing through walls or floors on or below grade or in moist areas shall be constructed of galvanized steel, schedule 40 pipe and shall be designed with suitable flange to form a waterproof passage. After the conduit has been installed in the sleeves, the void space around the conduit sha!l b,' caulked with jute twine and filled with an asphalt base compound to insure a waterpFoof penetration. 2.4 FLOOR AN~ CEILING PLATES In each finished space, furnish a chromium plated sectional escutcheon on each conduit or hanger rod penetrating a wall, floor or ceiling. Escutcheons shall be sized to fit snugly to all lines. Where required, these plates shall be provided with set screw so that they shall fit snugly against the finished surface. FART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING Each contractor shall notify the General Contractor sufficiently ahead of th,. contruction of any floors, walls, ceiling, roofs, etc., of the ~peni::gs that will be required for his work. He shall also see tha: any and all sleeves that are required for his work are set at proper times so as not to hold up the progress of the job. Any cutting and patching required to be done because of lack of proper coordination shall be done by the General Contractor at the expense of the contractors involved. Do not request the General Contractor to cut a~v structural members without first having received written permission :rom the Architect. Cutting of round openings which can be doms by tee use of a rotary drill may be done by the contractor requiring sa:~e. 16010-7 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL --. A. Make all excavations necessary for the proper execution of work. After work has been installed, backfill with earth and properly compact to the extent that not depression or mound exists after backfill has had adequate time to settle. Excess dirt (if any) and debris shall be removed as required. --' B. All underground lines shall be carefully routed so as to miss trees, bushes and roots as directed by the _ Architect's Representative at the job site. C. Repair all paving, etc. damaged in the execution of electrical work to the satisfaction of all parties concerned. -- ELECTRIC WIRING OF MOTORS AND EOUIPMENT A. The electrical Contractor shall wire all automatic temperature control, all interlock and all power wiring for the installation of equipment furnished under other sections o-f the work. The Electrical Con:rac:or shall furnish all disconnect switches as requred for the proper operation of the equipment unless such equipment is specified to be factory mounted. B. The Mechanical Contractor will furnish complete wiring diagrams showing power wiring, interlock wiring and temperature control wiring. Diagrams shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within thirty (30) days after the submittals for equipment have been approved. Diagrams shall be based on this approved equipment and shall be complete integrated drawings, not a series of manufacturers' individual diagrams. After these " diagrams have been approved by the Engineer, copies will be furnished to the electrical Contractor by the Mechancial Contractor. They shall be followed in detail. __ C. Each contractor shall note that the electrical design and drawings are based on the equipment scheduled and shown on the drawings and should any Mechanical Contractor submit for -- approval equipment requiring changes to the electrical design for which the Electrical Contractor will request an extra, this extra shall be paid by the contractor providing the equipment ..... requiring the change. D. At job completion, the Mechanical Contractor, Eelctrical contractor, and Temperature Control Sub-contractor shall meet at job site and shall jointly inspect, check out and test each control circuit, interlock curcuit and power circuit to each piece of equipment, the Architect, Engimeer and Owner shall be advised in writing of the time and Cate of this inspection in sufficient time to allow them to make arrangements to have a representative present if desired. A mutual agreement shall be 16010-8 SPECIAL CONDITONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK -- prepared, in writing, between the Temperature Control Sub-Contractor, Mechanical Contractor and Electrical contractor, each of whom shall sign a document indicating that the system as installed and as they observed in functioning that day will meet the requirements of the plans and speci- ficatioDs and that they will unconditionally guarantee cont- inuous performance for the guarantee period as hereinafter specified. 3.4 FINAL INSPECTIONS A. The purpose of the final inspection is to determine whether the contractor has completed the work in a proper and workmanlike manner, that he has apparently installed the work in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications and that in the Architect and Engineer's opinion the work is satisfactory for the Owner to accept. B. It shall be the duty of each contractor to personally make a special inspection trip as a whole, assuring himself that the work on the project is ready for final inspection before calling upon the Architect and Engineer to make final inspection. C. In order not to delay final acceptance of the work, each contractor shall have all necessary bonds, guarantees, receipts, affidavits, etc., called for in the various articles of this specification, prepared and signed in advance, and together with a letter of transmittal, listing each paper included, shall deliver the same to the Architect at or before the time of said final inspection, the contractor is cautioned to check over each bond, receipt, etc., before preparing same for submission to see that the terms check with the requirements of the specificaiton. 3.5 CLEANING A. This contractor shall thoroughly clean all fixtures, switches, panelboards and other devices and equipment furnished and set in place under this contract. All surfaces shall be properly polished and shall be fee of paint and other dirt and debris. B. This contractor shall be required to touch up or refinish all equipment furnished with factory applied finished which have been damaged furing the construction of the work. He shall properly protect the fronts of all panelboards, switchboards and other similar equipment to prevent marring and other defacing. 16010-9 SPECIAL CONDITONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 3.6 TESTING AND LOAD BALANCING A. Test all circuits to assure them to be free of grounds. Light and test each lamp. Prove and test energy available at the load site of disconnect switches and the final point of connection -- to driven equipment.. The contractor shall make all reasonable tests as required by the Engineer to prove the integrity of his work and shall leave the complete electrical installation in _ first class condition and ready for operation. B. The various branch circuits served from the lighting panelboards vary in loading. The contractor shall carefully .... balance the load on each phase when connecting the various branch circuits in each panelboard. When all load is turned on and the system is operating at 100% demand, the initial ... unbalanced shall not exceed 10%. C. Furnish at the completion of the project or each bonafide portion of the project, final inspection certificate from the local inspecting authority. 3.7 EXISTING FACILITIES --- The location, size and elevation of all existing facilities, points of services, interferences and other similar miscellaneous information is show on the drawings in accordance with data furnished this office by the Owner and field survey performed by the Engineer accurate and complete, but the Engineers do not and cannot guarantee the accuracy of this data. It shall be the responsibility of the contractors to examine the site and verify these conditions before submitting his bid. He shall report all errors, or inconsistencies found to the Engineer, so that proper rectification of this information can be sent to all bidders before bid date. Failure to do so shall not be grounds for holding the Owner, Architect or Engineer responsible for additional charges or extras regarding cost involved in the installation due to these causes. 3.8 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS Conditions of the Contract and Division I "General Requirements" are made a part of this section whether attached hereto or not. END OF SECTION 16010-10 SECTION 16110 RACEWAY SYSTEM AND ACCESSORIES PART 1: GENERAL A. Furnish and install complete system of electrical raceways with all fittings, outlet boxes, cover places, and accessories. B. Unless otherwise noted, all raceways and aeeessories shall be hot-dipped galvanized or sherardized. C. Approved manufacturers: General Electric, National Electric Products, Pittsburgh, Republic Triangle, Youngstown, Wheatland, or Jones and Laughlin. PART 2: PRODUCTS A. Ail raceways installed in concrete, through concrete unless sleeved, or where exposed to mechanical injuries shall be rigid conduit. All other raceways may be electric metallic tubing. In general, all raceways more than nine feet;above the floor or installed directly against building partition shall be construed as not exposed to mechanical furnishing UL listed material. B. Schedule 40 PVC may be used for service lateral and telephone service provided it is installed.with a minimum of 36" of cover and rigid steel elbows are used. C. Fittings for use on raceways systems shall be as follows: 1. On all rigid conduit, use standard UL approved threaded or compression type fittings. 2. On all EMT, use compression type water tight fittings with insulated bushing. Set screw type fittings will be allowed on conduit sizes 2" and above. 3. Outlet boxes shall be standard, stamped galvanized steel boxes except as hereinafter noted. Each box shall be of the proper size to accommodate the device and function for which they are shown. Boxes for wall devices shall be single or multiple gang boxes, properly designed and sized to accept the required devices, and shall be furnished complete with plaster rings where required. Boxes for installation in masonry walls shall be special square corner masonry type. Boxes for mounting of lighting fixtures shall be 3 or 4 inch octagon boxes, equipped with 3/8" "no bolt" fixture studs. All boxes shall be furnished with proper cover or wall device places. 16110-1 RACEWAY SYSTEM AND ACCESSORIES Wall boxes for exterior use shall be hot-dipped galvanized cast iron furnished complete with weatherproof covers and rubber or neoprene gaskets. 4. Wireways, junction and pull boxes shall be fabricated in accordance with NEMA and National Electric Code standards and requirements insofar as material, gauges, dimensions and methods of fastening are concerned. All wireways, ._. junction and pull boxes shall bear Underwriters' Label. Where units are not sized on the drawings, they shall be sized in accordance with N.E.C. standards. They shall be finished in standard gray enamel, with sides and backs spot welded in position and the removable screw cover mounted with brass machine screws. 5. Flexible conduit shall be as manufactured by Greenfield or equal, and shall be flexible spiraled steel with galvanized interior and exterior except in damp or wet location which shall be rated liquid tight and sheathed with a vinyl cover. Fittings and codnnectors shall be galvanized malleable iron squeeze type for sized 1' and larger and may be twist-in type fittings where used for smaller flexible conduit. Fittings for flexible conduits in damp or wet location shall be liquid tight. Flexible .conduit may be furnished by any UL labeled domestic _._ manufacturer. PART 3: EXECUTION A. All raceways shall be run concealed where possible and if exposed shall be run parallel to the axis of the building. B. 'It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to determine from the Architectural Drawings and by actual determination on sit, the exact location of each and every outlet. The outlet locations shall be modified from those shown on the plans to accomodate changes in door swings or to clear other im~erferences that may arise from job construction details, as well as modification to center within specific spaces. These modifications shall be made without change in contrac: price. The Owner reserves the right to relocate lighting fixtures and power convenience outlets to a point within eight feet of that shown without any change in contract price providing the contractor is advised of the new location before he starts installation of the conduit and boxes affected. The contractor shall check such conditions throughout tke entire job and shall notify the Architect and Engineer of discrepancies that may occur before proceeding with the 16110-2 RACEWAY SYSTEM AND ACCESSORIES installation of the work. Wall boxes shall be set in advance of -- wall construction. They shall be blocked in place and secured. All wall boxes shall be set flush with the finished building construction and the contractor shall furnish and install extension sleeves as required to extend boxes to the finished surfaces of special furring or wall finishes. C. Where rigid steel conduit is installed under or within concrete slabs, it shall be wrapped (half-lapped) with Scotch 33 Plastic Tape. D. No conduit larger than 1" diameter shall be installed in slab without the permission of the structural engineer. E. Unless noted otherwise or directed by the Architect to the contrary at the time of installation, outlet boxes shall be placed at the following heights - center of box ~o finished floor level. Wall switches and thermostats - 4'6"; convenience outlets and telephones - 12"; clock outlets - 12" below ceiling. F. Conduit sizes as shown on the drawings are minimum. Where sizes are not shown, use %" conduit as minimum size. All conduit shall be of addequate size to allow the installation of conductors without excessive strain or damage. Ream out ends of all conduit before installation of wire. Keep dry during construction by properly plugging or capping all ends and swab out before wires are pulled in. All bends shall be made with approved bending device, an all crushed, deformed or insured conduit must be replaced before pulling of wire. Do not install conduit horizontally in concrete slabs without written approval from the Structural Engineer. All roof penetrations shall be made in adequate time to allow the Roofer to make proper flashings. Where conduit penetrates concrete or steel beams, provide suitable sleeves, allowing a minimum gap of one fourth inch. Where these penetrations must be waterproofed, this gap shall be properly caulked with oakum and run full of asphalt mastic. G. Lubrication for pulling wires shall be soap stone blown through raceways or soap stone paste on wires. H. All empty raceways shall have nylon cord left in them and properly tagged at each end to identify terminal points. I. All motors and other rotating equipment shall be connected to the conduit system by the use of a section of flexible conduit not less than 12" in length nor more than 2a" in length. This flexible connection shall be furnished for both power and control wire. 16110-3 RACEWAY SYSTEM AND ACCESSORIES J. All rigid metallic conduits shall be equipped with double locknuts and molded plastic insulated bushings where such _ conduits enter sheet metal construction such as panelboards, wireways, cabinets, pullboxes, junction boxes, and other raceways. Install grounded type insulated bushings where specified. All rigid metallic, conduits terminating into pressed steel.boxes shall be installed with insulated throat fittings°- K. All EMT conduits shall be equipped with insulated throat _ bushings and locknuts where such conduits enter outlet and junction boxes as well as where such conduits enter sheet metal construction such as panelboards, wireways, cabinets, pullboxes, junction boxes, and other raceways. END OF SECTION SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS .... PART 1: GENERAL A. Furnish and install all wiring, cable, and connectors. B. All conductors shall be copper. At contractors option, conductors size 4/0 and larger may be aluminum. Submit shop drawings for approval before aluminum conductors are installed. C. Wire shall be manufactured by General Electric, Okonite, Simplex, Anaconda or equal. D. Minimum size for Fower and lighting circuits shall be =12. All conductors #8 and larger shall be stranded, insulation rating of all conductors over 50 volts up to and including 480 volt shall be 600 volt. E. Feeder wire shall be type THW insulated. F. Branch circuit wiring may be type TW. G. All wiring shall be run in raceways unless noted otherwise. PART 2: PRODUCTS A. Type TW wire shall have thermoplastic, 60 degree C, 600 volt insulation suitable for wet or ~ry locations. B. Type THW shall have thermoplastic, 75 degree C, 600 volt insulation suitable for wet or dry locations. PART 3: EXECUTION A. Make connections to terminal using pressure type connector. Soldered joints will not be permitted. All joints in conductors shall be made by first twisting the conductors and then apply a UL approved insulated, cadmium plated, live steel, spring type connector in all sizes up to the catalogue capacity of the connectors, in no case will wire nuts be allowed. On sizes larger than catalogue capacity of the connectors listed above, joints shall be made with an approved clamp type solderless connector insulated with a UL approved plastic electrical tape with the number of layers required to give an insulating quality equal to that of the conductor itself. B. All wire #6 gauge and smaller shall be factory color coded. Where factory color is not available mark conductors on each end with a 1 inch band of colored pressure sensitive plastic tape or by the use of a brillant waterproof lacquer properly applied. Colors for each phase andf the neutral shall be consistant throughout the system. Color code shall be as follows: 16120-1 CONDUCTORS 120/208 277/&80 _ Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Orange Phase C Blue Yellow -- Neutral White Green C. A white conductor shall be the neutral at each lighting -- fixture. Switches shall be installed in hot legs. D. Installation of conductors shall be made in a neat and workmanlike manner to meet code requirements and shall be run continuous without weld, splice or joint between boxes. Do not install wires in conduit unless the entire system of conduit and outlet boxes is permanently in place. All conductors shall -- be pulled using a UL approved wire lubricant. Eo Unless otherwise noted, all branch circuit conductors shall be No. 12 AWG. Any branch circuit run over 50 feet in length, measuring one way from the first outlet of the circuit to the panel, shall be No. IOAWG to the first outlet. END OF SECTION 16120-2 SECTION 16134 DISTRIBUTION AND LIGHTING PANELBOARDS PAR/ 1: GENERAL A. Panelboards shall consist of a box, front, interior and circuit protective devices and shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA standards and bear applicable Underwriters' Laboratories B. The box shall be fabricated from code gauge galvanized sheet steel in accordance with the latest UL standards and shall have a turned edge around the front for rigidity and for clamping on front. Standard knockouts shall be provided. The front shall be fabricated from sheet steel and finished with baked on gray enamel over a rust inhibitor. Each front shall have a doer mounted on semi-concealed hinges with a cylinder lock index card an card holder. All panelboard locks shall be master keyed and all index cards shall be properly completed on a typewriter. Boxes shall be nominally 22" wide and 5-3/4" deep. C. The interiors shall consist of a factory assembled rigid frame, supporting the rectangular bus, the mains and the neutral bar. The bussing shall be copper or aluminum, arranged for sequence phasing throughout and have a current density so maintain a maximum 65 degree C. temperature rise over a 40 degree C. ambient temperature. The neutral bar shall be located at the opposite end of the structure from the mains and shall have -numbered terminals, ihe mains shall have either solderless logs or a main circuit protective device as scheduled. D. The circuit protective devices shall be moulded case circuit breakers of the quick-make, quick-break thermal magnetic type and shall be operated by means of toggle type mechanism with trip indication. The number of poles, ampere rating and trip rating of the breakers shall be as scheduled. The short circuit rating shall be in accordance wi~h NEMA standards for sizes required. All circuit breakers shall be of the bolt-in-type. E. Approved Manufactures: General Electric Federal Pacific ITE Sylvania Sooare "m" Westinghouse PAll 2: PRODUCTS A. Refer to ether sections PART 5: EXECUYiOS A. Refer to other sections. END CF SECTION SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES --- PART 1: GENERAL A. Supply and install all devices indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein and as required to form complete and integrated systems. B. Devices shall be as manufactured by G.E., Arrow Hart, Hubbell, P & S, Bryant, Leviton, or equal. PART 2: PRODUCTS A. Switches 1. Wall swithces controlling loads not more than 2000 watts at 120 volts shall be as follows: Type P & S No. Single Pole 15AC1-Series Two Pole 15AC2-Series Three Pole 15AC3-Series Four Way 15AC4-Series Lock 15AC1-L Series ..... B. Receptacles 1. 15 Amp - 125V, 2 P/3W'groundings: P & S ~5251 (Single) P & S #5352 (duplex) 20 Amp - 125V, 2 P/3W groundings: P & S ~5351 (single) P & S ~5352 (duplex) C. Covers 1. Weatherproof covers: P & S ~&510. 2. Coverplates for each and every device shall be furnished and installed by this contract. Ail plates shall be one piece. No sectional plates will be allowed. In all finished areas unless specifically indicated to the contrary, furnish and install smooth ivory plastic cover plates with matching screws. In toilet rooms and other similar areas with ceramic tile and seamless coated walls, furnish and install .040 inch stainless steel brushed satin finish cover plates with matching screws. Where telephone an other communication outlets are required in '- these spaces, furnish protective housing. In machinery rooms and other similar areas with exposed conduit furnish galvanized steel plates to fit in exposed box. 16140-1 WIRING DEVICES PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Local Switches 1. ~nstall and wire local switches to control outlets, appliances, circuits, etc. at points indicated on the Drawings. 2. The contractor shall verify color of all devices with architect before ordering. The color selected by the architec~ will be a standard color available and catalogued by manufacturer. 3. Install weatherproof type where noted and/or as required by N.E.C. END OF SECTION 161a0-2 S£CTION 16170 SAFETY SWITCHES PART 1: GENERAL A. Supply and install all safety switches shown on the Drawings and/or required by N.E.C. B. Provide a disconnect switch for each device and each motor as requi.red by N.E.C. regardless of contract under which the motor of device is provided. C. Switches shall have number of poles and ratings as noted or required and shall be fcr normal duty unless otherwise noted. D. Switches shall be unfused where used as disconnects. E. Ali switches to be mounted outside shall be weatherproof. PART 2: PRODUCTS A. Safety switches (unless otherwise specifically noted) shall be equal to G.E.Ouick Make Ouick Break type externally operated safety switch in NEMA 1 enclbsure. Switches shall comply with requirements of X.E.C., N.B.F.U. and N.M.-P.O. for each particular use and codnstructed as per NEMA Standards, type "ND". B. Approved Manufacturers: Federal Pacific, General Electric, Square "D", Westinghouse and Cutler Hamme'r. PART 3: EXECUTION A. The installation for all switches, starters, and wirewavs that shall be installed in a 3/4 inch thick piece of exterior grade plywood furnished and installed by this contractor. Plywood shall be properly sized for particular installation and shall be carefully mounted o~ the wall by means of toggle bolts or expansion shields. Board shall be primed and painted with two coats of black enamel before the installation of equipment. All equipment shall be neatly arranged and properly and gquarely lined up before fastexixz to board. All starters, swithces and wire~ays shail then ~e tightly fastened with an adequate number of round headed wooc screws to properly support the equipment. B. Switches shall be connected ahead of all controls and taps to insure maximum safety for maintenance and repair. ENL ~T SECTION 16!70-1 SECTION 16181 FUSES · -- PART 1: GENERAL A. Supply and install all fuses in each fused device. PART 2: PRODUCTS A. Circuits 601 to 6000 ampere shall be protected by current limiting Bussman Hi-Cap Time-Delay Fuses KRP-C. Fuses shall employ "O" rings as positive seals between the end bells and the glass melamine fuse barrel. 'The terminal shall be peened. .. Fuses shall be time-delay and must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 times rated current in .O1 seconds or less and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class L. B. Circuits O to 6OC ampere shall be protected by current limiting · - Bussman Low-Peak Dual-Element Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts). All dual-element fuses shall have separate overload and shorE-circuit elements. Fuse shall .incorporate a _. spring activated thermal overload element having a 282 degree F. melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short-circuit clearing chamber. The fuse must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds and be listed by .... Underwriters Labcratories Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s, symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1. C. Motor Circuits-All individual motor circuits rated a80 amperes or less shall be protected by Bussman Low-Peak Dual-Element Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts). Larger H.P. motors shall be protected by Bussman type KRP-C Hi-Cap Time-Delay Fuses of the rating shown on the Drawings. The fuses shall be EL Class RK1. D. Circuit breaker panels shall be protected by Bussman Low-Peak Dual- Element Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts) as shown on the Drawings. The fuses shall be UL Class RK!. E. Provide one (1) spare set of fuses for each size and capacity used on the project. PART 3: EXECUTION A. Install labels im all fused devices indicating proper size fuse to use. END OF SECTION SECTION 16460 TRANSFORMERS PART 1: GENERAL A. Supply and install transformers of capacity indicated on Drawings and where indicated on the drawings. B. Transformers shall be as manufactrued by G.E., Westinghouse, FPE, Square "D", I.T.E. or equal. C. Transformers shall have 2-2{" taps FCBN and 4-2½' taps FCAN and with neutral brought out for grounding. PART 2: PRODUCTS A. Transformers shall be indoor dry type and shall be self-cooled by natural draft, Class H insulation, 40 degrees C ambient temperature and shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA and ASA standards for transformers. B. Except as otherwise specified, noise level of each transformer shall not exceed the following when measured in accordance with ASA C 89.1, 1961 standards: 1. 15 KVA and below - 40 db 2. 30-150 KVA - 50 db · -- 3. 167-3OO KVA - 55 db PART 3: EXECUTION A. Mount transformer on floor or on housekeeping pads as shown, on vibration isolators of type recommended by manufacturer. B. Install as recommended by Manufacturer. END OF SECTION 16460-1 SECTION 16470 SWITCHBOARD PART 1: GENERAL A. Provide and install a switchboard of size and type noted on Drawings and as specified hereafter. B. Switchboard shall be manufactured by G.E., Westinghouse, YPE, Square 'D', I.T.E., or approved equal. C. Switchboard shall be of service entrance type. D. Swithcboard shall be equal to G.E. "AY Switchboard". E. Provide bus connections for bus ducts as required. PART 2: PRODUCTS A. Switchboard shall generally consist of sections each 30" wide x 30" deep x 90" high and shall form a free standing structure with front access. B. Switchboard shall have ~ main busing and shall have ~ neutral and ground bus.' (See Schedule on Drawings). C. Switchboard shall be suitable for 480/277V13 phase/4 wire -- service and sha'll be complete with appropriate HPC switches and GE tpe or OHR switches. D. Provide current limiting fuses for all switches as scheduled. E. Provide suitable gound fault protection for all feeders over 800 amp as per NEC. PART 3: EXECUTION A. Install as per recommendations fo manufacturer and as per NEC. B. Incoming line section shall contain voltage meter, AHP meter and selector switches. END OF SECTION 16&70-1 SECTION 16501 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1: GENERAL A. This contractor shall furnish and install a lighting fixture as hereinafter specified and scheduled on each and every outlet in accordance with the type designation shown on the drawing. If a type .designation.is omitted, the fixture shall be of the same type as is shown for rooms of similar usage. Verify before purchase and installation. B. Fixtures are specified in the schedule by manufacturers' name and catalogue number, but fixtures by listed, approved manufacturers which are, in the opinion of the Architect and Engineer, similar and equal with respect to quality of materials, components and construction, light distribution characteristics and physical size, shape and appearance, may be substituted. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE Refer to the plans for the light fixture schedule. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. This contractor shall install a lighting fixture as hereinafter specified and scheduled on each and every outlet in accordance with the type designations shown. If a type designation is omitted, the fixture shall be of the same type as is shown for rooms of similar usage. ~erify before purchase and installation. Certain other lighting fixtures, as specifically indicated and scheduled will be furnished and delivered to the job site by the Owner. The contractor shall furnish the Owner a list of these required fixtures, including the types and number required, sufficiently ahead of time to provide for delivery without causing delay of the work. The contractor shall receive these fixtures at the job site and shall properly store, unpack and install. B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to check the Architectural finishes, and regardless of the catalogue number prefixes and suffixes shown, furnish fixtures with the proper tie, frames, supports and hangers and other miscellaneous appurtenances to properly coordinate with said finishes. Where ceiling construction requires reinforcing to support the weigkt of the fixtures, it shall be furnished by this Contractor. 165CI-I 5/84 LIGHT FIXTURES - C. All florescent fixtures installed on ceilings shall be provided with a 1~" spacer between ballast housing and ceiling, all fixtures shall be properly and carefully supported and aligned. Furnish and install all necessary steel shapes, etc., for '-' support of fixtures as required and/or detailed on the drawings. Lighting fixtures shall be clean and lamped with new lamps at the time of final inspection, unless otherwise .... indicated on the drawings. All fixtures iln plaster ceilings shall be installed with a plaster frame. Unless otherwise noted, mounting height for fixtures are from the finished floor to the bottom of the fixture for pendant mounted fixtures, and to the bottom of the outlet box or recessed back box for wall mounted fixtures. END OF SECTION 16501-2 SECTION 16551 LAMPS .... PART 1: GENERAL A. All lamps used on this project shall be new, delivered to the job site in the original packing cases and sleeves and shall be of the same manufacture. Unless otherwise scheduled, incandescent lamps shall be inside, forsted general service lamps and fluorescent lamps shall be rapid start, standard cool white color. B. Approved Manufactruer: General Electric. PART 2: PRODUCTS ... Refer to other sections of the specifications. PART 3: EXECUTION Refer to other sections of the specifications. END OF SECTION 16551-1 SECTION 16552 BALLASTS PART 1: GENERAL A. Ballasts for fluorescent lamps, unless otherwise scheduled, shall be class "P", high power factor, two lamp if possible and manufactrured in accordance with CBM standards and ETL certified and UL approved. Each ballast shall be protected by a built-in non-resetting thermal protector in the core and-coil assemblyyy. All ballasts shall be rated to opperate at the service voltage as shown and as specified, plus or minus the deviations which the electric service company is allowed by franchise. B. Approved Ballast Manufacturers: Universal, or approved equal. PART 2: PRODUCTS Refer to other sections of the specifications. PART 3: EXECUTION Refer to other sections of the specifications. END OF SECTION !6552-1 SECTION 16600 CONNECTIONS TO EOUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATION PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 MISCELLANEOUS EOUIPMENT A. This contractor shall rough-in for and/or make final connections to all miscellaneous equipment requiring electrical connections as shown and called for on the drawings. All work shall be done in accordance with approved shop drawings furnished by the equipment supplier. Where rough-in only is called for, sufficient pigtails shall be left in the outlet boxes to facilitate extension to the equipment. Ends of conductors shall be properly taped and boxes furnished with suitable covers. PART 2: PRODUCTS A. Refer to other sections of the specification. PART 3: EXECUTION A. Refer to other sections of the specification. B. Food Service Equipment 1. Furnished and installed by Food Service Contractor. 2. Final conntection by Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION 16600-i SECTION 16760 FIRE ALAI~ SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This section covers the furnishing and installation of a complete low voltage, zoned, master coded, electrically supervised, closed circuit fire alarm system with control panel as described herein and shown on the plans. B. The catalogue numbers specified in the following are those of the Edwards Co. and constitute the type and qualities of equipment. Supplier shall be able to refer to similar installation in the immediate area furnished and serviced by him during the past three (3) years, providing satisfactory service. Comparable equipment of other manufacture may be considered if properly submitted to the Architect ten (10) days .... prior to the bid date. 1.2 FUNCTION A. Under normal supervisory conditions, the trouble and alarm lamps shall be extinguished and all signals silent. In the event of power failure or an open in the wring to the stations, the troubl~ signal shall sound continuously, and the trouble lamp pertaining to the particular zone or circuit shall remain lighted until the fault has been corrected. The trouble signal . . may be silenced at any time by operating the self-restoring silencing switch; however, the trouble lamps shall remain lighted. -' B. On the front of the Control Panel shall be mounted two (2) momentary push switches to function as follows: 1. "DRILL" shall be engraved on a yellow plate. Operation of this switch shall cause all alarm devices to sound while pushbutton is held in (Manual signaling for drills, etc.). 2. "EVACUATION" shall be engraved on a red plate. Momentary operation of this switch shall cause the evacuation alarm to be automatically transmitted through all alarm devices. C. The system shall be arranged with manual non-coded stations grouped in zones with an associated zone lamp indication for each at the control panel. Operation of a ststion shall sound a master-coded evacuation alarm on all fire signals, and flash the associated "zone" 'and common "alarm" lamps on the panel. The alarm will sound until the signal silence switch is operated or the system is reset. D. The master-coded general-aIarm signals may alsQ be activated by operating the "EVACUATION" switch on the control panel. Operation of this switch will light the alarm and trouble lamp · 16760-1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM on the general alarm station circuit, causing all general alarm signal devices to operate through the mater-coded alarm cycle. The common trouble signal and trouble lamp will operate also. The signal and alarms may be silenced by operating the signal and alarm silencing switches (each self-restoring). E. A lamp test switch to light all zone and trouble lamps shall be provided. A ground fault indicating lamp shall indicate any ground on the initiating or signaling circuits. - F. Each item of equipment, including parts and accessories, shall be constructed in a workmanlike manner, using new materials of the best quality obtainable for the purposes intended. Each .... item shall be capable of performing its function over an extended period of time with a minimum of attention and maintenance. The materials, wiring, and equipment shall be designed and built in accordance with the best practices of the electrical industry and shall conform to the standards of the National Electrical Code and applicable state and local regulations. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 Control Cabinet: Shall be modular construction and consist of the following components: A. Edwards 5730 Cabinet B. Edwards 5731-1-Flush Trim C. Edwards 5721 Control Panel D. Edwards 5703 Five circuit strip E. Edwards 5701-A1 Charger Module F. Edwards 5701-B2 Master Code Module (March Time) G. Edwards 5703-R1 Alarm Receiving Modules (Three)(3 Zones) (l-Kitchen, 2-N. Wing, 3-S. Wing) H. Edwards 5703-S1 Signal Modules(Two) I. Edwards 5724-2 Battery Pack - 4.5 Amphours J. Edwards #821 Momentary Push Button (Two) 2.2 Break Glass Stations: Edward~ teardrop design #270-SPO, open circuit manual station complete the AESPI flush-mounting cabinet (maximum recessing depth, 3") Mounded 60" above floor. Stations shall be ' zoned as indicated on plans. 16760-2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 2.3 Visual Indicating Devices: Edwards 890-WDA-G5 with "FIRE" silk screened on the lens. 2.4 Bells: Edwards 439-6AW. 2.5 Wiring: All system wiring shall be U.L. approved low energy, fire alarm system cable. Cable shall be run in conduit, separate from any other wire and cable. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 Securely fasten system components, independent of wiring to their supports. Runs of conduit shall be straight, neatly arranged, and properly supported. 3.2 All work shall be coordinated and reviewed beforehand with the manufacturer and installer of fire-alarm equipment and shall be accomplished in such a manner as to not effect operation or supervision of audible and visual fire-alarm system. 3.3 ? The contractor shall be licensed by the State of Texas to sell, install, and maintain fire-alarm systems as required by Senate Bill 925. 3.4 TESTING: Wiring shall be checked and tested by the installing Contractor in accordance with the .instructions provided by the manufacturer to insure that the system is free of grounds, open and shorts. 3.5 GUARANTEE: The contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring to be free from mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one year from date of installation. 3.6 CLEANUP: Cleanup all debris caused by the work of this section, keeping the premises clean and neat at all times. END OF SECTION ~.6760-3 SECTION 16761 CLOCK & BELLS PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Furnish and install a complete working synchronous Master clock and program system as shown on the plans and described herein. The system shall consist of Master Time and Program Control, secondary clocks, program bells, conduit, cable and all necessary miscellaneous items required. B. The Master Time and Program Control shall be a microprocessor-based unit installed in the sound system control turret. Time signals shall sound through the P.A. and intercom system speakers. Outside signals shall be weather-proof bells. C. The catalogue numbers specified in the following are those of the Rauland-Borg Co. and constitute the type and qualities of equipment furnished. The equipment supplier shall be able to refer to similar installation in the immediate area furnished and serviced by him during the past three (3) years, providing satisfactory service. Comparable equipment of other manufacture may be considered if properly sumbitted to the Architect ten (10) days prior to the bid date. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 The Master Control Clock System shall be a Rauland Model 2424NU or approved equal. It shall be micro-processor-based, and shall be easily programmable by the user through electronic means. A simple step-by-step guide shall be provided to enable the user to accomplish the programming quickly and correctly. Master control clocks which are not microprocessor-based and/or which require a technician or programmer to perform the initial programming and subsequent changes in program, at additional cost, shall not be considered. The programmable master control clock shall be capable of storing and controlling 114 separate events (such as ringing bells). It shall program and control: 1. The time at which the event is to occur, and whether AM or PM. 2. The selection of any one zone or any combination of zones (up to 6), where the event is to take place. 3. The day or days of the week on which the event is to occur. 4. Either of two schedules: "A" (normal) or "B" (special) to permit flexible rearrangement of events to accommodate special circumstances. The clock shall provide for the electronic ~election- of the following operational "modes": 1. "Load"-which shall access entry of each element of the program into the clock memory. CLOCK & BELLS 2. "Edit"-which shall permit the sequential display of all programs entered, for the purpose of review, correction, or change. 3. "Time"-which shall permit the entry of "present" time display on the clock panel. 4. "Test"-which shall test the operation of events by displaying and activating them sequentially, beginning at present time, and enables automatic "Ail Zone" Test. 5. "Run"-which shall be the mode for normal operation. The clock shall further provide a 16-button keyboard for accomplishing the programming, which shall require no special skill or training to perform. The keys shall be numbered "O" to "9", and shall include "Erase", "Clear", "Enter", and "Function" keys, as well as "left" and "right" pointer keys. Operation of the keyboard shal! insert into the clock memory, by following a simple set of siep-by-step instructions, all of the elements required for program~ing an event, i.e., the time the event is to occur, and whether AM or PM; the zone or zones in which it is to take place; the day or days on which it is to occur; the selection of either of two schedules required ~o accommodate normal or special circumstances. Once the prog-amming for an event has been completed, the entire program shall be clearly displayed for review before it is entered into the memory. -' The master control clock shall further provide: 1. Selector switches for manually- controlling each zone, plus a separate switc~ for manually, activating all zones simultaneously. 2. Selector switches for selecting "A" (normal) or "B" (special) schedules. 3. Instantaneous indication of any improper operation of the keyboard and rejection of the erroneous entry, accompanied by an audible "invalid entry" signal and a simultaneous digital display describing the error made. &. Interface with virtually all secondary clocks, with provision for appropriate hourly and minute corrections. 5. Keyboard control of manual correction signal to secondary clocks to move it within range of the next automatic correction. 6. Instantaneous daylight savings changes by the activation of a single button on the keyboard. 7. Display of the next scheduled event on the clock by activating a single button on the keyboard. __ 8. A foolproof method to prevent tampering with the clock or unauthorized program change, by electronically locking (or unlocking) the keyboard through the use of cwo coded buttons; any attempt to operate any key when the keyboard is in "locked mode" shall sound the "ihvalid entry" signal. 9. A two- to ten-second adjustable tone signal duration. 10. Automatic test mode selected through the keyboard for activating all bells to ring every minute in all bell locations as a check on their operation. 11. A 72-hour back-up in the event of a power failure. (When the 16761~2 CLOCK & BELLS unit is on battery operation it shall be possible to display the -- time manually.) 12. Crystal control of time-base. 13. A companion instruction panel detailing the programmin procedure in step-to-step sequence. The power requirements for the programmable master clock shall be 110 volts AC, 60 Hz. It shall be available for standard rack mount. The clock shall incorporate all-solid-state circuitry mounted on a U.L.-approved G-10 glass epoxy printed circuit board. 2.2 Secondary Clocks: A. Flush Mounting, 12-inch round clocks Rauland Model 2462, 3-wire, 120 V.A.C. complete with Model 2a71 back box. 2.3 Program Bells: Exterior Bells shall be Edwards Model 34OG-1ON5, lO-inch with protective grid and 349 weather proof box. PART 3: EXECUTION ~.1 Installation A. Exact locations and mounting heights shall be as indicated on the drawings and/or as required for coordinated element in ..... Architectural elevations. B. Conduit and Wiring - Furnish and install all necessary conduit and wiring to each outlet. Wires to clocks and bells to be not less than #12 AWG copper. Wires common to all clocks and bells shall be color coded the same throughout, and wiring shall be installed in accordance with N.E.C. & local building codes. C. Guarantee: This contractor shall guarantee the clock and bell system from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance. END OF SECIION 16761-3 SECTION 16762 PUBLIC ADDRESS & INTERCOH PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: A. Furnish and install a complete and working Public Address, Intercom, and Time Signal System as specified herein and as indicated on the plans. B. The catalogue numbers specified in the following are those of the Rauland-Borg Co. and constitute the type and qualities of equipment to be furnished. The equipment supplier shall be able to refer to similar installations in the immediate area furnished and serviced by him during the past three (3) years providing satisfactory service. Comparable equipment manufactured by Altec or Dukane may be considered if properly submitted to the Architect/Engineer at least ten (10) days prior to bid date. 1.2 FUNCTION: -- A. The system shall consist of the following: A S~und Con~nunications Control Center incorporatin8 the master time and program control, Classroom. Loudspeakers, and all associated materials, hardware, and wiring necessary for a complete, satisfactorily installed -operating system which meets specified requirements. The Central Sound/Communications Control Center shall be a Rauland Director II Series Control Center or approved equal, function identified color-keyed pushbuttons associated color guidelines, and supported by. step-by-step instructions printed on the control panels. B.The Sound/Communications system shall provide the following features and functions: 1. Direct 2-way voice communications between the Control Center and any classroom or any other speaker-equipped location. 2. Adequate power (5 watts minimum) to override high noise levels. 3. Facilities for automatically sounding a warning tone signal (beep) over any loudspeakers selected for 2-way communications. The warning tone signal shall sound whenever the classroom is being monitored, and shall automatically repeat at regular intervals. .... 4. Selective distribution of_program material to any or all. classrooms. 5. Ability to transmit a program or announcement- simultaneously to all classrooms and location by the 16762-1 PUBLIC ADDRESS & INTERCOM simple operation of a single color-coded Ail-Call pushbutton switch. -- 6. Built-in facilities for the following: A. Reception of AM and FM broadcasts from built-in turner, and their distribution to any or all speakers. B. Reproduction of recorded music and other program material from built-in cassette tape-player, and its distribution to any or to all speakers. C. Distribution of programs originating at remotely located microphones with provisions for volume control at the remote location. Program selection shall be easily accomplished by simply pressing the appropriately labeled pushbutton. 7. Built-in facilities for selective distribution of six-program time signals to any and/or all speakers or areas equipped with speakers, complete with 'individual speaker line relays, time zone patch panels, accessible from the front of control unit, and spearate time tone amplifier with tone generator. 8. Distribution of announcements from the Control Center microphone to any or'all speakers. 9. Provisions for the instantaneous distribution from the Control Center of emergency messages to all locations equipped with loudspeakers, simply by pressing a single red pushbutton. This action shall bypass all other controls, override all other programs, and transmit the emergency message at a preset volume level. 10. Input facilities for 2 low-impedance microphones and 3 - auxiliary program sources. 11.Selective distribution of all program material to at least (50 classrooms, with adequate reserve panel space. 12.Aural and visual monitoring facilities for the program channel. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 Communications Control Cen~er; Shall be Rauland Model ABC-1100, all solid-state, console consisting of the following: A. Rauland T-2600 Desk Top Control Cabinet 'B. Rauland MCI-210 Master Con'trol Panel 16762-2 PUBLIC ADDRESS & INTERCOM C. Rauland, SRX-163 AM/FM Turner/Cassette D. Two (2) Rauland SW-25 Switch Panels, each equipped with Model TZ25 Time Zone Relay Panel. E. Rauland ZPPC50 Zone Patch Panel F. Rauland TGM-5/DSA120 Time Tone Generator/Amplifier, 120 watts. G. Rauland DSA-60, 60 watt Program Amplifier H. Rauland Blank Panels, Tinted brushed chrome to complete console pane.1 spaces. 2.2 Console Microphone: Rauland Model 1265 with Press-to-Talk switch and KLR-3-11 plug to match all mic receptacles. 2.3 AM/FM Antenna: FM antenna shall be Jerrol, FM-5 omni-directional: AM antenna shall be a flat-top as recommended by the radio manufacturer. 2.4 Flush Ceiling Speakers A. Rauland Model US0-188 Speaker/Transformer Assembly B. Soundolier Model 96-8 Back box C. Soundolier Model M222 White, grille D. Soundolier Model 180-2 support rails 2.5 Wall Mic Receptacles; Soundolier Model S-501-14, one-gang stainless steel plate with XLR-3-14 mic receptacle. 2.6 Cafetorium Amplifier: Rauland Model 4704 with 47BBF flush mounting back box, four (4) low impedance mic inputs, one (1) Hi-impedance auxiliary input, built-in one-octave equalizer and built-in automatic throw-over relay. Relay to automatically transfer cafetorium speakers from main console to cafetorium amplifier when power switch of cafetorium amplifier is turned "ON". A microphone receptacle and a 704-B jack for auxiliary input shall be .... incorporated on the front panel. 2.7 Cafetorium Microphones: 1. Furnish Two (2) Turner SE-13 microphones, each with XLR-3-11 plug. 2. Furnish Two (2) Atlas Model MS-12C floor stands. 3. Furnish One (1) Atlas GN-6 goose-nec~ with mounting flange installed on owners' rostrum. 16762-3 PUBLIC ADDRESS & INTERCOM 4. Furnish Two (2) 25' mic extension cables. 2.8 Cables: All mic and speaker cables shall be in conduit. A.Mic cable shall be Belden #8762 with separate cable from each mic receptacle connected to amplifier. B. Speaker cable shall be Belden #8450 with separate cable from each room speaker or group of speakers in one area connected to a separate selector switch on the control center. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 Upon completion of system installation, Sound Contractor shall test each and every speaker for operation and proper level for the area to be covered using a constant input signal through "All-Call" and measuring the level with a Sound Meter. 3.2 Guarantee: This contractor shall guarantee the Public Address/Intercom System from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. END OF SECTON 16762-4